Some improvements to the art of teaching especially in the first grounding of a young scholar in grammar learning. Shewing a short, sure, and easie way to bring a scholar to variety and elegancy in writing Latine. Written for the help and ease of all ushers of schools, and country school-masters, and for the use and profit of all younger scholars. The second edition with many additions. By William Walker, B.D. author of the Treatise of English particles.

THE ART OF TEACHING, Improved in the grounding of a young Scholar in the Latine TONGUE.

CHAP. I. Of the Forming of Nouns.

INtending to write, not upon every thing, that is to be performed by the Teacher, or prescrib∣ed to the Learner, of the Latine Tongue, but only on some particular observables, condu∣cing * 1.1 to the Grounding of a young Scholar therein, I begin with that which is both most necessary, and most useful, the Declining, or Forming of Nouns: touching which the Directions to the Teacher are as followeth.

First, In the learning of the Declensions of Nouns make your Scholars to attend unto, and be expert in the English signs of every several Case, by ma∣king them together with the Latine Nouns, which they decline, to give the English: thus, Nom. Musa, a song, G. Musae, of a song, D. Musae, to a song, A. Musam, a, or the song, &c. This initiates them in the Practice of rendring Latine into English.

Secondly, Use them not onely to give the En∣glish for the Latine, but also, vice versâ, the Latine for the English: thus, N. A song, Musa, G. Of a song, Musae, D. To a song, Musae, &c. This ini∣tiates them in the skill of turning English into La∣tine.

Thirdly, Practise them in declining forwards and backwards (i. e. Latine before English, and English before Latine) Substantives and Adjectives, first of like Termination in all Cases: as, Musa ju∣cunda: then of unlike Termination; first in fewer Cases, as, dies splendens; then in more, as, Poeta doctus, lapis pre••iosus, ficus pulla, &c. and so far as may be done in all Declensions. This Exer∣cise, as being directly the practice of all the second concord, will be of very great use to them in ma∣king of Latine.

It will be of great use to the purposes aforesaid, to put them to the forming of English Substantives, first alone without Adjectives; thus, N. a house, G. of a house, &c. then together with Adjectives; thus, N. a fair house, G. of a fair house, &c.

Fourthly, When they are perfect in the Ter∣minations of the Cases of every Declension several∣ly, then exercise then in giving the Terminations of every Case throughout all the Declensions toge∣ther: after this manner.

The Terminations of all the Cases in every Declension.

The Genitive Case singular of the First Declension ends in ae, as Musae; of the Second in i, as Magistri; of the Third in is, as Lapidis; of the Fourth in us, as Manus; of the Fifth in ei, as Diei.

The Dative Case Singular of the First Declension ends in ae, as Masae; of the Second in o, as Magistro; of the Third in i, as Lapidi; of the Fourth in ui, as Manui; of the Fifth in ei, as Diei.

The Accusative Case Singular of the First De∣clension ends in am, as Musam; of the Second in um, as Magistrum; of the Third in em, as Lapidem, or in im, as Sitim, or in both em and im, as Fe∣brem and Febrim; of the Fourth in um, as Manum; of the Fifth in em, as Diem.

The Vocative is like the Nominative: except in Some Nouns of the Second Declension ending in us or ius, whose Vocative respectively ends in e, or i; as Nom. Dominus, Voc. Domine. N. Filius, V. Fili.

The Ablative Case Singular of the First De∣clension ends in a, as Musâ; of the Second in o, as Magistro; of the Third in e, as Lapide, or in i, as Siti, or in both e and i, as Febre and Febri; of the Fourth in u, as Manu; of the Fifth in e, as Die.

The Nominative Case Plural of the First Declen∣sion ends in ae, as Musae; of the Second in i, as Magistri; of the Third in es, as Lapides; of the Fourth in us, as Manus; of the Fifth in es, as Dies.

The Genitive Case Pural of the First Declension ends in arum, as Musarum; of the Second in orum, as Magistrorum; of the Third in um, as Lapidum,

or in ium, as Febrium; of the Fourth in uum, as Manuum; of the Fifth in erum, as Dierum.

The Dative Case Plural of the First Declension ends in is, as Musis, or in abus, as Mulabus, or in both is and abus, as Filiis and Filiabus; of the Se∣cond in is, as Magistris; of the Third in ibus, as Lapi∣dibus; of the Fourth either in ibus, as Manibus, or in ubus, as Artubus, or in both ibus and ubus, as Veri∣bus and Verubus; of the Fifth in ebus, as Diebus.

The Accusative Case Plural of the First Declension ends in as, as Musas; of the Second in os, as Magi∣stros; of the Third in es, as Lapides; of the Fourth in us, as Manus; of the Fifth in es, as Dies.

The Vocative Case Plural is like the Nominative; and the Ablative is like the Dative in all Declen∣sions.

Note, that all Nouns of the Neuter Gender of what Declension soever, and in what Termination soever, have their Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative alike in both Numbers: and in the Plural Number do end all in a: except ambo and duo, and words undeclinable, as centum, viginti, mille, tot, &c.

Of the various Terminations of Cases in several Declensions.

In the Declensions it is visible, that there be seve∣ral Cases, which admit of a variety of Terminations. Now for as much as it may be very useful to Learn∣ers to know something of Certainty in that Variety, I shall here for that cause give the Reader some account thereof.

Some Nouns of the First Declension do end in abus in the Dative and Ablative Case Plural. * 1.2

The Examples hereof producible would, if doubt∣ed, clearly, evince it. The Ground of adding this

Termination in abus to that in is, was to distinguish the words that are so declined, from other words of a near signification, whose Dative and Ablative Plur. end in is.

The words that have abus in the Dative and Abla∣tive Plural are Filia, nata, Dea, liberta, equa, mula, serva, conserva, asina, socia, anima. Of which Mula and Liberta are hardly, if ever, read in any other Termination but abus: the rest are found to have both is and abus.

Justin lib. 7. hath, Adhibitis in convivium suum filiis, & uxoribus, & filiabus. Plaut. Stich. ac. 4. Sed ego ibo intrò, & gratulabor vestrum adventum filiis. Cic. pro Rabir. Ab Jove Optimo Maximo cae∣teris{que} Diis, Deabús{que} immortalibus pacem ac veniam peto. Varro de R. R. l. 3. c. 16. (speaking of the Muses, whose Birds the Bees were said to be, saith) His Diis Helicona at{que} Olympum attribuerunt homines. Palladius speaking of the month of March saith, Hoc mense saginati ac pasti antè admissarii generosis equa∣bus admittendi sunt. Varro de R. R. l. 2. c. 1. speak∣ing of the Mares in Lusitania, which are said to con∣ceive by the wind, saith, Sed ex his equis qui nati pulli, non plus triennium vivunt. See more in Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 4. Alvar. Instit. Gram. p. 196. Voss. Etymolog. Lat. p. 31. Rhen. Gram. Lat. p. 47. Hayne Lat. Gram. p. 15. Ram. Lat. Gram. l. 1. c. 7. Far∣nab. Lat. Gram. p. 7.

Nouns of the Second Declension ending in us in * 1.3 the Nom. Case, do end in e in the Vocative.

This is too apparent to be doubted. Even in other Terminations anciently the Vocative Case was distinguished from the Nominative. Whence puere for puer is cited by Priscian. l. 7. out of Caecilius and Afranius. Age, age puere, Duce me ad patrios fines decoratum opiparé. And O puere, puere, sine me pro∣spicere mihi.

But whether any Nouns ending in us in the No∣minative do end also in us in the Vocative, may be a doubt.

In Sidonius Carm. 22. we may read—Naiadas istic Nereidum chorus alme doce. In Liv. l. 1. ann. V. C. is read, Audi Jupiter, audi pater patrate populi Alba∣••i, audi tu populus Albanus. But in these, and the like examples, either there is a Grecism: (for in the Attic Dialect the Nom. and Voc. end both alike) or an Enallage of the Case, the Nom. being put for the Voc. whereof there be many Examples, both in Substantives and Adjectives, which yet are not therefore said to have a Voc. in e and in us. As Virg. 1. Aea. Adsis laetitiae Bacchus dator.—Pers. 1. Sat. Vos ô patricius sanguis.—Insomuch that even Deus in the Voc. Case is an Atticism. As 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in Greek is used for 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which is also read: so is Deus in Latine used for Dee, which is read also in Ecclesia∣stical Writers. Tertul. l. 1. advers. Marcion. Gratus esses, O Dee haeretice, si îsses in dispositionem Creatoris. So Prudent. in Hamartigenia, O Dee cunctiparens, animae dator, O Dee Christe. So that the proper Termination of Nouns in us of the Second Declen∣sion in their Voc. is e: the other in us is figurative. Only vulgus hath both e and us: but e as a Mascu∣line, us as a Neuter: unless the Voc. in us be re∣maining of the old declining of this word of the Fourth Declension: whence Charisius cites from Var∣ro, A vulgu condemnaretur.

The same may be said touching those in ius with a Vowel or simple i before us, whether Proper or Common, which now end in i in the Voc. Case: their proper Termination is e; which being cut off by an Apocope, so they come to end in i.

As fluvie and socie is read, so was also filie, and Genie, Antonie, and Virgilie: of which the e being

by an Apocope cut off, there is now remaining in use only fili, Geni, &c. But Personal Adjectives still re∣tain the proper Termination in e: as Cynthius, Cyn∣thie, Delius, Delie, &c. See Voss. de Analog. lib. 2. cap. 5.

As for those that end in ius with a Consonant j, or a Diphthong ai or ei before us, such as Cajus, Majus, Pompejus, Vultejus, their Termination is i.

This Voc. is formed of the Nom. by purting away us, and either resolving the Diphthong into its Vowels, or turning the Consonant j into i Vowel. Unless any, supposing it to be a Diphthong that in these words precedes us, will have the Voc. Case to end in that Diphthong: as indeed Pompei and Vul∣tei of two Syllables may be read. Hor. Od. 7. l. 2. Pompei meorum prime sodalium: and Ep. 7. l. 1. Du∣vus ait, Vultei, nimis attentús{que} videris. However now use resolves the Diphthong. Hence Martial. l. 10. Ep. 16. Si donare vocas promittere, nec dare, Cai. And Auson. de Mensib. Maja Dea, an major, Maï, te fecerit aetas, Ambigo. See Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 5, & 20.

Of the Accusative Case Singular of the Third De∣clension * 1.4 the ordinary Termination is em: yet there are some that end only in im: and some that end both in em and im.

These end only in im.

• ...Vis, ravis, sitis, charybdis, tussis,
• Mephitis, canuabis, magudaris, and amussis,
• ...Praesepis, Syrtis, Opis, pelvis, buris.
• Sinapis, cucumis, Leucaspis, and securis.
• Albis, Fabaris, Boetis, Tanaïs, and Tigris,
• Araris, Athesis, Ligeris, Tiberis, and Tibris.
• So Halys hath Halym and Halyn.

These end both in em and im.

• Aqualis, cutis, turris, restis, navis,
• Sementis, puppis, bipennis, febris, clavis.

But in these febris, navis, aqualis and clavis, em is the more usual Termination: as is also im in these three, puppis, restis, and turris: to which may be added strigilis.

This is reckoned by Danesius amongst them that have, and is acknowledged by Vossius to have had, em, as well as im. Danes. Schol. p. 47. Voss. de Ana∣log. l. 2. p. 302.

Of the Ablative Case Singular of the Third De∣clension * 1.5 e is the Ordinary and regular Termination: yet there are some that end in i; and some that have both e and i in the Ablative Case.

Of Nouns that make their Ablative in i only there are these sorts.

1. Neuters in al increasing long in their Genitive Case, have only i in their Ablative; as Animal, Gen. animalis, Abl. animali.

Yet hoc Sal hath Sale: but that may be the Ablat. of hic Sal, which is far the more usual, besides that the penultima of it is short.

2. Neuters in ar, if their last Syllable but one in their Gen. Case be by Nature long, do in their Ablat. end only in i: as Calcar, G. calcaris, Abl. calcari. But if the last Syllable but one of their Gen. Case be either short, as hepar, G. hepatis; or but long by Position, as far, G. farris, then the Ablat. ends in e, as hepate, farre.

Yet Poets sometimes form an Ablat. in e, of Nouns producing their last Syllable save one: as Virg. in Culice.—Si nitor auri Sub laqueare do∣mûs animum non tangit avarum.

3. Declinable Neuter Appellatives in e, have their Ablat. ending in i; as cubile, Abl. cubili; so a∣plustre, Abl. aplustri.

Gausape is read in the Ablat. Case, but that is because gausape in the Nominative is an unde∣clinable Word. Hence Plin. l. 8. c. 48. Nam tunicâ laticlavi in modum gausape texi nunc primùm incipit: who a little before had used the same word in the Nomin. Antiquis enim torus è stramen∣to erat, qualiter etiam nunc in castris gausape. Or if it be the Ablative Case, here also, yet in that of Pers. 4. Sat. it is not, Tu cum maxillis balana∣tum gausape pectas. So praesepe in the Abl. is from the undeclinable praesepe in the Nominat. Ovid hath mare in the Ablat. Case l. 5. Trist. El. 2. Exiguum pleno de mare demat aquae. & de Pont. l. 4. El. 6. Eu∣xino de mare vertet iter. So Plaut. Nam si à mare abstinuissem, as some Copies read it. It would be very sparingly, if at all, used. Rete is read in the Ablat. but that is from the old Nom. retis. These proper Neuters in e are said to have e in the Abl. viz. Praeneste, Caere, Bibracte, Nepete, Reate, So∣racte. See Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 11. But Danesi∣us thinks them not to appertain to the present con∣sideration, as being undeclinable words, as Al∣var. also saith, Gram. Instit. p. 211. Though So∣racte may come of Soractis: for Plin. hath Sa∣crificio annuo, quod fit ad montem Soractem. l. 7. c. 2. See Danes. Schol. l. 1. c. 13.

4. Adjectives in is and er having their Neuters in the Nom. Case ending in e, do in their Abl. end in i: as Nom. fortis, forte: Abl. forti. So Nom. acer, acre: Abl. acri.

Hither refer names of Months, as Aprilis Aprili, December Decembri, as being in their nature Ad∣jectives. Hither refer also memor memori, and im∣memor immemori, as coming from memoris, imme∣moris. Yet Ovid hath used coeleste and bimestre in the Abl. Case. See Alvar. p. 211. Danes. Schol.

l. 1. c. 13. and Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 11. which last, out of Charisius cites in the Abl. Case (from Pompo∣nius) humile rege; and incolume illo; and cum con∣tubernale pugnavi; and from Cicero, Quo stante & incolume: and aliquo excellente & nobile viro; from Nepos, virgine Vestale; and from Salust, agreste.

But proper Names derived of Adjectives in is have e in their Ablat.

So Martial. l. 7. Ep. 23. Cum Juvenale meo—Cic pro Planc. Confiteor summa in Laterense orna∣menta esse. So Annalis, Cerealis, Vitalis, Natalis, No∣bilis, Celeris, Apollinaris. See Voss. de Analog. lib. 2. cap. 11.

Affinis, rivalis, familiaris, contubernalis, popularis, sodalis, aedilis, annalis, biremis, natalis, and bipennis, have their Ablatives properly in i, as being origi∣nally Adjectives: though again being used Substan∣tively, they have sometimes an Abl. in e. Volucris the Substantive hath e, the Adjective i. Rudis the Substantive hath e, the Adjective i. See Danes. and Voss. loc. sup. cit.

5. Words ending only in im in the Accusat. Case end only in i in their Abl. Case: as Accusat. vim, Abl. vi. So Accus. ravim, Abl. ravi.

Yet Liv. hath Superato Boete amne, from Boetim. Boeth. l. 3 de Cons. Phil. Carm. 12. hath longâ site perditus, from sitim: but by Poetical Licence, as saith Murmelius. Pers. Sat. 5. hath, Tibi tortâ cannabe fulto Coena fit in transtro; from cannabim.

Words of a Greek Original increasing in the Gen. Case, and having two Terminations in the Accus. one in em, and another in im, (as Thetis, Gen. The∣tidos, * 1.6 Acc. Thetidem and Thetim) rather have e than i (as Thetide, rather than Theti.) So Daphnide, not Daphni, &c. Because the Ablat. follows the Dat. (not the Accus.) which in Greek words are the

same: the Dative standing for both.

Arare in Caes. l. 1. Bel. Gal. is not from Araris, which makes Arari: but from Arar, which he in the same book useth. Flumen est Arar, quod per fines Aeduorum in Rhodanum influit.

Vossius to those that end in i only adds canalis and strigilis, l. 2. de Analog. c. 11. p. 297. proving, their Termination from Quintil. Plin. Hor. and adding as his Reason, Quid mirum, quando accusativum, uti ostensum, per im efferunt? Yet afterwards (see c. 12. p. 302.) having from Hor. and Cic. proved, that there is nave and navi, as navem and navim, he adds, etiam ut strigilem & strigilim dixêre, sic strigile & strigili; citing for strigile, Plin. Secund. out of Charis. as Horace for strigili. I suppose he means that strigili is now only in use, though strigile were formerly used: or that it may be more safely used, as indeed he explicates himself, p. 303. saying, In∣terim tutiùs strigili per i usurpatur.

Of Nouns that have both e and i in their Abl. Case * 1.7 there are these sorts.

1. Substantives, which have in their Accus. both em and im, have in their Ablat. both e and i: as Acc. puppem and puppim, Abl. puppe and puppi.

There are also found sometimes these Ablatives in i of words that have also a more usual Ablat. in e, viz.

• ...Classi, colli, fini, fusti,
• ...Igni, imbri, vecti, posti,
• ...Orbi, ovi, civi, avi,
• ...Ʋngui, parti, furfuri, navi,
• Supellectili and sordi,
• With occipiti and sorti.

Of these there be Examples in Voss. de Analog. c. 12. Danes. Schol. lib. 1. cup. 13. and Alvar. Inst. Gram. pag. 211.

Others beside are named, viz. Affinitati, alipedi, angui, assi, cani, labi, luci, mani, mugili, nepti, ster∣cori, tempori, vesperi, but not with like Authentick∣ness either for Author or Edition.

Those Proper names of Places, Carthagini, Sidoni, Lacedaemoni, Tiburi, Sicyoni, Anxuri, &c. as also the Appellative ruri, mistaken to be Datives, are old Ab∣latives in i, of words that have other usual Abla∣tives in e. See Voss. de Construct. c. 46.

2. Adjectives of one Termination in the Nominat. have e and i in their Ablative: as Nom. felix, Abl. felice vel felici. Nom. vetus, Abl. vetere vel veteri. Nom. recens, Abl. recente vel recenti. Nom. Arpinas, Abl. Arpinate vel Arpinati. Though in this last sort e is most usual.

Hither refer Participles and Participials in ns: as Nom. excellens, Abl. excellente and excellenti. Nom. ardens, Abl. ardente and ardenti: unless they be put Absolute, for then the Termination e is to be used, not i: as Imper ante Augusto, not Imperanti.

Hither also refer vigil and artifex used Adjective∣ly, as being then found to have an Ablative also in i.

So Stat. Achill. Aspicit intentum vigili{que} haec aure trahentem. Ib. Qualiter artifici victurae pollice cerae Accipiunt formas.

So also uber and degener, dives and locuples.

For Curtius l. 3. hath uberi and pingui solo. And Lucan. l. 4. Si me degeneri stravissent facta sub hoste. Plin. l. 3. c. 1. Diviti cultu. And Cic. 3. de Orat. Locupleti oratione.

Lastly hither refer victrix and ultrix, which have e and i.

Ovid. 1. Fast. Dextrâ cecidit victrice. Lucan: l. 1: In sua victrici conversum viscera ferro. And saith Vossius, Par ratio in ultrix, Prisciano teste.

But par the Adjective (as being anciently paris) hath only pari, as par the Substantive (for a mate or fellow) hath pare: and yet the compounds com∣par and impar have both e and i.

And so Verbals in trix taken Substantively have only ce as Nutrix, netrix, obstetrix, ce. See Al∣var. p. 211. Danes. Schol. p. 50, 51. Voss. Etym. Lat. p. 47, 48. & de Analog. l. 2. c. 12.

3. Adjectives of the Comparative Degree, as well masculines and feminines, as neuters, have their Abl. in e and i; as Nom. major and majus, Abl. majore and majori.

Hence Caes. l. 2. de Bel. civ. Majori cum fiduciā pugnaverunt. And Sen. Ep. 108. Quantum majori impetu ad philosophiam juvenis accesserim, quàm.—Indeed Mascul. and Neut. anciently were both of one Termination in the Nom. whence Priscian l. 7. cites Senatusconsultum prior; and bellum posteri∣or, from the Ancients.

Though e is the more usual Termination, especi∣ally in the Masc. and Fem. Gender, unless in Poets.

The Nominative and Accusative Plural of the * 1.8 Third Declension in the Masc. and Fem. Gender do end in es, as Lapides, Virtutes.

Anciently they did use a Termination in eis, as omneis, Sardeis, which again they contracted into is, as omnis and Sardis.

Hence Cic. de Opt. Gen. Orat. Qualeis Asia mul∣tos tulit. ib. Vircis, Lacertos, sanguinem quarunt. Plaut. Amph. 5. 1. Facit rectà in anguis impetum. & Epid. 2. Ipsum ante aedis conspicor. ib. 3. 4. Promerui, ut mihi omnes mortalis deceat agere gratias.

Touching which it is exceeding difficult and operous, if possible, to give certain Rules; Authors following rather the judgment of the Sound by their ear, than any Rule. See Gell. l. 13. c. 19.

Yet Priscian attempts it, and gives four Canons about it, repeated by Vossius and Danesius, viz. * 1.9 That they end in is.

• (1) Whose Genitive is like their Nominative, as omnis, and naris.
• (2) Which are only Plurals, as manes and tres.
• (3) Whose Nom. Sing. ends in er, and Abl in i, as acer and imber.
• (4) Which end in ns, or rs, as mons and pars.

Let the particular words be well marked, as they are met with. Such as these in cis,

• ...Ardenteis, aurcis, tereteis,
• Forenscis, vireis, qualeis, treis, &c.

And these in is,

• ...Acris, aedis, anguis, bidentis,
• ...Manis, omnis, mortalis, parentis,
• ...Geleris, dulcis, fontis, pluris,
• Salubris, litis, with compluris,
• ...Tris, tenacis, urbis, imbris,
• Summatis, partis, & Decembris, &c.

The Nominative and Accusative Plural of the * 1.10 Third Declension in the Neuter Gender end some∣times in a, and sometimes in ia.

They end in a, whose Abl. sing. ends only in e, as capita of capite; onera of onere; gausapa of gausape. So hospita, sospita, paupera, of hospite, sospite, paupere.

They end in ia, whose Abl. Sign. ends only in i, as animalia of animali; fortia of forti; or else in e and i, as felicia of felice vel felici. So locupletia, divitia, from locuplete vel locupleti, divite vol diviti.

Yet from this Rule there be some Exceptions.

(1) Vetus makes only vetera, and uber ubera, though they have i as well as e, in their Abl. Sign.

(2) Bicorpor, tricorpor, unicolor, & versicolor have only a in the Nom. Plur. though they have i in their Abl. Sing.

This termination in a comes from a termination in us in the Nom. Sing. bicorporus, versicolorus, &c.

(3) Comparatives have only a in their Nom. Plur: though they have both c and i in their Abl. Sing. as majora, minora.

The Ablative of these in e being the more usual they follow that Termination.

Yet plus hath plura and pluria, and thence are complura & compluria.

Aplustre whose Abl. is aplustri, is also said to have both aplustra, and aplustria; but aplustra comes not of aplustre, but of aplustrum anciently ••••ed. See Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 13. Danes. Schol. p. 52.

The Genitive Case Plural of the Third Declension * 1.11 endeth generally in um, as Lapidum.

Yet there are sundry Words, and Kinds of words, that do end in ium▪ for which there are these Rules.

Rule First, Such as have i, or both e and i, in the Abl. Sing. have ium in their Gen. Plur. as Turris, turri, turrium, Animal, animali, animalium. For∣tis & forte, forti, fortium. So felix, felice vel felici, felicium. Imber, imbre & imbri, imbrium. Prudens, prudente & prudenti, prudentium. Concors, con∣corde & concordi, concordium.

So Gentiles in as, as Arpinâs, Fidenâs, Gape∣nâs, nostrâs, vestrâs, and, like them, optimâs & summâs, which from an old Nom. in tis form an Abl. in ti, and thence a Gen. Plur. in tium, as Arpinatium, nostratium, optimatium, &c.

Yet from this Rule there are Exceptions.

1. Except. All Comparatives have their Gen. Plur. ending in um, as major & majus, majorum; except plus plurium, & compluria complurium.

Yet Pliny preferreth complurum before complu∣rium

(as Vossius saith from Charisius) against the use of the Ancients.

2. Except. Words ending in fex, compounded of facio have their Gen. Plur. ending in um, as Artifex, artificum; opifex, opificum; carnifex, car∣nificum.

These, when taken Adjectively, have their Abl. in e and i; yet their Gen. Plur. ends only in um; probably that their Gen. Cases might not be confounded with Artificium, opificium, &c. Substantives Singular of the Neut. Gender.

3. Except. These Particular words in their Gen. Plur. end in um,

• Memor, immemor, inop••, uber,
• Compos, impos, impuber, puber,
• Dives, degener, congener, bicorpor,
• Vetus, strigilis, mugilis, tricorpor.

Vigilum is of vigil the Substantive, whose Abl. Sing. is vigile. Of vigili, the Abl. of vigil the Ad∣jective is rather formed vigilium. See Voss. de Ana∣log. l. 2. c. 14. p. 312.

Rule Second. Substantives of two or more Sylla∣bles * 1.12 ending with two Consonants, have their Gen. Plur. ending in ium, as Cohors, cohortium; parens, parentium

Likewise many Adjectives used Substantively, as Serpens, serpentium; bidens, bidentium; So infans, infantium; adolescens adolescentium; rudens, ruden∣tium; which taken Substantively have their Abl. in e.

Yet from this Rule there are Exceptions.

1. Except. These Particular words, coelebs, con∣sors, hyems, judex, senex, have their Gen. Plur. end∣ing in um. * 1.13

2. Except. Words derived of capio, as auceps, for∣ceps, manceps, municeps, particeps, princeps, have their Gen, Plur. ending in um.

In the most the reason may be to distinguish them from Substantives Singul. ending in ium: as aucupium, mancipium, &c.

3. Except. Latine words formed of Greek ones ending in 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in Greek, have their Gen. Plur. ending in um in Latine: as Arabs, Arabum, Aethiops, Ae∣thiopum. So Chalybs, Cyclops, Phalanx; to which add these Monosyllables, gryps, lynx, sphynx.

Rule Third. Nouns ending in er, es, and is not increasing in the Gen. Case Singul. have their Gen. * 1.14 Plur. ending in ium: as venter, ventrium; nubes, nubium; piscis, piscium.

So Greek words of the Second Declens. of the Contracts: as Syrtis, Syrtium; dioecesis, dioecesium.

Hither refer caro, carnium: there having been an∣ciently haec carnis, hujus carnis.

Except. Yet from this Rule are excepted juve∣nis, juvenum; canis, canum; and panis, panum, if it be read in the Plur. Numb. in that Case.

Rule Fourth. Sundry Words of more Syllables than one increasing in the Gen. Case Singul. have ium in their Gen. Case Plural. viz. civitas, utilitas, haeredi∣tas. So Samnis and Quiris. Also palus and fornax.

Civitatium is in Just. l. 9. utilitatium in Liv. l. 45. haereditatium in the Pandects. Notwithstanding the Syncopated Termination in um is in these much the more usual. So Samnitium is in Liv. l. 7. Quiri∣tium in Hor. lib. 1. Od. 1. But their Nom. Case formerly was Samnitis and Quiritis: so that these words may be reduced to the Third Rule. Palu∣dium is in Colum. l. 3. c. 9. fornacium in Plin. l. 35. c. 14. Though paludum is also read in Mela. l. 3. c. 3. and fornacum in Plin. l. 34. c. 10.

Rule Fifth. Some words that are only Plurals have their Genitive ending in ium: as manes, ma∣nium; penates, penatium; tres, trium; and moenia,

moenium. Also these two Singulars Sal (wit) and vis, have in their Gen. Plur. salium and virium.

Tres hath trium from the Greek 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. Sales (for jests or conceits) is so rarely found (though it be found, and in Cicero) in that sense in the Sing. Num∣ber, that it hath been taken for an only Plural. The Nom. Sing. of vires is vis: but that being made of viris by a Syncope and a Crasis, thence comes the Gen. Plur. virium Of moenia, moenium see Danes. Schol. p. 53.

On the other side opes, primores, lemures, coelites, celeres, Luceres, and proceres have um in the Gen. Plural.

These words are taken to be Plurals only: but are, all, or most, found to have Singulars. See my Explanations of Quae genus on Mascula sunt tantùm, &c.

Celeres, Luceres, and Proceres come of celer, Lu∣cer, and procer, out of use.

Rule Sixth. Several sorts of words of one Syllable have their Gen. Plur. ending in ium: viz.

(1) Such Latine words in x as have a Consonant before x, have their Gen. Plur. ending in ium: as arx, calx, falx, lanx, merx. Gen. arcium, &c.

(2) Some words of one Syllable that have a Vo∣wel before x have their Gen. Plur. ending in ium: * 1.15 as nix, nox, faux, crux, trux. Gen. nivium, noctium, &c.

The rest make um: as grex, lex, rex, strix, vox, dux, nux, Ph••yx, and Thrax. Also prex and frux (out of use) have precum and frugum.

(3) Some words of one Syllable that end in a liquid Consonant, have their Gen. Plur. ending in ium: as par, parium; lar, larium; cor cordium.

Par•• hath parium as coming from paris: and thence compar hath comparium.

The rest end in um: as ren, renum; splen, sple∣num; fur, furum.

But mel, fel, and sol have no Gen. Case Plur.

(4) Some that end in •• pure (with a Vowel be∣fore it) have their Gen. Plur. ending in ium: as As, assium; mas, marium; vas, vadium; bes, bessium; lis, litium; glis, glirium; dis, ditium; vis, virium; cos, cotium; dos dotium; os, * 1.16 ossis, ossium; and mus, mu∣rium.

The rest have um, viz. pes, pedum (whence bipes; bipedum) praes, praedum; mos, morum; flos, florum; thus, thurum; crus, crurum; sus, suum; grus, gruum; * 1.17 laus, laudum; fraus, fraudum; bos, boum (by a Syn∣cope for bovium.)

Of jus Cato hath jurum, Plautus jurium: of which, utrumque insolens, saith Vossius. If aes and rus were to form a Gen. Plur. it should be aerum and rurum, rather than aerium and rurium.

(5) All words that end in s impure (or having a Consonant before it) have their Gen. Plur. in ium: as ars, artium; pars, partium; mons, montium; fons, fontium; pons, pontium; dens, dentium; trabs, tra∣bium; urbs, urbium.

Except gryps, grypum; seps, sepum, which are ori∣ginally Greek words. To which may be added Sphynx, Sphyngum.

1. Note. Many words in ium are found by a Syncope to have a Termination in um: as Optima∣tûm for optimatium used by Cornel. Nepos. Summa∣tûm for summatium by Plaut. Sontûm for sontium by Stat. Agrestûm for agrestium: and coelestûm for coe∣lestium by Virg. Volucrûm for volucrium by Plin. Cae∣dûm for caedium by Silius. Sedûm for sedium by Cic. Mensûm for mensium by Paul. J. C. Paludûm for pa∣ludium by Mela. Fornacûm for fornacium by Plin. Forûm for forium by Plaut. Larûm for larium by Varro. Ossûm for ossium by Apul. Murûm for murium by Cic.

Ʋtilitatûm, Civitatûm, haereditatûm are ordinary So are the Syncopated Cases of Participles: suci as cadentûm, faventûm, furentûm, loquentûm, loquentûm, manen¦tûm▪ natantûm, potentûm, precantûm, regnantûm, ru∣dentûm, sequentûm, silentûm, venientûm, all in Virgil: and the l••ke in others: and like these, parentûm and quad••upedantûm.

2. Note. Many words have in the Gen. Plur one Termination in ium, and another in orum: a•• the names of Feasts, Floralia, Floralium and Flora∣liorum; Agonalia, Agonalium and Agonaliorum; Sa∣turnalia, Saturnalium and Saturnaliorum, &c.

Of these the Termination in um is formed from a Nom. Case in e; v. g. Florale, &c. That in orum is formed from a Nom. Case Sing. in ium; v. g. Flo∣ralium, &c.

The like may be said of alvearium and alveario∣rum; the first from alvear and alveare, the second from alvearium. So of exemplarium from exemplar, and exemplariorum from exemplarium (turned by Ig∣natius * 1.18 into 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.) So of Vectigalium and vectigaliorum; ancilium and anciliorum; sponsalium and sponsaliorum; viridium and viridiorum; conclae∣vium and conclaviorum, it may be said, the several Terminations in the Gen. Plur. are formed from se∣veral Terminations in the Nom. Singular: it being not unusual for words to have such variety of Termi∣nations. For example, Milliare and milliarium are both in Cic. Torcular and torcularium in Cato; and Lupanar and lupanarium. So A. Gell. hath vulgaris and vulgarius. Turpilius hath both singularis and singularius, as Vossius from Nonius tells us.

So again Greek words in ma have two Genitives, one in um, from the Nom. Sing. in ma, of the Greek Termination; and one in orum, from a Nom. Sing. in um, of a Latine Termination: as Poematum from

hoc poema, and poematorum from hoc poematum, &c.

Sometimes Greek words have their Greek Ter∣mination written in Latine letters: as Haereseôn, Ep••∣grammatôn, Metamorphoseôn.

The Dative Case Plural of the Third Declension * 1.19 regularly ends in ibus, as lapidibus.

By this Termination ibus the Dative Case Plur. of the Third Declension is distinguished from the Dat. Plur. of the Fifth, which ends in ebus; and of the Fourth too, which thought it hath ibus (as being derived from this Declension) yet it hath not ibus only, as this hath. Bus, which is ordinarily given for the Termination of this Case, is common to all the Three Declensions; and to those also of the First that end in abus. For abus, ebus, ibus, obus, ubus, all end in bus.

Bobus and bubus, which differ from this Termina∣tion are contracted of bovibus. Voss de Arte Gram. l. 2. c. 15. So Subus is said for Suibus, which Ci∣cero hath l. 5. de Fin.

Quinquatriis is from quinquatria, quinquatriorum: Quinquatribus is from quinquatria, quinquatrium, or from quinquatrus, as fructibus from fructus.

Neuter Greek words in ma, besides their Dative in ibus, have another in is: but that is formed as from a Nom. in um.

For example, Poematis is formed from hoc poema∣tum, as poematibus from hoc poema. And so 'tis in the rest. Not to note, that these kind of words have a formation of the First Declension. Whence we read of Diademam dedit, in Pompon. Cum servili Schemâ, in Plaut. and exemplar impetratae Schemae, in Sueton: of which way of forming, those Termina∣tions in is may be some remains. See Danes. Schol. l. 1. c. 13.

Sometimes amongst the Ancients there is met

withal a Dative of a Greek Termination in sin (i. e. σ •• with ν added to it): as in Dryasin, Hamadryasi••, Ethesin, Schemasin. But these, as being not Latine words, cross not our Rule: and as being rare, are only to be observed, not followed. * 1.20

The Genitive Case Singular of the Fourth Declen∣sion regularly ends in ûs: as manûs.

Yet some words now of the Fourth Declension anciently were also of the Second Declension; and of them remains a Gen. Case in i: as ornati of orna∣tus, tumulti of tumultus.

Hence Ter. Eun. 2. 2. Quid istuc inquam ornati est? And Phorm. 1. 3. Ʋbi ejus adventi venit in mentem. And Adelph. 5. 4. Hoc fructi pro labore ab his fero. And And. 2. 2. In aedibus nihil ornati, nihil tumulti. Of the same stamp are these cited by V••ssius from Nonius.

• ...Senati, sumti, exerciti, aesti,
• ...Aspecti, gemiti, piscati, quaesti,
• Geli with victi, strepiti, and lucti,
• ...Salti, parti, porti, soni, flucti.

Again, some words now of the Fourth Declension anciently were of the Third; and of them remains a Gen. Case in is: as anuis of anus.

Hence Ter. He. 2. 3. Ejus anuis causâ opinor, quae erat mortua. Of the same stamp are Senatuis for Senatûi; domuis for domûs; fluctuis for fluctûs, which A. Gell. saith M. Varro, and P. Nigidius, learn∣ed Romans did use. So also rituis for ritûs; fruetuis for fruetûs; victuis for victûs; and graduis for gra∣dûs; which Vos••ius citeth from their Authors, De Analog. l. 2. c. 17. See also Danes. Schol. l. 1. c. 19.

Of the Genitive Case in uis is made the Regular Genitive in ûs by a Crasis, whence the Termination is long. * 1.21

The Dative Case Singular of the Fourth Declension regularly ends in ui, as manni.

Yet by an Apocope i is cut off from many Datives of this Declension, and for ui is read u: as ornatu for ornatui.

So Ter. Ad. 1. 1. Vestitu nimio indulges. Virg Aen. 1. * 1.22 Parce metu Cythereaea. Caes. in Dolab. act. 3. In aedi∣bus fanisque posita, & honori erant & ornatu. Tacit. Annal. 14. Cruciatu, aut praemio cuncta pervia esse. Yea, quibus subito impetu, ac latrocinio parricidarum resistat, is Cicero's, saith Vossius. Of the same stamp is victu, concubitu, adspectu, for victui, concubitui, ad∣spectui in Virg. Exercitu for exercitui in Varro. Cursu for cursui in Veget. Anu and victu for anui and victui in Lucil. Ʋsu for usui in Lucret. Dominatu for domi∣natui in Caes. Luxu for luxui in Sallust. & Tacit. Ve∣natu for venatui in Virg. Quaestu & cultu for quaestui & cultui in Plaut. Delectu for delectui in Liv. See Schrevel. in Ter. Ad. 1. 1. Farnab. Gram. p. 14. Alvar. Instit. Gram. p. 217. A. Gell. l. 14. c. 16. Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 18.

The Ablative Case Singular of the Fourth De∣clension * 1.23 regularly ends in u: as manu.

Impete is not, as some would have it, the Ablat. Case of impetus, but of impes, whose Gen. impetis is in Lucret. l. 6. and Abl. impete is in Ovid. Met. 3. See my Explanations of Quae genus, on Sunt Diptota, &c.

The Genitive Case Plural of the Fourth Declen∣sion * 1.24 regularly ends in uum: as manuum.

Of uum in this Case by a Syncope is made ûm.

Hence currûm for curruum, in Virg. Aen. 6. nurûm for nuruum, in Virg. Aen. 12. and passûm for passuum, in Martial. l. 2. ep. 5.

The Dative Case Plural of the Fourth Declension * 1.25 most usually ends in ibus: as manibus.

Yet (1) some words of this Declension end in ubus: as specus, arcus, artus, lacus, tribus, partus.

Hence Hor. 5. Epod. Per liberos te, si vocata par∣tubus. Ovid. 4 Fast. Praemia de lacubus proxima mu∣sta tuis. Virg. Ep. de Livore. Et totum bibit artubus cruorem.

Some add acubus, quercubus, ficubus, which yet Alvarus thinks to be no where found: no nor aci∣bus, quercibus, ficibus: for the last of which ficis of the Second Declension is in use, and praeplacet Pli∣nio, as Mr. Farnaby saith, System. Gram. p. 15.

2. Some words of this Declension end both in ibus and ubus; as quaestus and genu, portus and veru.

Quaestibus and quaestubus, genibus and genubus are read in Ovid and Seneca: portibus and portubus in Caes. Bel. Civ. where yet, saith Vossius, for portibus, the Manuscripts read portubus. Veribus is read in Virg. 1. Aen. Pars in frusta secant, Veribúsque tremen∣tia figunt. Verubus is read in Ovid. 6. Met. Pars ve∣rubus stridet. See Danes Schol. l. 1. c. 14. * 1.26

The Genitive Case Singular of the Fifth Declen∣sion now regularly ends in ei: as diei.

Anciently there were other Terminations of it.

First, Sometimes the Termination of the Geni∣tive was the same with that of the Nominative, namely es.

In this respect it was so with Nouns of this De∣clension, as with Parisyllabical Nouns in is of the Third Declension, from whence probably this De∣clension was formed.

Hence that of Cicero pro Sextio relating the words Consulis 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as H. Stephanus thinks, Equi∣tes verò daturos illius dies poenas. So Lucret. l. 4—Rabies unde illae haec germina surgunt.

Secondly, Sometimes eï was first contracted into ei, and then into i.

As Ʋlysseï of Ʋlysseus is first contracted into Ʋlyssei (trisyllab.) and then into Ʋlyssi.

Hence that of Virg. 1. Aen. as some read it, Mu∣nera, laetitiámque dii. And that of Corn Nepos, Quae quidem res & illis contemnentibus pernicii, & huic de∣specto saluti fuit. And so the rest which are read in the same Termination in ancient Authors and Manuscripts, viz. progenii, acii, luxurii, specii, fidii, famii for famei of fames, sometimes of the F••fth De∣clension. See Gell. l. 9. c. 19.

Thirdly, Sometimes i was by an Apocope cut off from ei in the Genitive Case.

Hence that of Sallust. Vix decimâ parte die reli∣quâ; and dubitavit acie pars; and Et jam die ve∣sper erat; and At indè nullâ munitionis aut requie morâ processit ad oppidum. And that of Auson. Carm. de Rosâ. Ad primos radios interitura die. And that of Ovid 3. Met. Prima fide vocisque ratae tentamina sumpsit; and lib. 7. Meditatáque pene reliqui Tenta∣menta fide. And ib. ver. 742. Cui non ista fide satis experientia sano Magna foret satis? And l. 6. Ʋtque fide pignus dextras utrasque poposcit. And that of H••race, 1. Carm. 2. Od. Libra die somníque pares ubi fecerit umbras.

The Dative Case Singular of the Fifth Declension * 1.27 regularly ends in ei.

Yet this Dative is sometimes found to end in e, the i being cut off by an Apocope.

Hence Lucil l. 1. Aetati faciéque tuae. Hor. l. 1. Sat. 3. Prodiderit commissa fide. And this Dative in e was used by those, qui purissimè locuti sunt, saith Gell. Noct. Att. l. 9. c. 14. See Danes. Schol. p. 62. Voss de Analog. l. 2. c. 19.

CHAP. II. Of the Comparing of Adjectives.

AFter the Learner is perfected in the formings of Nouns Substantives, then let him be made skilful in the forming of Regular Comparisons of Ad∣jectives; so as that hearing one Positive Degree of any compared Adjective, he can instantly form thereof a Comparative and a Superlative in any Case, Gender, or Number: as Doctus, doctior, doctis∣simus. Docta, doctior, doctissima. Doctum, doctius, doctissimum, &c.

That he may do this with greatest ease and rea∣diness, (having first taught him to decline the Posi∣tive alone, so as that he can either decline it in both Numbers through all Terminations, viz. Doctus, docta, doctum; Docti, doctae, docti, &c. or (which is the harder work) in one singular Termination, viz. Doctus. docti, docto, &c. docta, doctae, doctae, &c. Doctum, docti, docto, &c.) practise him first to de∣cline only the Comparative together with the Po∣sitive according to the several Terminations of it; thus, Nom Doctus, doctior; Gen. docti, doctioris; Dat. Docto, doctiori, &c. Nom. Docta, doctior; Gen. Doctae, doctioris; Dat. Doctae, doctiori, &c. Nom. Doctum, doctius; Gen. Docti, doctioris; Dat. Docto, doctiori, &c. then all the three degrees together, first in the masculine, then in the feminine, and so in the neuter Gender throughout all Cases of both Numbers; thus, Doctus, doctior, doctissimus, Docti, doctioris, doctissimi, &c. Docta, doctior, doctissima. Doctae, doctioris, doctissimae, &c. Doctum, doctius, doctissimum, Docti, doctioris, doctissimi, &c. and last

of all, all the three Degrees together in all Cases of both Numbers, and through all the Genders of eve∣ry Case together; thus, Nom. Doctus, doctior, doctis∣simus; Docta, doctior, doctissima; Doctum, doctius, doctissimum. Gen. Docti, doctioris, doctissimi; doctae, doctioris, doctissimae; docti, doctioris, doctissimi, &c. And so let him go on to do Adjectives of other Ter∣minations, as ••ener, felix prudens, vetus, &c.

When the Scholar hath attained to a competent readiness in the forming of Regular and Perfect Comparisons, let him then proceed to, and be made acquainted with those Comparisons that are Irregu∣lar, and Defective or Redundant. Touching which, because it may be Useful both to Teachers and Lear∣ners, I will here set down such a Collection of Rules and Observations, as I gathered for my private use, beginning first with the Irregular Compari∣sons.

Of Irregular Comparisons.

Irregular Comparison is, when Degrees are form∣ed * 1.28 not according to Rule.

1. Positives in er, form a superlative Degree, by assurning unto them rimus, as Pulcher, pulcherri∣mus.

2. These three facilis, similis, and humilis form their Superlative by changing is into limus; as fa∣cilis, facillimus; similis, simillimus; humilis, humil∣limus. So the Compounds of facilis and similis; defficilis, difficillimus; dissimilis, dissimillimus. Of imbecillis is formed imbecillimus; though there be also imbecillissimus of imbecillus.

3. Adjectives derived of dico, loquor, volo, facio, form their Comparative and Superlative Degrees as of Positives in ens, as Maledicus, maledicentior, male∣dicentissimus. Magniloquus, magniloquentior, magni∣lonuentissimus. Benevolus, benevolentior, benevolen∣tissimus.

Magnificus, magnificentior, magnificentissi∣mus. But mirificus hath mirificissimus.

4. Adjectives ending in us pure, form a Periphra∣stical Comparative and Superlative, by adding magis or maxime, and minus or minime, to their Positive degree, as Pius; magis pius; maxime pius; Assi••uus; magis assiduus; maxime assi••uus Idoneus; minus ido∣neus; minime idoneus. Reus; minus reus; minime reus.

Note, other Adjectives are in Authors compared according to this Periphrastical way: but these Ad∣jectives are not ordinarily compared any other way.

Yet, though it be not ordinary, there may be found Comparatives and Superlatives regularly for∣med of this sort of Adjectives: as Idoncïor of ido∣neus Arduïor of arduus Innoxior of innoxius Indu∣strior of industrius. So Egregiissimus of egregius. Perpetuissimus of perpetuus. Exiguissimus of exiguus. Vacuissimus of vacuus Also Strenu••or and strenuissi∣mus of strenuus. Assiduior and assiduissimus of assi∣duus. Piissimus of pius, which are not but with great wariness to be used. See Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 27.

5. These singular words are also irregularly com∣pared.

Bonus,	melior,	optimus,
Malus,	pejor,	pessimus,
Magnus,	major,	maximus,
Parvus,	minor,	minimus,
Multus,	plus,	plurimus,
Multa,	plurima,
Multum,	plurimum,
Vetus,	veterior,	veterrimus, of veter.
citer, * 1.29	citerior,	citimus,
inferus,	inferior,	infimus, & imus,

Exterus, & Exter,	exterior	Extremus, & extimus,
superus,	superior,	supremus & summus,
posterus,	posterior,	postremus, & postumus,
nequam,	nequior,	nequissimus.

And thus far of Comparisons Irregular. Now fol∣low Comparisons Defective.

Of Defective Comparisons.

Defective Comparison, is, when any one of the three Degrees is wanting.

These are said to want the Positive Degree. Prior, primus, from the obsolete pris.

• Ocior, ocissimus, from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.
• Potior, potissimus, from potis, deter, ulter grown out of use.
• Deterior, deterrimus, from potis, deter, ulter grown out of use.
• Ʋlterior, ultimus, from potis, deter, ulter grown out of use.
• ...Penitior, penitissimus.
• Interior, intimus, from inter.
• Propior, proximus, from propis or propus.
• Diutior, diutissimus. Of which word yet Vossius saith he remembers not that he ever read it.

These are said to want the Comparative Degree.

• ...Apricus apricissimus.
• ...Bellus, bellissimus.
• ...Consultus, consultissimus.
• ...Meritus, meritissimus.
• ...Novus, novissimus.
• ...Nuperus, nuperrimus.
• ...Diversus, diversissimus.
• ...Falsus, falfissimus.
• ...Fidus, fidissimus.
• ...Inclytus, inclytissimus.
• ...Invitus, invitissimus.
• ...Persuasus, persuasissimus.
• ...Sacer, sacerrimus.

¶ Yet there may be found in Gellius both novius and diversius. Hence Plin. l. 12. c. 9. Pretia nulli diversiora. Our Dunaeus in his Praelect, ad Lysiam hath

belliùs an Adverb. And Petron. Nihil est hominum in••ptâ persuasione falsius.

Hither may be referred these Nouns of which there are Superlatives read, Exclusus, exclusis••imus, * 1.30 o••clusus occ••usissimus. (Plaut. Cist. 1. 1.) par, paris∣simus and also these Pronouns, tuus, tuissimus, ipse, ipsissimus.

These are said to want the Superlative Degree.

• ...Adolescens, adolescentior.
• ...Communis, communior.
• ...Dives, divitior.
• ...Declivis, decli••ior.
• ...Dexter, dexterior. * 1.31
• ...Grandis, grandior.
• ...Ingens, ingentior.
• ...Salutaris, salutarior.
• ...Sinister, sinisterior.
• ...Supinus, supinior.
• ...Infinitus, infinitior.
• ...Ju••••nis junior.
• ...Longinquus, longinquior;
• ...Opimus, opimior. † 1.32
• ...Proclivis, proclivior.
• ...Propinquu••, propinquior.
• ...Remissus, remissior.
• ...Satur, saturior.
• ...Senex, senior.
• ...Taciturnus, taciturnior.

¶ Yet Plaut. Curc. 1. 1. hath taciturnissimus.

These want both the Positive and the Superla∣tive Degrees.

Viz. Satior, anterior, licentior, sequior. Whither may be referred Paenior, Neronior, Cinaedior, of which as there is no Superlative read, so no Posi∣tive, but a Noun Substantive, viz Paenus, Nero, Ci∣naedus.

Some want both Positive and Comparative; as Victorissimus Patruissimus, and Plautinissimus, &c. which are not mutable.

And thus far of Comparison Defective, now follows Comparison Redundant.

Of Redundant Comparisons.

Redundant Comparison is, when any one degree

hath various formations, which happens mostly in the Superlative degree.

Sometimes there are two Superlatives of one Posi∣tive, as Extremus and extimus of exterus. Infimus and imus of Inferus. Maturissimus and maturrimus of maturus. See Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 25. Piissi∣mus and pientissimus of pius. Postremus and postu∣mus of posterus, Supremus and summus of superus.

Sometimes of a Superlative Degree there is form∣ed a new Comparative or Superlative: as Proximior of proximus. Extremius and extremissimus * 1.33 of ex∣tremus. Minimissimus † 1.34 of minimus. Postremus and postremissimus of postremus. Pessimissimus of pes∣simus.

In these, whereof there are Examples in Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 26. some later Latines have imitated some Greeks. For in Ephes. 3. 8. we read 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; and so in Xenoph. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, who yet are not without great wariness to be followed therein.

After this Account of Defective and Redundant, as well as Irregular Comparisons, it may perhaps not be ungrateful to the learning Reader to have some ac∣count of Adjectives that are not compared at all, un∣less Periphrastically by magis and maxime, or minus and minime.

Adjectives not compared are

• ...Cicur, claudus, canus, calvus,
• ...Degener, dispar, almus, salvus,
• ...Egenus, memor, magnanimus, mirus,
• ...Jejunus, crispus, unicus, delirus,
• Canorus, balbus, ferus, and vetulus,
• Sylvestris, mediocris, and edentulus.

Voss. de Analog. l. 2. c. 22. saith, Opimus hath no Comparative or Superlative: but Gell. l. 5. c. 14. hath membra opimiora.

Besides these particular words, there be many sorts of Adjectives, which Grammarians say are not compared.

• 1. Gentiles, as Romanus, Graecus, Atheniensis.
• 2. Poss••ssives, as Fraternus, herilis, muliebris, ca∣strersis.
• 3. Numerals, as septem, septimus, ternarius, ter∣ti••nus.
• 4. Diminutives, as tenellus, tantillus, tantulus.
• 5. Materials, as Aureus, aereus, lapideus, ligneus.
• 6. Temporals, as Matutinus, hesternus, biennis.
• 7. Compounds of fero and gero, as Salutifer, cor∣niger.
• 8. Words ending in the Terminations following.

• 1. bundus, as moribundus, cunctabundus.
• 2. imus, as bimus, trimus, maritimus.
• 3. ivus, as deliberativus.
• 4. plex, as duplex, triplex.
• 5. ster, as campester, sylvester.

¶ Yet Ramus ownes festivior, and festivissimus of festivus, and simplicius of simplex, which he saith Quintilian thought well of; And Vossius also ex∣cepts multiplex, l. 2. de Anal. c. 27. And others may find other Exceptions, which whether in this, or in any thing else, so they be upon good authority, I shall not gainsay.

CHAP. III. Of the Forming of Verbs.

THE Scholar being perfected in the forming of Nouns and comparing of Adjectives, the

next thing that I would have him well grounded in, is the Forming of Verbs; in the performing of which work several Teachers have several ways. That which I practised with no ill success, is as fol∣loweth.

First, make the Scholar understand what Tenses in all Moods are formed of the Present Tense, and what of the Preterperfect Tense: namely that of the Present Tense of the Indicative Mood are formed the Preterimperfect and Future Tense of the same Mood; the Present and Preterimperfect Tenses of all other Moods; the Gerunds and Participles of the Present Tense and of the Future in dus. And of the Preterperfect Tense of the Indicative Mood are formed the Preterpluperfect Tense of the same Mood; The Preterperfect; Preterpluperfect, and Future Tenses of all other Moods; The Supines and Participles of the Preter Tense, and Future in rus. As the Present Tense Active. Amo, amabam, amabo; ama, amato; amem, amarem, amare, aman∣di, amando, amandum, amans. Preterperfect. Amavi, amaveram, amaverim, amavissem, amavero, ama∣visse, amaturum esse, amatum, amatu, amaturus. So Pres. Passive. Amor, amabar, amabor; amare, amator; ameris, amareris, amari, amandus. Preterperf. Ama∣tus sum vel fui, amatus eram vel fueram, amatus sim vel fuerim, amatus essem vel fuissem, amatus ero vel fuero, amatum esse vel fuisse, amatum iri, vel aman∣dum esse, amatus.

When the Learner knows in what order the Verb is to be formed, and what Tenses each of other, then let him begin the Forming of it with the La∣tine before the English; and together with the Verb naming also the Nominative Case, of the Per∣sonal Pronoun, wherewith it agrees, thus: Ego amo, I love; tu amas, thou lovest; ille amat, he loveth;

nos amamus, we love; vos amatis, ye love; illi amant, they love: and so throughout all Moods and Tenses of the Active Voice.

To prepare him for this, and for other purpose, it will be highly beneficial to teach him to form English Verbs alone throughout all Moods and Ten∣ses, Numbers and Persons thus: Ind. Pres. Sing. Num. and first Pers. I love, or do love. Pr. Imp. I loved, or did love. Fut. I shall, or will love.

Then let him go over the Active Voice again in the same order, with the Latine still before the English, but naming only one Person of a Tense at a time, and then proceeding to the next, thus: Ego amo, I love; ego amabam, I loved, or did love, &c.

When he hath in this order gone over all the Persons of all the Examples of the four Conjuga∣tions, giving the English for the Latine, then let him in the same order go over them all again, only giving now the Latine for the English, or setting the English before the Latine: thus, I love, ego amo; thou lovest, tu amas, &c. and, I love, ego amo; I loved or did love, ego amabam: and so through all Moods and Tenses, Numbers and Per∣sons. And let not this exercise be left off, till he be exact in it.

When the Active Voice is gained, then proceed to the Passive, and let that be got in the same man∣ner and order, first Latine before English, then English before Latine; first all the Persons of each Tense; then one Person only of a Tense at once; first the Present Tense, and all that come of it, then the Preterperfect Tense, and all that come of it likewise.

And when the Passive Voice is also thus gained, then go again to work to the getting of both A∣ctive

and Passive together in the same manner and order, Latine before English, and English before Latine, beginning first with the Present Tense, and those that come of it, and going on to the Preter∣perfect Tense, and those that come of that.

When the Scholar is perfect in doing thus all the four Examples of this Grammar, then put him to other Examples, which he will within a while rea∣dily do, and extempore, being made thus perfect in these.

It will be very useful, after this practice, to put other Substantives, besides the Pronouns, before the Verbs, and form them together with the Verbs: thus, Ego pater amo, &c. Ego mater amor, &c. Tu ma∣gister doces, &c. Tu puella doceris, &c. Ille vir legit, &c. Illa dictio legitur, &c. Nos pueri audimus; Vos virgines ploratis; Illa regna perduntur; or the like.

If the Teacher please, he may yet go on to put his Scholar to the adding of a casual word after his Verb, chusing sometimes a Verb, that governeth an Accusative, sometimes one that governeth a Da∣tive, and sometimes one that governeth a Nomina∣tive after it; as, Ego amo te; Tu places mihi; Hora∣tius salutatur Poeta; Virgilius legitur à me.

How great will be the benefit of this exercise, is so visible, that I need not expatiate in the commen∣dation of it. Briefly therein there is laid the main ground-work of the Latine Tongue. For in this exercise all the Three Concords are practically learned. That of the Nominative Case and the Verb, in the declining of the Verb with his Perso∣nal Pronoun. That of the Substantive with the Sub∣stantive, in declining together with the Pronoun Substantive another Noun Substantive. Ego pater amo. And that of the Substantive and Adjective, in the declining of the Perterperfect Tenses of the

Verbs Passives with Nominative Cases of divers Genders; Ego pater amatus sum; tu mater amataes vel fuisti; illud regnum eversum est vel fuit, &c. And I need not say how great an insight is given into the Government of Verbs, by adding a casual word to the Verb, accordingly as I have shewn.

This exercise need not be done continuedly, and altogether, but one part of it at once, and that eve∣ry morning after the saying of the mornings part. And in about a quarter of a years time it will, if well followed, be well learned.

After the Scholar is grown exact in the forming of Verbs Perfect and Regular, then let him be tho∣roughly instructed in the Verbs Defective and Irre∣gular. The Irregular Verbs are competently done already in the Accidence. Of that which Gramma∣rians deliver touching Verbs Defective, I shall here for the Use of the Learner, subjoyn this Collectio•• with Notes upon it.

Of Verbs Defective.

Indicat. Pres. Sing. Aio, ais, ait. Plur. aiu•••• Preterimperf. aiebam, aiebas, aiebat; aiebamu•• * 1.35 aiebatis, aiebant. Imperat. ai. Potent. Pres. Sin•• aias, aiat. Plur. aiamus, aiant. Particip. aiens.

¶ For aiebant the Ancients said aibant. Prob•• owns in the Preterperf. ai, aisti, ait. And 'tis ce••¦tain, that in Tertullian is read aierunt. Vossius thin•• the Ancients used yet more, such as aitis, aite, ar•• some others. See Voss. Etymolog. Lat. p. 132. ar•• Analog. l. 3. p. 140.

Potent. Pres. & Preterperf. Sing. Ausim, ausis, ••¦sit. * 1.36 Plur. ausint.

¶ Ausim is used for audeam and ausus sim. It made by a Syncope of auserim formed from a••

which anciently was the Preterperf. of audeo, as well as ausus sum, which only is in use.

Indicat. Fut. Salvebis. Imperat. Sing Salve, sal∣veto. * 1.37 Plur. Salvete, salvetote. Infin. Salvere.

¶ Plautus useth Salveo, but in the Person of a Rustick; and in that is not to be followed.

Imperat. Sing. Ave, aveto. Plur. avete, avetote. * 1.38 Infinit avere.

¶ Ave considered as a word of Salutation, is a Defective, according to what is here delivered of it: but aveo to covet or desire, hath more Tenses.

Imperat. Sing. Cedo. Plur. cedite. * 1.39

¶ Cedo is used for dic or porrige. Nomen Mulieris cedo quod sit. Ter. Heaut. 4. 2. Puerum mihi cedo. Ter. Hec. 4. 4. For cedite anciently was said cette. Cette manus vestras. Enn. in Medea.

Potent. Preterperf. Faxim, faxis, faxit. Plur. Fa∣xint. * 1.40 Fut. Faxo, faxis, faxit. Plur. faxint.

¶ Faxim is made of facerim, for fecerim, saith Vossius, and so faxo of facero, for fecero: for the An∣cients did often retain the Vowel of the Present tense in the Preterperf. tense. Hence canuere in Salust. for cecinere. Of the same nature and forma∣tion is axim, adaxim, and axo. There is read also faximus and faxitis in the Plural Number: and fa∣xem for fecissem, saith Voss. (de Analog. l. 3. c. 41.) and faxere for facturum esse, saith Mr. Shirly. Via ad Lat. Ling. p. 99.

Potent. Preterimperf. Sing. Forem, fores, foret. * 1.41 Plur. forent. Infinit. fore.

¶ Forem is made by a Syncope of fuerem, and fore of fuere of the old Verb fuo. There is also read in Virgil. afforet; in Terence, confore. Vossius in Ety∣molog. Lat. p. 133. names deforem.

Indicat. Pres. Quaeso. Plur. Quaesumus. * 1.42

¶ In Lucret. there is read quaesit; in Plaut. quae∣sere;

in Apuleius, quaesens; in Ennius, quaesendum. See Voss. de Analog. l. 3. c. 41.

Indicat. Pres. Infit. * 1.43

¶ Infit comes of infio used by Varro, as Priscian testifies l. 8. It signifies the same that Incipit. Infit ibi postulare. Plaut. Aulul. 2. 4. Hither may be re∣ferred defit for deest, defiunt; defiet, defiat, defieri. Also confit and confieri. Aliis quia defit quod amant, aegrè est. Ter. Quae crescente lunâ gliscunt, deficiente contrà lunâ defiunt. Gell. Verùm quid ego dicam? hoc confit, quod volo. Ter. Nunc quâ ratione quod in∣stat Confieri possit, paucis, adverte, docebo. Virg.

Indicat. Pres. Inquam, inquis, inquit. Plur. Inqui∣mus, * 1.44 inquitis, inquiunt. Preterimperf. inquiebat, in∣quiebant. Preterperf. inquisti. Futur. inquies, in∣quiet. Imperat. inque, inquito.

¶ Grammarians name more, but till what they name be confirmed by good authority, it may do well to forbear them. These here named, may be confirmed by authority. Inquam, inquis, inquit, in∣quiunt, inquiebat, inquiebant, inquisti, inquies and in∣quiet are read in Cicero; inquimus in Horace; inque in Terence; inquito in Plautus. See Voss. Etymolog. Lat. p. 133. and de Analog. l. 3. c. 40. Inquibat is in Cicero's Topicks, unless it be a misprint.

Indicat. Fut. Valebis. Imperat. vale, valeto; va∣lete, valetote. Infin. valere. * 1.45

¶ Valeo, to be strong or able, is a perfect Verb; but valebis, being a form of valediction, or bidding adieu or farewel, is a Verb defective.

Imperat. Apage. Plur. apagite. * 1.46

¶ Vossius deriveth apage and apagite from the Greek 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 to drive away. Apage is read in Plaut. apagite in Cic.

Indicat. Pres. Ovat. Particip. Ovans. * 1.47

¶ Mr. Shirly adds Ovarent and ovandi; his au∣thority

he names not. From a Supine of this Verb Vossius derives the Verbals Ovatus and Ovatio.

Indicat. Pres. Explicit. Plur. expliciunt. Sherly * 1.48 Gram. Lat. p. 39.

¶ Explicit signifies the same with desinit.

Scio in the Imperative Mood hath not sci. * 1.49

Soleo in the Future tense hath not solebo. * 1.50

Furo hath not in the Imperative Mood fure. * 1.51

Neither dor nor for are read in the Indicative * 1.52 Mood; nor der and fer in the Subjunctive Mood; * 1.53 yet daris and faris, &c. are used. Diomedes own•• effor. Fans is in Plaut. Pers. 2. 1. Tu meum ingenium fans non didicisti, atque infans.

These three odi, coepi, memini want the Tenses formed of the Present tense: but have those that come of the Preterperfect tense, as odi, odisti, odit, * 1.54 &c. oderam, oderim, od'ssem, odero, odisse. Part. Osu∣rus. So coepi, coeperim, coepissem, coepero, coepisse. Sup. * 1.55 coeptum▪ coeptu. Particip. coepturus. So Memini, me∣mineram, * 1.56 meminerim, meminissem, meminero, memi∣nisse.

¶ These three Verbs in the Preterperfect tense have the signification of the Present tense; and in the Future tense of the Potential Mood have the signification of the Future tense of the Indicative Mood, Odi hath also osus sum, and coepi, coeptus sum in the Preterperfect tense. And memini hath me∣mento and mementote in the Imperative Mood. An∣ciently there was odio, whence were formed Odivi, odivit, odite, odiet, odient, odibunt, odientes, oditur, odiaris. So also coepio, whence coepiam, coepiat, coe∣peret, which are sometimes read, but are now dis∣used. It is ordinary to add to these Novi, because * 1.57 this like the rest hath in the Preterperfect tense the signification of the Present tense. But the Verb is a

perfect Verb, formed of nosco. See Voss. de Analog. l. 3. c. 39.

And thus far of Forming of Verbs.

CHAP. IV. Of Translating English into Latine.

BY that time the Scholar is made perfect in Forming Nouns and Verbs, it will be time to put him not only to learn an Author, but also to make Latine; supposing he hath in the mean time attained to some competency of knowledge of the Rules for the Genders of Nouns and Preterperfect Tenses, and Supines of Verbs, and for the Agreement and Government of Words, in English at least, and however so far, that he knows where to find, by turning thereto, such Rules as will be needful for him to consult withal for the true making of his La∣tine. And supposing also that he knows the several Characters, Marks, or Notes of Points, Pauses, or Stops used in speaking or writing, and something also of the meaning, use, and force of them.

And because a taste at least of this knowledge of Points and Pointing, is highly necessary towards the Scholars both right reading and understanding, and also to his right construing and translating, therefore I will here add somewhat of it.

Of Points.

The Points are five: a Period, a Colon, a Comma, a Note of Interrogation, and a Note of Admiration.

A Period is a single prick set at the foot of a word, thus (,)

A Colon is two pricks set one over the other after a word, thus (:)

A Comma is a small semicircle set after a word at the foot of it, thus (,)

A Note of Interrogation is a prick set after a word with a semicircle above it, thus (?)

A Note of Admiration is a prick set after a word with a short straight line over it, thus (!)

To these by some are added a Semi-Period, a Se∣mi-Colon, and a Semi-Comma.

A Semi-Period is marked thus (.) a Semi-Colon thus (;) and a Semi-Comma thus (,)

And with these are usually taught a Parenthesis marked with two Semicircles, thus (); and a Para∣thesis marked with two Semiquadrats, thus []

Of Pointing.

The Rules of Pointing are either General or Parti∣cular.

The General Rule, which concerns all the Points, is this, That so many finite Verbs as are either expres∣sed or implied in any sentence, so many Points do belong to that sentence.

The Particular Rules, which concern the several Points, are these.

1. Of a Period.

A Period is set, after a sentence containing a full and absolute sense, is compleatly ended; whether it be a simple or compounded sentence; consisting of one, or more Propositions: as

• Sera nunquam est ad bonos mores via. Sen.
• Nihil enim honestum esse potest, quod justitiâ vacat. Cic.
• Post amicitiam credendum est, ante amicitiam judi∣candum. Sen.
• Non qui parum habet, sed qui plus cupit, pauper est. Sen.

• ... Saepe utile est non scire, quid futurum sit: miserum est enim, nihil proficientem angi. Cic.

2. Of a Colon.

A Colon is set between the dividing members of a sentence compounded of sundry Propositions.

Such as are,

(1) An Enunciation and its Reason: as,

Viligandum est semper: multae insidiae sunt bonis. Cic.

Aetate fruere: mobili cursu fugit. Sen.

(2) A Proposition and its Reddition in a Simili∣tude: as.

Ʋt major est vis animi, quàm corporis: sic sunt graviora ea, quae concipiuntur animo, quàm illa, quae corpore. Cic.

(3) A Concessive and its Adversative Conjuncti∣on: as,

Quanquam ipsa consolatio literarum tuarum mihi gratissima est: tamen illum fructum ex literis tuis cepi, &c. Cic. Fam. l. 5.

Itaque etsi domum bene potus, seróque redieram: tamen id caput, ubi haec controversia est, notavi, &c. Cic. Fam. 7. 22.

Est invidiosa lex, sicut dixi: Veruntamen habet ex∣cusationem: non enim videtur hominis lex esse, sed temporis. Cic. 2. de Leg. Agr.

(4) A Totum and its Parts in a Distinction: as, Cujus partes duae sunt: Justitia, in quâ virtutis splendor est maximus, & huic conjuncta Beneficentia, &c. Cic. 1. Off. c. 8.

Animum in duas partes dividunt: alteram rationis participem faciunt, alteram expertem. Cic. 4. Tusc.

(5) Distinguishing Branches in a Partition: as, Primùm mihi videtur de genere belli: deinde de magnitudine: tum de imperatore deligendo esse dicen∣dum. Cic. pro Leg. Manil.

Primùm docent deos esse: deinde quales sint: tunc mundum ab iis administrari: postremò consulere eos rebus humanis. Cic. de Nat. Deor.

(6) Clause and Clause in a Transition: as,

Causa, quae sit, videtis: nunc quid agendum sit, con∣siderate. Cic. pro Leg. Manil.

3. Of a Comma.

(1) A Comma is set betwixt the Parts of a com∣pounded Proposition, whether it be Conditional, Causal, or Relative: and whether it be Copulative, Discretive, or Disjunctive.

1. Conditional: as,

• Si dives est, bonus est.
• Non si bonus est, dives est.

2. Causal: as,

• Quia sursum tendit, leve est.
• Remissa sunt ei peccata, quia dilexit multúm.

3. Relative: as,

• ...Qui non est hodie, cras minùs aptus erit.
• ...Quantum quisque suâ nummorum servat in arcâ,
• Tantum habet & fidei. Juv.
• Quantò perditior quisque est, tantò acriùs urget. Hor.
• ...Quot vulnera, tot ora.
• ...Qualis Princeps, talis populus.
• ...Ʋnde oriuntur omnia, eò redeunt.
• Non ubi quisque erit, ejus loci jus tenebit. Cic.
• Donec eris foelix, multos numerabis amicos. Ovid.
• Quoties dicimus, toties de nobis judicatur. Cic.
• Antequam incipias, consulto: postquam consulueris, maturè facto opus est. Sall.

4. Copulative: as,

• Et homo, & brut um sentit.
• Neque metuam quicquam, & cavebo omnia.
• Neque bonis, neque malis invidendum est.
• Non & amicus, & adulator est.
• Hic & pauper, & pius, & doctus est.

5. Discretive: as,

• Non qui patitur, sed qui facit injuriam, miser est.
• Faelicitas non in habitu, sed in actu virtutis consistit.
• Quanquam robustus est, tamen ignavus est.
• Quanquam planta non sentit, tamen vivit.
• Non quanquam avarus est, tamen vir bonus est.

6 Disjunctive: as,

• Aut dies est, aut nox.
• Non aut homo est, aut animal non est.
• Aut album, aut nigrum, aut medii coloris est, aut omnino coloratum non est.
• Non aut hoc, aut illud, aut istud est.

(2) A Comma is set betwixt the Parts of a simple Proposition, where the order of the Parts is invert∣ed; or the words ungrammatically placed: as,

• ...Animal est, omnis homo.
• Non est delineata res, vivere. Sen. ep. 107.

(3) A Comma is set before a Substantive with his dependents added to another Substantive by Appo∣sition: as,

• ...Nunc autem studetis me interficere, hominem qui ve∣ritatem vobis locutus sum.
• Deliciae verò tuae, noster Aesopus, ejusmodi fuit, ut—Cic.
• Provocare ausus Albanos, gravem & diu principem populum. Flor.

(4) A Comma is set before an Exegetical Ex∣pression added to something going before for ex∣plication, restriction, or amplification; especially if brought in by a Participle, or other Adjective: as,

• Rheginos credo, quod Scenicis artibus largiri sole∣bant, id huic, summâ ingenii praedito gloriâ, noluisse? Cic.
• Sit igitur, Judices, sanctum apud vos, humanissimos homines, hoc P••etae nomen, quod nullâ unquam barbariâ violavit. Cic.

• ... Themistoclem illum, summum Athenis virum, dixisse aiunt—Cic.

(5) A Comma is set before and after an Icon or Assimilation, inserted within a sentence for illustra∣tion: as,

• Eloquentiae magister, nisi, tanquam piscator, eam imposuerit hamis escam, quam scierit appetituros esse pisciculos, sine spe praedae moratur in scopulo. Petron.

(6) A Comma is set before and after a word or clause, inserted within another sentence for ele∣gancy of composition: as,

• Pacem, etiam qui vincere possunt, volunt. Liv.
• Difficile est dictu, Quirites, quanto in odio sinus apud exteras nationes, propter eorum, quos ad eas hoc anno cum imperio misimus, injurias, ac libidines. Cic.

(7) A Comma is set after a Vocative Case in the beginning of a clause, and both before and after it in the middle of a clause: as,

• Sexte noster, bonâ veniâ dic, quoniam, &c. Cic. pro Dom.
• Marce Tulli, quid agis? Cic. 1. Cat.
• O noster Demea, ad omnia alia aetate sapimus rectiús. Ter.
• Quousque tandem abutere, Catilina, patientiâ no∣strâ? Cic.
• Omnia, mi Lucili, aliena sunt: tempus tantùm no∣strum est. Sen. ep. 1.

N. The Point after a Vocative Case in the end of a clause is such as the nature of the clause requi∣reth: whether Period, Colon, Comma, Interroga∣tion, or Admiration: as,

• Ausculta paucis, nisi molestum est, Demea. Ter. Ad.
• It à fac, mi Lucili: vindica te tibi. Sen. ep. 1.
• Dis quidem esses, Demea, ac tuam rem constabilîsses. Ter. Ad.

• ... Quid fit, Ctesipho? Ter.
• O mi Aeschine! O mi germane! Ter. Ad.

(8) A Comma is set before or after an Adjective standing between two Substantives, and capable of being construed with either, to declare to which it belongs: as,

• Summâ quidem auctoritate Philosophi, severè sanè at que honestè, haec triae genera confusa, cogitatione di∣stinguunt. Cic. 2. Off.
• Where the Comma is set after confusa, to prevent its being thought to agree with cogitatione.

(9) A Comma is set before a Relative in a latter clause of a sentence, or before the word beginning that clause in which the Relative is: as,

• Causa mea est melior, qui non contraria fovi Arma. Ovid.
• ...Lego Virgilium, prae quo caetori Poetae sordent.

(10) A Comma is set betwixt quàm in one clause, and his corresponding Particle, tam, aequè, non mi∣nùs, antè, priùs, pòst, &c. in another: as,

• Tam te diligo, quàm meipsum. Ter.
• Nihil a què facere ad viperae morsum, quàm taxi ar∣boris succu••. Suet.
• Haecres non minùs mè malè habet, quàm te. Ter.
• Si quàm audax est ad conandum, tam esset obscuru•• in agendo. Cic.
• Quae causa antè mortua est, quàm tu natus esses. Cic.
• Multò priùs scivi, quàm tu, illum amicum habere. Ter.
• Annibal tertio pòst die, quàm venit, copias in aciem eduxit. Liv.
• Postridie intellexi, quàm à vobis discessi. Cic.
• Vicinum citiûs adjuveris in fructibus percipiendis, quàm aut fratrem, aut familiarem. Cic.

(11) A Comma is set before an Adverb having the force of a Connexive Conjunction: and generally

when any connexive Particle is expressed or im∣plied: as,

• Non arbor erat relicta, non gubernaculum, non fu∣nis, aut remus. Petron.
• Curris, stupes, satagis, tanquam mu•• in matellâ. Petron.
• Rumorem, fabulam fictam, falsam perhorrescimu••. Cic.
• Cujus omnis actio, ratio, cogitatio, totus denique tri∣bunatus, nihil aliud fuit, nisi constans, perpetua, fortis, invicta defensio salutis meae. Cic.

(12) A Comma is set before an Infinitive Verb with his Accusative Case, which may be resolved in∣to a Finite Verb and a Nominative Case: as,

• Non possum dicere, me nihil perdere. Sen. ep. 1.
• Sed oftendere, me aegrè pati, illi nolui. Ter. Ad. 1, 2.

(13) A Comma is set after an Interjection with his dependents, if he have any; unless it be such an Interjection as properly requires another Point, as Interjections of Admiration or Exclamation: as,

• Oh, tibi ego ut credam, furcifer? Ter. And. 3. 5.
• Hei mihi, cur non habeo spatium, ut—Ter. And. 4. 1.
• Heus, proximus sum egomet mihi. Ter. And. 4. 1.
• Hem! st, mane. Ib. Hem, Pamphile, optimè te mihi offers. Ib. 4. 2.

(14) A Comma is set after an Ablative Case Abso∣lute with its dependents, and before it too, if it be in the middle of a sentence: as,

• Sed expositis adolescentium officiis, deinceps de bene∣ficentiâ dicendum est. Cic. 2. Off.
• Credo pudicitiam, Saturnorege, moratam In terris. Juv.
• Deum, quo auctore cuncta proveniunt, sinc murmur a∣tione comitari. Sen. ep. 107.

Of a Semi-Period.

A Semi-Period (.) though it differ not in figure

from a full Period, yet is distinguished from it by this, that when a Great Letter follows, it is called Periodus supina, or absolutely a Period: but when a Small Letter follows, it is called Periodus pendens, or a Semi-Period.

A Semi-Period is set betwixt Periods, whereof the latter hath a near dependence on the former for sense of matter, though not for construction of words; the latter beginning with a new principal Verb, as well as the former: as,

Cum rerum naturâ delibera. illa dicet tibi, se & diem fecisse, & noctem. Sen. ep. 3.

Hodiernus dies solidus est. nemo ex illo quidquam mihi eripuit: totus inter stratum lectionémque divisus est Sen. ep. 83.

The proper place for a Semi-Period (might it be so far admitted) were betwixt the former and latter part of a Period consisting of a Protasis and its Apo∣dosis, or an Enunciation and its Reason: also betwixt a Totum and his Parts in a Division; and betwixt Clause and Clause in a Transition.

Of a Semi-Colon.

A Semi-Colon (;) is set where the Pause seems lesser than that of a Colon, and yet greater than that of a Comma: as,

Tu, quid divitiae possint, consideras; quid virtus, non item.

The proper place for a Semi-Colon seems to be be∣tween member and member in a Division (if the Parts be separated from the Totum by a Semi-Period) or in a Subdivision (if the Parts be separated from the Totum by a Colon): also between branch and branch in a Partition; and generally betwixt Opposits in a Distinction.

Of a Semi-Comma.

A Semi-Commae (,) is set where a less Pause or

distinction is needful than that of a Comma.

And its proper place, if it may be admitted so far, will be: where the Words of a simple Proposi∣tion are ungrammatically (or, the Parts illogically) placed, (viz. the Predicate before the Subject); where the words of one clause are, for elegancy of Composition, inserted within the words of another; where an Exegetical addition is made to a foregoing Substantive, by the Apposition of another Substantive to it, or of an Adjective, or Participle, with its de∣pendents on it; where a Word so stands between two Clauses, as that it may be taken to belong to either; and generally, where there is need of more pauses in pronunciation, than there are distinct parts of the construction: as, where the circumstances of acti∣ons [viz. time, place, manner, means, &c.] are ex∣pressed together with them.

This Period of Cicero's, pointed as follows, may, in part, be an exemplification of the foregoing Rules.

Denique, Quirites, quoniam me quatuor omnino ge∣nera hominum violârunt. Ʋnum eorum, qui odio rei∣publicae, quòd eam, ipsis invitis, conservâram, mihi ini∣micissimi fuerunt: alterum, qui, per simulationem ami∣citiae, nefariè prodiderunt: tertium, qui, cùm, propter inertiam suam, eadem assequi non possent, inviderunt laudi, & dignitati meae: quartum, qui, cùm custodes reipub. esse debuerunt, salutem meam, statum civitatis, dignitatem ejus imperii, quod erat penès ipsos, vendi∣derunt: Sic ulciscar genera singula, quemadmodum à quibusque sum provocatus: malos cives, rempub. bene gerendo; perfidos amicos, nihil credendo, atque omnia cavendo; invidos, virtuti, & gloriae serviendo; mercatores provinciarum, revocando domum, atque ab iis provinciarum rationem repetendo. Cic. ad Quirit. post redit.

Of a Note of Interrogation.

A Note of Interrogation (?) is set at the end of a question: as,

Quae nota domesticae turpitudinis non inusta vitae tuae est?

This Note is sometimes continued through many clauses of a Period: as,

Quousque tandem abutêre, Catilina, patientiâ no∣strâ? quamdiu nos etiam furor iste tuus eludet? quem ad finem sese effrenata jactabit audacia?

Sometimes it is omitted, though the speech be In∣terrogative; namely, when the sentence is length∣ned so far, that the Interrogative force, wherewith it began, is by little and little wasted and lost: as,

An tu putas esse honos viros, qui amicitias utilitate colunt; nihil ad humanitatem, nihil ad honestum refe∣runt; nec libenter ea curant, quae ego nisi curarem praeter caetera, prorsus me tuâ benevolentiâ, in quá magnam foelicitatis meae partem soleo ponere, indignum putarem.

Of a Note of Admiration.

A Note of Admiration (!) is set after words of Admiring, Exclaiming, or Deploring: as,

• O vir fortis atque amicus! Ter. Phor.
• Proh Deûm atque hominum fidem! Cic. 5. Verr.
• Ah virgo infoelix! Virg. 6. Eclog
• ...Vah inconstantiam! Vah mea Antiphila!
• ...Vah homo impudens!
• Heu stirpem invisam! Virg. 2. Aen.
• Heu pietas! heu prisca fides! Virg. 6. Aen.

Of a Parenthesis.

A Parenthesis () incloses within one sentenc•• another sentence which is no part of it: as,

Deus ad homines ve••it, imò (quod propius est) i•• homines venit. Sen. ep. 73.

Of a Parathesis.

A Parathesis [] incloses Synonymous words and Aequipollent Phrases added to former, &c. as,

• ...Aliud nihil, quàm [nisi] flere potui.
• ...Non dubium est mihi, quin [nihil vereor, ne non] & auctior in dies, & illustrior futura sit.
• Pertusum quicquid in dolium infunditur [i. e. quic∣quid ingrato feceris] perit.

These few plain Rules and easie Directions may be sufficient for a young Learner. For fulness and accurateness of skill in Pointing, recourse must be had to Grammarians and Rhetoricians that have written of it: though I know none that has written so fully and accurately, as to be exactly followed by all others; most differing both from others, and from themselves herein. He that to me seems to have gone the furthest, and come the nearest to the setting of a Standard for others, is that inge∣nious Grammarian, Mr. Lewis of Tottenham, in his Engl. Gram. p. 1, 2, 3. and Plain and short Rules for Pointing Periods, p. 1, 2, 3.

It is the usual (and indeed the best) way to begin with Translating. To render this work easie and successful, it will be good to contrive Englishes, wherein the first things, and those that are most easie, yet necessary to make way for what is to fol∣low, shall be proposed. Such will be little Sen∣tences containing the Agreement of the Verb per∣sonal with his Nominative Case; Adjective with his Substantive; or Substantive with his Substan∣tive belonging to the same thing. Or the Govern∣ment of an Accusative Case by a Verb; or a Geni∣tive Case by a former Substantive, and the like. After some time spent in these kind of Englishes, more difficult may be proceeded unto, namely such

as contain in them the Agreement and Govern∣ment of the Relative, &c. A Pattern whereof fol∣lows afterward in this Chapter, in little Englishes framed according to the Rules of the Grammar for the Three Concords, which the Teacher may first make use of, and then, if he find not them enow, he may do more, and go on with the rest of the Rules of the Grammar, after that manner that I have begun with: or else put his Scholars to the Transla∣ting of some English Book, proper for that pur∣pose: such as Mr. Wases Essay of a Practical Gram∣mar, Wits Common-wealth, Moral Philosophy, &c. unless he please to translate for them himself, Tul∣ly's Sentences, or some Epistle of Seneca, or Ora∣tion of Cicero, &c.

Let the Teacher in the first place teach his Scho∣lar to know, and then cause him to put the English words out of the Artificial into the Natural order, and so read them, not suffering him, (as it is the use with some) just to fall to translating them, as he finds them lying in the English book. The natural order being found, the work is half done: all will then run of it self almost.

The Scholar will be taught the Natural Order of the English by Precept and by Practice.

For Precept, the Teacher may be pleased to go according to his own judgment, and his Scholar's need. In the mean time he may instil into his Lear∣ner these General Rules.

General Rules touching the Natural Order of Words.

The Person spoken to, comes before the words spoken to him

Words of Connexion come before the words o clauses connexed by them.

Words governing others, go before those that are governed of them.

Words agreeing with others, follow those that they agree with.

Words declaring others, follow those that they declare.

Words depending on others, follow those that they depend upon.

These general Rules have some Exceptions, as most general Rules have: for the Relative, if it be not the Nominative Case, comes before the word that governs it; so doth the Interrogative, &c. and in English the Adjective oft comes before the Sub∣stantive, that it agrees with. But it is a sure way ever to make the Substantive before the Adjective. But if the Teacher shall think these Rules too Gene∣ral, he may be pleased to give his Scholar these fol∣lowing, which are more Particular.

Particular Rules for the Natural or Grammatical Order of Words.

R. 1. In the first place stand Words of Excitation or stirring up to attention.

Such as are,

(1) Interjections and Adverbs of Exhorting, Wish∣ing, Calling, Shewing, Asking: as, O, ohe, heu, age, agite, ut, utinam, heus, eho, ehodum, en, ecce, an, quomodo, &c.

And with these go their Cases depending on them.

(2) Vocative Cases of Nouns or Pronouns.

If there be none of these in the sentence, then in the first place stand Adverbs of Forbidding, Likeness, or Relation: or Conjunctions Causals or Rationals: as, Ne, nequaquam; quemadmodum, sicut; cum, quando, donec; quandoquidem, quare, &c.

R. 2. In the second place (if any of the former sort of words go before, else in the first place) stands that Substantive, which is the Nominative Case to the principal Verb Personal, or that which stands instead of the Nominative Case to it.

And together with the Substantive goes the Adje∣ctive that agrees with it.

And if either the Substantive or Adjective do go∣vern a casual word, then together with the Sub∣stantive or Adjective goes the Casual word govern∣ed of it: as also any other word depending on it.

R. 3. Next to the Nominative Case and his De∣pendents stands the Verb Personal that agrees with it.

But if the Verb be an Impersonal, or a Verb put Impersonally, then that, not having any Nomina∣tive Case before it, begins the sentence: as, Taedet me vitae. Haec olim meminisse juvabit. Virg.

And as the Nominative Case stands before the Verb of a Finite Mood, so the Accusative stands before a Verb of the Infinitive Mood: as, Te rediisse incolumem gaudeo.

R. 4. Next to the Verb stands the Adverb (if there be any) of Place, Time, Quantity, Quality, or the like.

But if there be no Adverb coming with the Verb for the explaining of it, then next to the Verb stands the Casual word governed of the Verb; or the Infinitive Mood, if there be one, with his de∣pendents.

And if the Verb have several Casual words after it, which are governed of it, then the Dative goes before the Accusative, and the Accusative before the Genitive and Ablative: as,

Dono tibi hoc munus. Dono te hoc munere. Admo∣neto illum pristinae fortunaes Lupum auribus teneo.

R. 5. After the Verb with his dependents fol∣lows the Preposition, together with the Casual word governed of him, and his dependents: as, Accipit in Teucros animum, mentémque benignam. Virg. Initia in potestate nostrâ sunt, de eventu fortuna judicat. Sen.

R. 6. After the Verb also with his dependents follows the Ablative Case Absolute, and what depends on it: as, Imperante Augusto natus est Christus.

Though the Ablative Case Absolute, as virtually containing a Verb in its clause, may be set before the Verb too, as it may stand with most conve∣niency.

Note 1. Interrogatives and Relatives governed of a Verb come before the Verb that governs them.

Also they come before any other word that go∣verns them, except a Preposition.

And together with the Interrogative and Relative comes the Casual word, if it be expressed, that they agree with.

Also, if they be not governed of the Verb, then both they and the word that they are governed of, mostly come before the Verb: as,

Cujus numen adoro. Quibus rebus adductus fecisti?

Note 2. If any thing be wanting, necessary to compleat the construction, it is to be supplied: as, Ventum erat ad Vestae, i. e. templum.

Note 3. Figurative Construction is to be resolved into Proper: as, Velle suum, i. e. Volunt as sua. Id genus alia, i. e. ejus generis.

If the Teacher think not these Rules to be enow, or not plain enough, he may be pleased to frame Rules of himself more plain and full: or else con∣sult Rhenius De Natur ali Ordine Constructionis in his Gram. Lat. p. 540. and Voss. De Ordine Grammatico in his Gram. Lat. p. 107. Or Mr. Brinsly in his Lu∣dus Literarius, and Posing of the Accidence; or Mr.

Lewis in his Grammar, and Rules of Pointing, &c.

For Practice, which superadded to the know∣ledge of these few general Rules will in a manner do the whole work, I advise, that the Teacher do contrive, or chuse out some sentences, wherein the words are Artificially placed, and cause his Scholars (himself looking on) to reduce those into the Natu∣ral Order. For instance; Suppose the Scholars had this English to translate into Latine, Of this glory, O Cajus Caesar, which thou hast lately gotten, thou hast no partner; the way to do it right and surely, were to cast it into the Natural Order, O Cajus Caesar, thou hast no partner of this glory, which thou hast gotten lately. To reduce Verses into Prose after this man∣ner, will be an useful practice to this end. And the labour will not be great. Three or four tryals to an ordinary capacity will be sufficient.

When the Natural Order of the words of the English is found, then let the Scholar seek out La∣tine words for the English, and consider how to put them into good Syntax. Which when he hath a while studied upon, let him come before the Tea∣cher, and do it vivâ voce, as well as he can, the Tea∣cher rectifying him where he is amiss, and helping him on with that, which he cannot do of himself. And still as the Learner goes on from word to word, let the Teacher require a reason for his doing that word next: and be often asking, what is next to be done, and why: and when done, ask why it is, or ought to be thus done; and make the Learner understand a Reason, and know a Rule for what he doth. And for the ease of the one, and help of the other, I shall here set down some directions to be used as need shall be.

Directions for making plain Latine.

First, Read the Sentence carefully over, and [unspec I] mark the Points; and whether the Speech be Posi∣tive, Negative, Interrogative, Exclamative, or Ad∣mirative.

Secondly, Observe whether there be in it any [unspec II] Connexive Particles, which are to be made in the order that they stand in; viz. in the beginning of the Sentence. Yet where enim is made for for, some word would be placed before it in the Latine; it not being usual to begin Sentences with that word

Thirdly, Observe whether there be in the Sen∣tence [unspec III] any Vocative Case; for next after the Con∣nexive Particles, if there be any, that is to be made; and if there be none, it is to be made first.

Fourthly, Seek out the principal Verb; that usu∣ally [unspec IV] is the first Verb.

But if the first Verb have coming immediately before it a Relative, as that, who, whom, which, &C. or a Conjunction, as that, if, &c. or, if it be the Infinitive Mood, then seek further for another Verb.

1. Note. The Relative that may be distinguished from that the Conjunction, by this, that the Con∣junction hath ever a Nominative Case betwixt it and the following Verb; but the Relative hath none, unless when it self is not the Nominative Case to the Verb. Also the Relative that may be varied by who, which, or whom: but the Conjunction that cannot.

2. Note. Sometimes a Verb of the Infinitive Mood begins a Sentence, and then stands instead of the Nominative Case to the following Verb: as, To

rise betimes in the morning is a very wholesom thing; Diluculo surgere saluberrimum est.

Fifthly, When the principal Verb is found out, [unspec V] then seek out the Nominative Case to it; and, un∣less there be any Adverbs, or Conjunctions, or Vo∣cative Case to be set down first, begin with that.

Note. That word is the Nominative Case to the Verb, which with good sense answers to the questi∣on who or what, made by the Verb. As in this Sen∣tence, A clear conscience which needeth no excuse, feareth no accusation; to know what is the Nomina∣tive Case to the Verb feareth, the way is to put the word what to the V••rb feareth, saying, what feareth no accusation? to which question, by reading the Sentence over again, it will appear what is to be answered, namely that A clear conscience feareth no accusation; so the word Conscience is the Nominative Case to that Verb.

Sixthly, Having found out the Nominative Case [unspec VI] to the Verb, consider of a Latine word fit for it, and set it down, minding therewithal the Gender and the Number of it.

Seventhly, Having set down the Nominative [unspec VII] Case, consider whether any other words come be∣twixt it and its Verb.

If none come betwixt, then proceed to find out a Latine word proper for the English Verb: and when you have considered what Mood and Tense it should be of, then make it agree with its Nomina∣tive Case in Number and Person: that is, if the No∣minative Case (for example) be of the Singular Number and third Person, then make your Verb to be of that Number and Person; and so what Num∣ber or Person soever your Nominative Case be, let your Verb be of the same Number and Person.

Yet, if the Nominative Case be a Collective Noun,

or a Noun of multitude, the Verb may be of the Plural Number, though the Nominative Case be but of the Singular; as, Pars in frusta secant. Virg. In me turba ruunt. Ovid.

If any words come between the Nominative Case and the Principal Verb, then make into Latine what∣soever hath dependence on the Nominative Case, namely,

1. That Substantive, if there be any, that, as be∣longing to the same thing, agrees with it: and to∣gether with that, or rather immediately after that, make all those words, if there be any, which depend on, or are governed of it. As in this Sentence, Bren∣nus the Captain of the French entring the Temple of Apollo, and spoiling it, was stricken with madness, and slew himself; after [Brennus] the Nominative Case to the principal Verb [was stricken] is set down, must be made into Latine the Substantive [Captain] agreeing in Case with [Brennus] and next to that the word [French] of the Genitive Case, governed of the foregoing word [Captain.]

2. That Adjective, whether Noun, Pronoun, or Participle, that agrees with it, if there be one. As in this Sentence; A clear conscience, which needeth no excuse, feareth no accusation; the word [Conscience] which is the Nominative Case to the Verb [feareth] being made into Latine, and set down, the next word to be made is the Adjective [clear] which agreeth with that Nominative Case.

Note. What is the Substantive to any Adjective, may be known, by adding the word [who] or [what] to the Adjective: for the word answering to the question so made by the Adjective, will be the Sub∣stantive to it. As in the foregoing Sentence; by adding [what] to the Adjective [clear], and saying by way of question [A clear what feareth no accusa∣tion?]

it will by reading the Sentence over again, be found, that the word [Conscience] is the Substan∣tive to the Adjective [clear.]

Having found what is the Substantive to the Ad∣jective, consider what Gender and Number, as well as what Case it is, and put the Adjective into the same Gender, Number, and Case that the Substantive is of. And this is to be observed in all parts of a Sen∣tence, and not only in the beginning of it.

After the Abjective is made to agree with his Substantive, then consider whether there do any words come betwixt it and the Principal Verb, which depend on it, or are governed of it, and if there do come any, then next after it make them. As in this Sentence, Mordorus spoiling Circes Tem∣ple, was stricken mad with all his Souldiers; after that the Participle [spoiling] which agreeth with the Substantive [Mordorus], is made, then must be made the word [Temple] governed of [spoiling]; and the word [Circes] which is the Genitive Case governed of [Temple] the former of the two Sub∣stantives.

Note. When two Substantives come together, if the former end in [s] then 'tis very like that the former is the Genitive Case governed of the latter. And whether it be so or no, may be known, by put∣ting away [s] from the end of the word, and setting [of] before it, and reading before both, the Sub∣stantive that follows it. Thus, if instead of [Circes Temple] it be read [the Temple of Circe] it is visible, that [Circe] is the Genitive Case governed of [Tem∣ple] and that [Circes] is put for [of Circe.]

3. That Substantive (if there be any) that is go∣verned of the foregoing Substantive in the Genitive or Ablative Case. As in this Sentence, A man of no honesty is worthy of no trust; after the Nominative

Case [A man] is made into Latine, the words [of no honesty] are next to be made into Latine; whereof the first [of] is but a sign of the Case, and so is in∣cluded in the Latine of the word [honesty]; the se∣cond word [no] is an Adjective agreeing with the following Substantive [honesty], and therefore not to be made into Latine, till the word [honesty], where∣with it agrees, be first made (for Substantives are always to be made into Latine before their Ad∣jectives, unless in Interrogative or Indefinite speech∣es) so that the third word [honesty] governed of the foregoing Substantive [man] is to be made into La∣tine, thus, Vir probitatis nullius; or, Vir probitate nullâ.

4. That Relative (if there be any) which hath re∣ference to the foregoing Nominative Case and what depends on it, which is a particular clause, branch or member of the Sentence. As in this Sentence, A clear conscience which needeth no excuse, feareth no accusation, the Relative [which] with the rest of that clause depending thereon, viz. the words [needeth no excuse] is to be made into Latine, next after the Nominative Case to the principal Verb, viz. the word [conscience] and his Adjective [clear]: thus, conscientia pura, quae excusatione non eget, accusa∣tionem non timet.

Eightly, When you have made into Latine, not [unspec VIII] only the Nominative Case, but also all that depends both on it, and on the words agreeing with, or go∣verned of it, and is necessary, or fit to be made into Latine together with it, or immediately after it, then proceed to make into Latine the Principal Verb. And, as was said before, after you have by the Form of the Speech, and by the Signs of the Tenses, found out, what Mood and Tense the Verb is to be of, then make it accordingly of that Mood and Tense;

and also of that Number and Person, that the Nomi∣native Case, wherewith it agrees, is of.

The Number of the Nominative Case is known by its signifying one, or more of the things, or persons that it is the name of.

The Person of the Nominative Case, if it have a Pronoun joyned with it, namely one of these [Ego, tu, ille; nos, vos, illi] is known by the Person of the Pronoun joyned with it. Ego and Nos, or I and We, being of the First Person, and so that Noun that is joyned with them; Tu and Vos, or Thou and Ye, be∣ing of the Second Person, and so that Noun that is joyned with them; Ille and Illi, or He and They (and so all other Pronouns) being of the Third Person, and so those Nouns that they are joyned unto.

If the Noun, which is of the Nominative Case, have no Pronoun expresly joyned with it, it is to be considered, what Pronoun it may have joyned with it, or put to stand for it; and such Person, as that pronoun is, (which generally is of the third Person) such Person is the Nominative Case to be conceived to be of, and in such Person the Verb to agree with it.

Generally the Nominative Case comes before the Verb. Yet sometimes the Verb, or at least the Sign of the Verb, is set before the Nominative Case, viz.

1. In Interrogative speeches, wherein a question is asked; as, Lovest thou the King? Doth he love the King?

2. In Verbs of the Imperative Mood, where some∣thing is commanded or permitted; as, Love thou the King. Do thou love the King. Let us love the King

3. In certain Phrases or Forms of speaking, where these Particles [it] or [there] are joyned

with the Verb; as, It is my book; There came one to me. Where [book] the Nominative Case to [is] in the former Sentence, and [one] the Nominative Case to [came] in the latter Sentence, is set after the Verb, whose Nominative Case it is, and with which it is to agree.

When [it] or [there] come with a Verb before a Noun, then mind, whether that Verb be not a Verb Impersonal (i. e. one of those Verbs commonly so called, and usually set without any Nominative Case before them), for [it] and [there] are Signs of an Impersonal Verb; and if it be, then the word that seems to be the Nom. must be such Case as the Verb Impersonal doth govern; as, There must be some body; Oportet esse aliquem.

If the Nominative Case come after the Verb, or after the Sign of the Verb, then in writing down or reading (vivâ voce) the English into Latine, write or read the words in the order they stand in, viz. First the Verb, then the Nominative Case; as, Lo∣vest thou the King? Amas tu Regem? Do thou love the King, Ama tu Regem. It is my book, Est liber meus. There came one to me, Venit ad me quidam.

Yet this order is not always necessarily to be ob∣served, but may sometimes be altered; as, Túne amas Regem? or, Tu amas Regem? Liber meus est. Quidam ad me venit, may well enough be said.

Ninthly, When the Principal Verb is made, then [unspec IX] consider what word or words follow it, in order to the making of them into Latine.

1. If an Adjective come after it without any Sub∣stantive, then most likely that Adjective hath refe∣rence to that Substantive, which is the Nominative Case to the Verb: and if so, it is to be made also in the Nominative Case, (what Case soever the Verb do govern after him): as, Peter sleepeth void of

care; Petrus dormit securus. And however, it must, by putting the word [who or what, &c.] to the English Adjective be found out, what Substantive the Adjective refers unto, with which when found, the Adjective (as was said before) must be made to agree.

2. If a Substantive come after the principal Verb, (whether with, or without an Adjective) in the same clause or member of the Period or Sentence, it is then governed of the Verb, and is to be put in such Case as the Verb, by vertue of its own signifi∣cation, or use in Authors, or Rule in Grammar, re∣quires to have after it, whether Genitive, Dative, Accusative, or Ablative.

And the same thing is to be considered and obser∣ved touching all casual words coming after all other Verbs, though they be not the Principal in the Sen∣tence.

3. If there come betwixt the Verb and the Sub∣stantive any casual Particle or Preposition, then it is to be considered, what Case words are to be of which have those Particles or Prepositions coming before them; or what Case of a Noun, that Verb having this or that Particle, Sign, or Token after it, is by Grammar Rule to govern: and accordingly the English is to be made into Latine.

Casual Particles are, of, to, for, in, into, with, through, from, by, &c.

Grammar Rules guiding to the Case of the Verb by the token or sign going before the Noun, are these. All manner of Verbs put acquisitively, that is to say, with these tokens to or for after them, will have a Dative Case. All Verbe require an Ablative Case of the Instrument with this Sign with before it, &c.

4 If there come more Substantives than one after the Verb, then it is to be considered, whether those

Substantives do belong to the same, or to divers things.

If they belong to the same thing, then they are to be put in the same Case: as, They drive away the drones a sluggish cattel from the hives; Ignavum fucos pecus à praesepibus arcent. This is as well to be obser∣ved concerning Substantives coming before the Verb.

If the Substantives belong to the same thing, there may be with good sense and English, set between them, these words, who is, or which is, or which are: as here, sluggish cattel, the drones, which are, a slug∣gish cattel.

If they belong to divers things, then it is to be considered what respect each Substantive hath to the Verb (for one and the same Verb may, upon divers considerations, govern many and divers Ca∣ses, viz. one of the Thing; another of the Person; another of the Cause, Manner, Adjunct, Instrument, &c. (as, Dedit mihi vestem pignori, te praesente, pro∣priâ manu) and accordingly each Noun is to be put into such Case, as the Verb according to that re∣spect that the Noun hath to the Verb, doth require of the Noun.

If any Casual Particle come betwixt the Nouns, then they belong to divers things, and have diffe∣rent respects to the Verb. But if there come no Casual Particle betwixt them, nor any Comma or other Point, then they belong to the same thing, and have the same respect to the Verb, and are to be made by the same Case, as was said before.

5. If there be any Substantive following the Verb, that hath no respect to the Verb, then it is govern∣ed of some other Substantive, or Adjective, or other Word, coming betwixt the Verb and it; and such Case as the Substantive, or Adjective, or other Word governs, such Case is that Noun to be of.

This is to be observed also in all parts of the Sen∣tence, as well before, as after the Verb. For in all parts of the Sentence, the following word is go∣verned of that governing word that in the Natural Order of the Words goes next before it, in the same clause, or part of the Sentence; except it be a Relative, or Interrogative &c. which if they be not the Nominative Case, nor have a Preposition coming before them, are ever governed of some word co∣ming after them, what Case soever they be of.

The Natural Order of Words is that, according to which, The words are placed so, that words de∣pending on others for their Gender, Number, Case, Person, Mood, &c. are set after those whereon they depend (as hath been shewn) which is not obser∣ved, but much gone contrary unto in that order of words, which is called Artificial.

6. If any other Verb come after the Principal Verb, it is to be considered, whether there do any casual word expresly, or implicitly come betwixt the foregoing and following Verb; and if no casual word come betwixt, then the latter Verb is to be of the Infinitive Mood: as, I desire to learn.

But if any casual word, though but a Pronoun, come between the two Verbs, then though the lat∣ter Verb may be the Infinitive Mood, (which if it be, then the casual word foregoing is generally to be the Accusative case) as, I bid thee be gone, or I bid that thou be gone, Jubeo te abire; I am glad that you are in health, Gaudeo te valere; yet it may also be the Subjunctive Mood with ut, either expressed, or understood together with it; (but then the Ca∣sual word foregoing must be the Nominative case) as, I bid thee be gone, Jubeo ut tu abeas; See that you have a good heart, Fac habeas animam fortem; or with quòd (accordingly as the nature of the Verb

shall require) as, Quòd tu valeas gaudeo. See Treat. of Eng. Partic. ch. 75. r. 3, 4, 8.

And if the foregoing Verb do govern a Dative case, then the casual word coming before the latter Verb (if it be made by the Infinitive Mood) may in∣differently be put either in the Dative, as governed of the foregoing Verb; or in the Accusative by rea∣son of the Infinitve Mood following. So we may indifferently say, Non licet homini—or Non licet hominem esse, ut vult. See Treat. of Eng. Partic. c. 34. r. 21.

7. If there come more Verbs than one, after the Principal Verb, it is to be considered, whether the latter also of them, as well as the former, be gover∣ned of the Principal Verb, or of some former that goes before it self, yet comes after the Principal Verb.

If it be governed of the Principal Verb, then some copulative Conjunction expresly, or implicitly comes betwixt it and the Former Verb: and it is so to be made, as the former was, for Mood.

If it be not governed of the Principal Verb, then it is governed either of some foregoing Verb, or Noun Substantive, or Adjective, and is the Infinitive Mood, which may be varied by a Subjunctive Mood with a Conjunction, or Relative. See Treat. of Eng. Partic. c. 83. r. 11. n. 7.

Note. Verbs are governed of Substantives, and Adjectives, as well as of Verbs: as, Sed jam tempus est ad id, quod instituimus, accedere. Cic. Itáne eo paratus facere omnia? Ter.

And this is to be observed also in all parts of a Sentence or Period, and not only in the body, or latter end of it, or after the Principal Verb. Audax omnia perpeti Gens humana ruit per vetitum nefas. Hor. Sed si tantus amor casus cognoscere nostros, &c. Virg.

If there be any Relatives in the Sentence, then of [unspec X] every Relative is to be considered what it agrees with, and (if it be not the Nominative case) what it is governed of.

The Agreement of the Relative is with its Antece∣dent; that is a Substantive going before, which may again, without interruption or disturbance to the sense, be repeated together with the Relative: as, Wretched is that man which is in love with money; or wretched is that man, which [man] is in love with money. Here [man] goes before [which] and is, or may be repeated together with it.

To know what word is the Antecedent to the Relative, add the word [who, what, whose, or whom, &c.] to the Relative by way of question, and the word that, upon reading the Sentence over again, with good sense answers to that question, is that Substantive Antecedent, with which it agrees. As in this Example, The man is wise which speaketh few things; to know what is the Antecedent to the Relative [which], add the word [what] to the word [which] and then make a question with those two words, and the following Verb, saying, which what speaketh? The answer whereto will be visibly this (upon reading the Sentence over again) which man speaketh: so that [man] is the Antecedent to the Relative [which]. For upon every such question the Antecedent will be repeated in the answer to∣gether with the Relative.

If the word [that] be the Relative, turn it into [who] or [which] &c. and then it will be the easi∣lier found out, that is the Antecedent Substantive, wherewith it is to agree: as, Wretched is the man that [i. e. which] is in love with money.

Having sound what word is the Antecedent to the Rel••ti••e m••ke it agree with i•• in Gender, Num∣ber,

and Person, that is, set it down of the same Number and Gender, and suppose it to be of the same Person with its Antecedent: and let the Per∣son of the Relative appear by the Person of the Verb, to which the Relative is the Nominative case, in making the Verb, that hath the Relative for his No∣minative case, to be of that Person, which that Substantive is of, that the Relative refers unto, and agrees with. If the Relative be not the Nominative case, then the Person of it is not to be heeded. The Relative is the Nominative case to the Verb, when there comes no other Nominative case betwixt the Relative and the Verb.

If the Relative be not the Nominative case to the following Verb, nor have a Preposition coming with it, nor be together with his Substantive put abso∣lute, then it is governed generally of the Verb that follows it, though sometimes of other words; as may be seen in the Accidence Rules for the Case of the Relative.

The Relative that is governed of the Verb, must be such Case, as any other Substantive were to be of, if it followed the Verb.

If the Relative be not governed of the Verb; then, if it be a casual word, that the Relative is governed of, such Case as that word would govern after it, such Case must the Relative be of, that comes be∣fore it. And that casual word, of which the Rela∣tive is governed, must be such Case as the Verb will govern after him: as, Cujus numen adoro; Cui similem non vidi; Quorum optimum ego habeo. Unless there be some other word in the Sentence govern∣ing that word of which the Relative is governed: as, Quae nunc non est narrandi locus. Which word yet is to be such Case as the Verb governs after it.

To know what word the Relative is governed of

(whether it be the Verb, or other word that go∣verns it) the way is, to put a Demonstrative in the stead of it, and then read that clause in which it stands according to the Natural Order of the words: for then the word that governs the Demon∣strative that is put in instead of the Relative, will go before it: and that word that governs the De∣monstrative following it, is the word that governs the Relative going before it.

For Example. In English, in this Sentence, [you dispraise him, whom all men commend] if we take out the Relative [whom], and in the stead of it put in the Demonstrative [him], and then read that clause in which it stands, according to the Natural Order of the words, thus, All men commend him, it is plain that the Demonstrative [him] is governed of the Verb [commend]. And so by that it is known, that it is of that Verb, that the Relative [whom] is governed. Thus also in Latine, in this Sentence, Vir est, cui si∣milem non vidi, if instead of the Relative [cui], we do put in the Demonstrative [huic], and then read that clause into which it is put, in the Natural Or∣der of the words, thus—Non vidi similem huic, it is plain that [huic] is governed of the Adjective [simi∣lem] going next before it. And by that it appears, that of that Adjective [similem] is the Relative [cui] governed.

Yet further to bring Children by easie steps to the understanding of that great difficulty, which lyes in putting the Relative into its right Case, Gender, and Number, wherein most usually they fail, the Teacher may be pleased to take this course with them.

1. Give them Englishes wherein the Antecedent Substantive, to which the Relative refers, shall not only go before the Relative, but be also repeated

together with it: as, He had a knife, with which knife he would have slain himself.

2. Cause them in their daily Translations to en∣close within two square brackets [] the repeated Substantive, wherewith the Relative, as being a per∣fect Adjective, must agree in Case, Gender▪ and Number; after this form, Ferrum habuit quo [ferro] se occideret.

3. Cause them in the fair writing of their whole weeks Exercises to omit the repetition of the Ante∣cedent Substantive, yet in the construing thereof (as also of their daily Lectures) to express it, as if it were written. As if, for example, having written Ferrum habuit quo se occideret, they should in con∣struing express ferro with quo, saying, quo ferro, with which knife.

4. After they have been practised for some time in this kind of exercise, then give them Englishes to translate, where in the Antecedent Substantive shall only be expressed in the clause going before the Re∣lative, and not repeated together, with the Rela∣tive in the same clause where it is: as, He had a knife, with which he would have slain himself. Yet in the Translating them, cause them still to express the Substantive together with the Relative; Ferrum habuit quo [ferro] se occideret. This will haunt them, where-ever they meet with a Relative, even of course to seek out a Substantive for it, to express together with it. Of which repetition of the Sub∣stantive together with the Relative, there be abun∣dant examples in Classick Authors. Such is that of Cicero's, Cum viderem ex eâ parte homines, cujus par∣tis nos vel principes numer abamur, pro Quint. And that of Caesar's, Legem promulgaverat, quâ lege reg∣num Jubae publicaver at, 2. Bell. Civ. That of Teren∣tius, Habet bonorum exemplum, quo exemplo sibi licere

id facere, quod illi fecerunt, put at, Heaut. Prol. And that of Plautus, Est causa, quâ causâ simul mecum ire veritus est, Epid. 1. 1. Yet this Repetition, it will be the Masters discretion to order his Scholars to omit, as he shall see cause.

5. Teach them to fill up such Elliptical passages as have only that Case of the Substantive expressed, in which the Relative coming together with it, doth agree; that, wherein it might, or ought to differ from it, being omitted. Thus, Ʋrbem quam statuo vestra est, i. e. Ʋrbs vestra est, quam urbem statuo, or, Quam urbem statuo, vestra urbs est. So, Eunuchum, quem ded••sti nobis, quas turbas dedit? Quas dedit Eu∣nuchus turbas, quem nobis dedisti Eunuchum? or, Quas turbas dedit Eunuchus, quem Eunuchum dedisti nobis? So, Quis non malarum, quas amor curas habet, haec inter obliviscitur? i. e. Inter haec quis non obliviscitur curarum malarum, quas cur as amor habet? So, Ad Coe∣sarem quam misi epistolam, ejus exemplum fugit me tum tibi mittere. i. e. Fugit me tum tibi mittere ejus epistolae exemplum, quam ad Caesarem misi epistolam. So, Quos pueros cum Mario miserunt, epistolam mihi attulerunt hoc exemplo i. e. Pueri illi hoc exemplo mihi attulerunt epistolam, quos pueros cum Mario mi∣serunt.

6. Give them such Englishes for translation, as shall have in them man, or thing, (either expressed, or understood in the Pronoun put for them,) to be the Substantive wherewith the Relative must agree. As, Wretched is he [i. e. the man] that is in love with money, Miser est [homo] qui [homo] nummos admira∣tur. That [i. e. that thing] is good, which [i. e. which thing] all [things] desire. Bonum illud est, quod omnia appetunt.

Thus by easie steps will Children be brought, not only to understand how to render those Relative

Particles that, who, which, whose, whereof, whom, &c. in right Case, Gender, or Number (than the doing of which there is scarce any thing more hard to them) but also to overcome the greatest difficul∣ties, that lye in the Regiment of the Relative. And now I return to go on with those Directions for Plain Latine making which yet remain.

If the Speech be Negative, then observe to set the [unspec XI] Negative Particles before the Verb.

The Negative Particle usually comes betwixt the Verb and the Sign of the Verb, if any Sign of the Verb be expressed. As, I do not perceive, what your intent is. But if no Sign of the Verb be expres∣sed, then it comes after the Verb: as, I perceive not, what your intent is, Ego, quid agas, nihil intel∣ligo.

Interrogative Speeches have the same Observations [unspec XII] mostly that are in Assertive Speeches. The Interro∣gative Pronominal Particles being Nominative cases to Verbs, and being governed of a Preposition be∣fore them, or else of a Verb, or some other word coming after them. As, Quis enim er at, qui non sciret? Quid hoc impudentius dici, aut fingi potest? Quae civitati facta est injuria? Quantos fluctus exci∣tari concionum videtis? Cui quaeso tandem probasti? Cui novae calamit ati locus ullus relictus esset?

In Admirative or Exclamative Speeches, Casual [unspec XIII] words are put into divers Cases, without any Verb expressed to govern them in such Case by virtue of the Particle of Admiring, or Exclaiming, accordingly as use hath subjoyned such and such Cases unto such and such Particles.

Of the Ablative absolute.

When a Substantive comes together with a Parti∣ciple [unspec XIV] (expressed or understood) in the same clause,

and neither is the Nominative case to any following Verb, nor hath before it any other word of which it is governed, then it is put Absolute, and so is to be made by the Ablative Case. As, The King coming, the enemies fled; Rege veniente hostes fugerunt.

Note. If any other Nominative Case, though but of a Pronoun, come between the Substantive that hath the Participle joyned to it, and the Verb, then that Substantive is not the Nominative case to the Verb. But if no Nominative case come betwixt, then it is (not put absolute, but) the Nominative case to the Verb. As, The King coming made the enemies flye; Rex veniens hostes fugavit.

In speaking of this Ablative Case I follow the re∣ceived way; not being ignorant what is thought by Learned Persons of that Construction, namely that it is governed of some Preposition understood, viz. à, ab, sub, cum, or in. See Treat. of Eng. Particles c. 20. r. 1. n. 3.

Well now, when the Learner is able, what by his own study, and what by these Directions, and what by his Teachers further Instruction, where it is needful, to read the English into Latine vivâ voce, then let him go, and write it down in a loose Paper, and bring it to his Teacher, to consider of his man∣ner of writing, and pointing it; who is accordingly to inform him of what he knows not, and rectifie him in what he sees amiss.

That being done, let the Master cast the words out of the Natural into the Artificial Order, and mend the Phrase, if need be, and then cause the Scholar to transcribe the exercise so done into his fair book, and after that get it to construe, and parse, and say by heart.

As in Translating it out of English into Latine he observed the Natural Order of the words, so in con∣struing

(as it is called) out of Latine into English, let him exactly, as far as the Idiom of the Langua∣ges will permit, observe the Natural Order of the words.

Of the Natural Order of Latine words there be precepts to be found in Vossius's Latine Grammar at the end of the Syntaxis; also in Brinsly's Gram. School. ch. 8. in Mr. Clarks Dux Grammaticus p. 259. and in the end of Phrases Wintonienses, which I for∣bear to transcribe.

Let the Scholars parsing be performed all by himself alone, taking the words in the Natural Or∣der, * 1.58 and going of himself (without being asked any thing by his Teacher, save where he omits any thing necessary) from word to word, till he have gone over the whole; declining Nouns and Verbs, and giving Rules for the Genders of the one, and Pre∣terperfect Tense and Supines of the other: and so of the other parts of Speech let him say, what is fit to be said. But especially let him give account of the Syntax of every word; why this Substantive is of the Nominative case; that of the Genitive; the other the Dative, Accusative, or Ablative. Why this Adjective is of this, that, or the other Case, Gender, Number; why this Relative is of this, or that Number, or Person; and why of this, or the other Case, and what governs it; and why this Verb is of this Mood, Number, Person, &c. maintaining and justifying every thing by Grammar Rule, or Example from Classick Authors.

And here by the way let me take occasion to ad∣vise, that the same course be observed in his Au∣thors, that he learns, construing his Lectures there∣in, in the Natural Order, and parsing them all by himself alone in that order. It is scarce imaginable how much more beneficial this way of parsing

alone is, beyond the other more usual way of asking questions skippingly, here a word, and there a word, according to the Masters fancy, list, or lei∣sure. And if there be more than one together, one may take one piece, and another another piece by courses, till all be done. If one by agreement do ger one piece, and another another, it will not be much amiss to wink at it for a while, till they be a little perfect at it; that plot is quickly broke, by putting them but once or twice out of their road.

Lastly, To return, on the Repetition-day, let the Scholar say all his weeks work by heart, and both read it out of English into Latine, and out of Latine into English: and where the Teacher thinks need∣ful, let him ask him a Rule for, or a Reason of the Construction, or the like.

English Examples framed according to the Rules of the Three Latine Concords.

THE FIRST CONCORD. Concordantia Nominativi & Verbi.

¶ Verbum Personale cohaeret cum Nominati∣vo numero & personâ: ut, Nunquam sera est ad bonos mores via.

Fortuna nunquam perpetu•• est bona.

* A Verb Personal a greeth with his Nomi∣native case in Number and Person: as, Praece∣ptor legit, vos verò negli∣gitis, The Master readeth and ye regard not.

* And the Nomina∣tive shall in making and construing Latine, be set before the Verb.

† Examples, where Personal Pronouns are

only Nominative Cases.

Indicat. Mood Present Tense Active with a Sign.

I do fear, thou dost laugh, he doth strike, we do cry, ye do call, they do answer.

Without a Sign.

I love, thou teachest, he readeth, we hear, ye learn, they play.

Indic. Pres. Pass.

I am loved, thou art taught, he is read, we are called, ye are stricken, they are frighted.

I am bought, thou art sold, he is beaten, we be blamed, ye be wounded, they be healed.

Preterimperfect Tense Active.

I did lose, thou didst seek, he did find, we did sit, ye did stand, they did walk.

I mourned, thou wept∣est, he laugh'd, we sung, ye leap't, they danced.

Passive.

I was named, thou wast called, he was reproved, we were warned, ye were scourged, they were killed.

I was girded, thou wert armed, he was cut, we were hurt, ye were lead, they were drawn.

Preterperf. Active.

I have fought, thou hast overcome, he hath washed, we have wiped, ye have scratched, they have bit∣ten.

I have mown, thou hast reaped, she hath scattered, we have gathered, ye have laid up, they have carried out.

Passive.

I have been carried, thou hast been bound, he hath been blamed, we have been praised, ye have been heal∣ed, they have been saved.

I have been honoured, thou hast been crowned, she hath been decked, we have been painted, ye have been nursed, they have b••en clothed.

Preterpluperf. Active.

I had tryed, thou hadst consented, he had said, we had believed, ye had held, they had escaped.

I had written, thou hadst

received, she had read, we had recalled, ye had replied, they had granted.

Passive.

I had been seen, thou hadst been heard, he bad been accused, we had been condemned, ye had been saved, they had been kil∣led.

I had been baptized, thou hadst been confirmed, she had been instructed, we had been corrected, ye had been admonished, they had been commended.

Future Tense Active.

I will ask thou wilt answer, he will have, we will hold, ye will command, they will obey.

I shall touch, thou shalt perceive, she shall crave, we shall give, ye shall feign, they shall frame.

Passive.

I will be sought, thou wilt be found, he will be taken, we will be freed ye will be detained, they will be dismissed.

I shall be cased, thou shalt be burdened, she shall be received, we shall be re∣jected, ye shall be commend∣ed, they shall be lamented.

* Except a question be asked, and then the No∣minative is set after the Verb—

Love I? teachest thou? readeth he? hear we? learn ye? play they?

Feared I? laughest thou? striketh he? Cry we? cal∣led ye? answered they?

* Or after the Sign of the Verb, as,

Amas tu? Lovest thou? Venitne Rex? Doth the King come?

Do I play? dost thou learn? doth he profit? Do we see? do ye hear? do they feel?

Did I lose? didst thou seek? did he find? did we sit? did ye stand? did they walk?

Have I fought? hast thou overcome? hath he read? have we heard? have ye sung? have they danced?

Had I tryed? hadst thou consented? had he said? had we believed? had ye

stayed? had they depart∣ed?

Shall I ask? wilt thou answer? will he have? shall we hold? shall ye command? will they o∣bey?

Am I loved? art thou feared? is he called? are we heard? Be ye stricken? be they frighted?

Was I touched? wer't thou named? was he war∣ned? were we blamed? were ye scourged? were they killed?

Have I been honoured? hast thou been fed? hath she been nursed? have we been decked? have ye been clothed? have they been spoiled?

Had I been heard? hadst thou been seen? had she been condemned? had we been saved? had ye been killed? had they been bu∣ried?

Shall I be touched? wilt thou be perceived? shall he be sought? shall we be found? will ye be lead? will they be drawn?

* Likewise if the Verb b of the Imperative Mood; as, Amaro ille, Let him love.

Write thou, fight he, eat ye, drink they, sing thou, dance he, write ye, read they, do thou go, let him stay, run we, do ye sit, let them stand.

Laugh thou, shout he, let us sleep, walk ye, let them ride.

Passive.

Be thou ruled, let him be broken, be w•• held, be ye bound, let them be scour∣ged.

Be thou loved, be he feared, let us be tamed, be ye enriched, be they advan∣ced.

* And sometime when this Sign it, or there co∣meth before the English of the Verb; as, Est liber meus, It is my book; Venit ad me quidam, There came one to me.

It is a horse; there was a mare; it is night; it was day. There blows wind; there falls rain; there comes a man; there went a woman. It is I: it was thou. It had been he; it may be we; it

might be ye, it shall be they.

† Yet it is not neces∣sary, that in all these Ca∣ses the Nominative be al∣ways set after the Verb: for tu eras? may as well be said, as Eras tu? Li∣ber est; as, Est liber.

Potential Mood Present Tense.

I may command, thou mayst intreat, he may weep, we may laugh, ye may fight, they may over∣come.

I may be touched, thou mayst be tickled, he may be burned, we may be bu∣ried, ye may be covered, they may be concealed.

Preterimperfect Tense.

I might say, wouldst thou believe? should he read? we ought to learn. Could ye see? they should think. Should I be commended? thou wouldst be dispraised. Ought he to be despised? we should be blamed. Ye would be condemned, ought they to be punished?

Preterperfect Tense.

I might have thought, thou wouldst have belie∣ved, he should have said, we ought to have under∣stood, ye should have per∣ceived, they would have pronounced.

I should have been affli∣cted, thou wouldst have been bewailed, he ought to have been vexed, we should have been freed, ye would have been oppressed, they ought to have been warned.

Preterpluperfect Tense.

I had felt, thou hadst feared, he had needed, we had believed, ye had come, they had gone.

I had been compared, thou hadst been preferred, he had been refused, we had been chosen, ye had been accepted, they had been rejected.

Future Tense.

I shall have eaten, you will have drunk, he will have spoken, we shall have sinned, ye will have

sorrowed, they shall have repented.

I shall have been said, thou shalt have been seen, he shall have been fed, we shall have been filled, ye shall have been honoured, they shall have been fear∣ed.

† Examples where Nouns are the Nomina∣tive Cases; and first Nouns Substantives Pro∣per.

Peter sleepeth, Paul prayeth, Joseph ariseth, Mary runneth, Thomas doubteth, John believeth.

Elizabeth rejoyced, Ly∣dia did hearken. Caesar fought, Pompey fled.

Cicero hath intreated, Cato had resisted, Anto∣ny shall drink, Ovid will write.

The Horaces kill. The Curiaces are killed. The Decius's died. The Fabi∣us's were slain. The Ro∣mans have conquered. The Parthians have been van∣quished.

The Persians will flye. The Macedonians shall pursue. The Arabians shall be affrighted. The Aegy∣ptians will be destroyed.

Doth George speak? Did Thomas hear? Hath Edward taught? Had Richard learned? Will Robert profit?

Weeps Cleopatra? Sighs Helena? Do the Trojans mourn? Did the Grecians sing? Have the Atheni∣ans fought? Had the La∣cedemonians fled? Will the Gauls be beaten? Shall the Spaniards be quieted?

Would the Hunns have been drowned? Might the Scythians have been ta∣med? Could the Cartha∣ginians have been destroy∣ed? Should the Italians have been enriched? Ought the Brittons to have been robbed?

Secondly Nouns Sub∣stantives Common.

And first without any Particle annexed.

Fire burneth, wood is burned, night hideth, day discloseth, winter wasteth, spring draweth on, summer

approacheth, harvest is ended.

Wine is drunk, bread is baked, meat is eaten, flesh is roasted, corn is sown, hay is mown.

Doth gold glister? Did silver ting? hath brass ru∣sted? will glass break? Is Iron heated? was lead melted? hath copper been beaten? had tin been run? shall pewter be scoured? Milk is curded, cream is strained, butter is churned, cheese is pressed, curds are sweetned, cheese-cakes are baked, trees grow, flow∣ers smell, leaves shoot, ap∣ples ripen, pears hang, plums fall, berries rot.

Bought are shaken, cher∣ries are picked, walnuts are dashed, small nuts are gathered, shells are crack∣ed, kernels are eaten.

Swans sung, cocks crow∣ed, hens cackled, chickens cheaped, pies chattered.

Men fought, women scolded, boys wrastled, girls scratched, children cryed, servants laughed.

Let Knaves be cudgel∣led, let Rogues be scourged, let beggars be whipped, let drunkards be fined, let thieves be hanged, let rebels be beheaded. Should scolds be ducked? would whores be shamed? ought whore masters to be geld∣ed? could adulterers be branded?

Travellers will talk, Souldiers will brag, Law∣yers will wrangle, Mer∣chants shal complain, Scho∣lars will dispute, fools will prate.

Have eyes seen? have ears heard? have noses smelt? have tongues tast∣ed? have hands felt?

Hath musick pleased? had learning flourished? will honour be sought? shall vertue be honoured? will vice be punished?

Arts are learned, igno∣rance is banished, servants are beaten, slaves are sold, much is spoken, little is minded, nothing is done, all is lost.

Secondly with the Parti∣cle [a] annexed.

A dog barketh, a thief trembleth, a lion roared, a hare started, a partridg

flew, a hawk pursued, a sword hath cut, a spear hath pierced, a mouse had slept, a cat had watched, a bird will flie, a fish will swim.

Is a pen made? was a book written? hath a pen∣knife been whetted? had a line been drawn? will a blot be wiped out? shall a whetstone be rubbed? may a sponge be squeezed?

Thirdly with the Particle [the] annexed.

The Father doth sing, the mother laugheth, the child playeth.

The young man leaped, the old man danced.

The Lamb doth frisk, the Ew did bleat, the Bull hath lowed, the Ox had laboured, the Sow shall farrow, the Pig will squeak.

The Hog is fatted, the Heifer was killed, the Deer hath been hunted, the Horn had been winded, the huntsman will be wea∣ried, the hunting shall be ended.

Is the King crowned? were the Rebels vanquish∣ed? have the Souldiers been honoured? had the Rebels been subdued? will the Citizens be oppressed? shall the Country men be burdened?

Let the Fathers com∣mand, let the Children obey, let the Commanders direct, let the Souldiers fight.

The Husbands may la∣bour, the Wives should care, the Servants should work, the Children could play.

The Swall ws may have come, the Woodcocks might have staid, the Cranes shall have departed.

Examples where a Noun and a Pronoun come together, which is called in Grammar Evocatio.

¶ Cum prima vel se∣cunda persona immedia∣tè ad se evocat tertiam, ambae fiunt primae, vel se∣cundae personae: ut, Ego pauper laboro, Tu dives ludis.

I John see. Thou Peter talkest We Edwards run.

Ye Richards stand.

I a Father speak. Dost thou a Child hear? We Shouldiers fight. Do ye Ci∣tizens flie?

I the Man will go. Do thou the Woman stay. We the poor labour. Ye the rich laugh.

We Apples swim. Ye Stones do sink Let us Cocks crow. Do ye Hens cackle. We loaves be cut. Ye Eggs be broken.

We Old men do talk. Ye Young men do work Do we young men work? Do ye young men work?

I Sun do shine: Thou Moon didst blush: We Stars sang: Ye Heavens did rejoyce.

I a Master have taught. Have ye Scholars regard∣ed?

† Note that the Verb must always be of that Number and Person that the Pronoun (whether it be expressed, or un∣derstood) is of.

Ego tuae deliciae isthuc veniam. Magna pars stu∣diosorum amoenitates quae∣rimus. sub. nos.

Aeneas adsum. sub. ego.

Populus superamur ab uno. sub. nos.

¶ Nominativus primae vel secundae Personae ra∣rissimè exprimitur, nisi Causâ Discretionis; ut, Vos damnâstis, quasi dicat, praeterea nemo: aut Em∣phasis gratiâ: ut, Tues patronus, tu pater, si dese∣ris tu perimus; quasi di∣cat praecipuè, & prae aliis tu patronus es. Ovid. Tu dominus, tu vir, tu mihi frater eris.

I shouted, thou whispe∣redst, we walked, ye ran, I intreated, thou com∣mandest, we were praised, ye were discommended, I gave, thou did receive, we came, ye went.

I shall be scourged, thou wilt be hanged, we shall be enriched, ye will be spoiled.

I will be a friend, I will be a Father, I will be a Husband.

Thou savest, thou defen∣dest, thou feedest, thou clothest.

We went, we sought, we found; ye were mocked, ye were scourged, ye were tormented.

¶ In verbis quorum significatio ad homines tantùm pertinet, tertiae Personae Nominativus sae∣pe subauditur: ut est, fertur, dicunt, ferunt, ai∣unt, praedicant, clamitant, & in similibus; ut,

Ter. Fertur atrocia sla∣gitia designâsse.

Ovid. Teque ferunt irae poenituisse tuae.

How this should be i∣mitated in English I see not; and so pass it over.

* And that casual word that cometh next after the Verb, and answereth to the question whom, or what, made by the Verb, shall commonly be the Accusative Case; as, Amo magistrum, I love the master.

Ʋse makes perfect. I know him well. Truth gets hatred. Love covers offen∣ces. Honour nourisheth arts. Vertue deserves praise.

Dost thou hear me? will I leave thee? shall he teach me?

Fear thou God, honour ye the King.

* Except the Verb do properly govern another Case after him to be con∣strued withal; as, Si cu∣pis placere magistro, utere diligentiâ, nec sis tantus cessator ut calcaribus indi∣geas, If thou covet to please thy master, use diligence, and be not so slack, that thou shalt need spurs.

Nominative.

Love is a Loadstone. Fire is hot. I am called John. I am thought rich. I lie dreaming. He runneth eating. Thou drinkest stan∣ding.

Genitive.

He is accused of theft. He is acquitted of bribery. He is condemned of cove∣tousness. Pity thy Father. Have compassion on thy Mother. Forget not thy Brother.

Dative:

Succour me. Profit thy self. Disprofit none. Please

God. Obey the King; re∣sist sin. Tell me quickly. Answer him readily. Give to the poor. Lend to the rich.

Ablative.

Use exercise. Enjoy com∣fort. I want money; and yet I have discharged my duty. Rely on vertue, but brag not of victory Change flesh for bread, but eat bread sparingly. Be glad of a little.

¶ Non semper vox ca∣sualis est Verbo Nomina∣tivus, sed aliquando Ver∣bum infinitum: ut Plaut. Mentiri non est meum.

To fight is manly, to cry is childish, to flie is cow∣ardly.

To lie is base, to steal is dangerous, to rob is deadly, to counter feit is common.

To delay breeds danger to make haste is safe.

¶ Aliquando oratio, ut Ovid.

Adde quòd ingenuas di dicisse fideliter artes

Emollit mores, Nec finit esse feros.

To love his Parents is the duty of a child.

To honour the King is the duty of Subjects.

To fear God is the pro∣perty of Christians.

To do well and be ill spoken of, is the part of Kings.

To laugh much, bewrays folly.

To speak much, brings sin.

To grow rich makes proud.

To live a good life, gives hope of dying a happy death.

To love idleness brings to disgrace

To delight in riot, tends to beggery.

To strive with a mighty man, is folly in a mean man.

For a wife to be chast, is a vertue.

For a husband to be kind, is a praise.

For a Prince to be hum∣ble, is an honour.

For a Subject to be proud, is a shame.

Columbus's discovering America, rendred him fa∣mous.

Alexander's conquering

Darius, won him glory.

Caesar's beating Pom∣pey procured him an Em∣pire.

That he took Carthage, got Scipio honour.

That he forgave his ene∣mies, turned to Caesar's glory.

That he fought against his Country, proved Cati∣line's ruine.

His killing Hector, made Achilles dreadful.

Her relieving the Tro∣jans, won Dido praise.

Their being at odds a∣mongst themselves was the cause of the Grecians over∣throw.

¶ Aliquando Adver∣bium cum Genitivo: ut, Partim virorum cecide∣runt in bello. Partim sig∣norum sunt combusta.

† This cannot be ex∣emplified in English. But an Adverb being a No∣minative to a Verb with∣out a Genitive Case may be exemplified.

That to morrow when comes it?

I wish that before had been afterward.

That now will never be.

That hey brave quite undid him

† Examples of Con∣struction where many Nominative Cases come before a Verb, which is called in Latine Syllepsis.

¶ Syllepsis seu con∣ceptio, est comprehensio indignioris sub digniore.

Copulatum per Con∣junctionem, Et, nec, ne∣que, & Cum pro Et acce∣ptum, est pluralis nume∣ri; ac proinde Verbum exigit plurale; quod qui∣dem Verbum personâ cum digniore supposito quadrabit: ut, Quid tu & soror facitis? Ego & mater perimus. Tu & uxor testes estote.

* Many Nominative Cases Singular with a Conjunction Copulative coming between them, will have a Verb plural, which Verb plural shall agree with the Nomina∣tive Case of the most worthy person; as, Ego & tu sumus in tuto, I and thou be in safeguard Tu & pater periclitamini,

Thou and thy father are in jeopardy. Pater & praeceptor accersunt te, Thy father and thy master have sent for thee.

¶ Dignior autem est persona prima quàm se∣cunda; & dignior secun∣da quàm tertia.

* Where note, that the first person is more worthy than the second, and the second more worthy than the third; as, Ego & mater sumus in tuto. Tu atque frater est is in periculo. Neque ego, neque tu sapimus.

English Examples where the Nominative Cases are of the same Per∣son.

Com•• hither to me, thou and thou.

The Father and the Son walk together.

The Mother and the Daughter talk tog••ther.

Love and Majesty dw••ll not together.

A Wife and a Where shall be together in one house.

The King and Queen wish him to their Son in∣law.

Strength and Beauty are much desired by every one.

The wind and the rain fight one with another.

The Hare and the Dog run apace.

War, and Famine, and Pestilence, do ruinate Countries.

Righteousness, and Peace, and Truth, do make Kingdoms happy.

Examples where one Nominative Case is of the first person, and another of the second. I and thou will go home together.

Thou and I will seek him out.

Let thee and me love out Father.

Thou and I shall be safe what ever come of it.

Neither thou, nor I, have either luck or money.

Both thou, and I, must give an account of our selves unto God.

No•• thou, nor I, did any such thing.

Examples where one No∣minative Case is of the first person, and ano∣ther of th•• third.

I and my Son are in health.

My Mother and I, per∣swaded my Father.

I and my man, kept the house.

My Father and I, dr••ve the Sheep.

I and my house, will serve the Lord.

My Brother and I, go to the same School.

He and I, are disputing here.

Examples where one Nominative Case, is of the second person, and another of the third.

Thou and thy Mother miss thy Father.

Thy Brother and thou are idle Boys.

Art thou and Mary well?

Thy Boy and thou will get great booties.

Come thou and thy wife to my house.

Thy man and thou do plough in one field.

Thou and thy Master do ride in the same Coach to∣geth••r.

Thy Dog and thou, lie in the same bed.

† Yea, though to Con∣junction Copulative be expressed between the foregoing Nommative Cases, yet may the Verb be plural: as, Ter. Dum ••tas, me••••••, magister pro∣hibebant.

Wealth, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, power, bewitch many men

Vertue, ••••••dness, ••h••ri∣ty, are much d••spised in these days.

Beauty, hea••th strength are wished for by ••••st men.

Folly, sin, wi••k••••ness, are committed by all men.

† Yet this making the Verb to be plural when many Nominative Cases singular go before the Verb, is not always ob∣served in Authors, who sometimes set a Verb sin∣gular with divers Nomi∣native Cases going be∣fore or after it, which Verb agrees in person with that Nominative Case that stands next it, whether before or after it, that is, in the same

Comma with it. And this Construction is that which the Latines call Zeugma.

¶ Zeugma est unius verbi viciniori respon∣dentis, ad diversa suppo∣sita reductio; ad unum quidem expressè; ad al∣terum verò per supple∣mentum; ut, Cic. Nihil te nocturnum praesidium palatii, nihil urbis vigi∣liae, nihil timor populi ni∣hil concursus bonorum om∣nium, nihil hic minutissi∣mus habendi Senatus locus, nihil horum ora vultusque moverunt.

Mens & ratio & con∣silium in senibus est. Cic. Ego & Cicero meus fla∣gitabat. Cic. Mihi & res & conditio p••acet. Cic. Egit pater & filius ut tibi spo••derem. Ego, & tu studes. Ego dormio, & tu. Do••mio ego, & tu. Siudes tu, & ego. Quid ego, & populus desideret, audi. Hor. Persuasit nox, amor, vinum Ter. Et eôdem accedit servitus, sudor, sitis. Plaut. me••••, 4 1.

† If it so fall out, that the Nominative Case that stands next the Verb is plural, then the Verb shall be plural: as in the example of Zeug∣ma above: as it shall be singular, if the Nomina∣tive, that stands next it, be of the Singular Num∣ber, as in that of Virg. Aen. 1. v. 403, 404. Hand aliter puppesque tuae pubes∣que tuorum aut portum te∣net, aut pleno subit ostia velo.

This kind of Constru∣ction seems to be no∣thing but an Ellipsis, or a not expressing of a Verb so many times un∣derstood as there are Nominative Cases ex∣pressed. As in the a∣bove named example, with prasidium is to be understood movit; with vigiliae m••verunt; with timor, movit; with con∣cursuo, movit; with locus, movit; with ora, move∣runt; and with vultus, moverunt So in Ego & tu studes, with ego is under∣stood studeo, and in Dor∣mio ego, & tu: with

Tu is understood dormis, &c.

† Sometimes when a Nominative Case hath a∣nother casual word of the Ablative Case cou∣pled to it by the Prepo∣sition cum in Latine, the following Verb is of the Plural Number, as if it had two Nominative Ca∣ses, with a Conjunction Copulative, between them, going before it: as, Virg. Rhemus cum fra∣tre Quirino Jura dabant. Ego cum fratr. sumus can∣didi. Littora cum plausu clamor superasque deorum Implevere domos. Ovid.

This Construction is mostly Poetical: but it may be exemplified in English.

The needle with the thred are lost.

A Sword with a belt become a Souldier.

A Cow with a Calf went to the Market.

The man with his wife came to my House.

The Ew with her Lamb play together.

The father with his son were beheaded on the same day.

† But this is not per∣petual neither: for where a Nominative Case hath had ano••her word cou∣pled to it with cum, yet the Verb hath been of the Singular Number: as, Tu, quid ego & populus mecum desi eret, audi. Hor. Occisus est cum liberis M. Fulvius Consularis. Cic. 1. Cat. Quod miraretur cum Cocl••te Mucius. Juv. Sat. 8. v. 264.

† Sometimes divers Nominative Cases come together without a Con∣junction Copulative ei∣ther expressed or under∣stood betwixt them, as belonging both, (or all, if they be more than two) to the same thing; and then, if the Nomina∣tive Cases be all of the Singular Number, the Verb shall be of the Sin∣gular Number also: as, Herodotus homo fabulator scripsit—A. Gell. lib. 3. cap. 10.

† This kind of Con∣struction is called by Mo∣dern Grammarians Appo∣sition. And the Substan∣tives so put together,

sometimes are of divers Numbers; as, Urbs Athe∣nae; Turba luxuriosaproci.

† In this Construction, if the name of a man, or any living creature be the first Substantive in the Grammatical order of the words, and the other be the name of some lifeless thing, then the Verb is to agree with the first No∣minative Case; as, Tul∣liola deliciae nestrae tuum munusculum flagitat. Cic. Deliciae verò tuae noster Aesopus ejusmodi fuit, ut—i. e. Aesopus deli∣ciae tuae. Cic. In me turba ruunt luxuriosa proci, i. e. proci luxuriosa turba ru∣runt. Ovid.

† But if the former Nominative Case be the name of a thing without life, then will the Verb agree with that Nomina¦tive Case, which comes after in the Grammatical order: as, Tu••gri Civi∣tas Gall••ae fontem habet insi••nem. Plin. Oppidum Latinorum Apiolae [i. e Apio••ae oppidum Latino∣rum] captum à Tarquinio rege. Id.

† In this kind of Con∣struction between the Substantives so put toge∣ther, there is understood the Participle ens, or a Relative with a Verb Sub∣stantive: Herodotus ens, or qui est homo fabulator; Proci••entes, or existentes, or qui sunt turba luxuriosa.

Cicero a man of great eloquence made Orations against Antonius.

Alexander King of Ma∣cedonia subdued the East∣ern Countries of the World.

Bucephalus the Horse of King Alexander, would suffer no rider but his Ma∣ster.

The Five Churches a Town in Hungary, was taken by the Turks the same year.

The City Hundred-hills is one of the chief Towns in Transylvania.

The Three Taverns, a Town in Italy, is thirty three miles off from Rome.

¶ Verba Infiniti Mo∣di pro Nominativo Accu∣sativum ante se statuunt; ut. Te rediisse incolumem g••u••eo. Te fabul m••gere volo.

† When a Casual word comes between two Verbs whereof the latter is the Infinitive Mood, the Casual word is to be made by the Accusative Case; as in Example.

I bid thee go. I pray thee come. I intreated him to stay. I desired them to re∣member. I will cause you to he whipped. He forced us to run. You make me to be exceeding angry. They know me to be an honest man. I know them to be very knaves. They report the Romans to have gotten the upper hand. I know my Son to be in love.

† But if the foregoing Verb be such a Verb as governs a Dative Case, then may that word which comes betwixt the two Verbs, be either the Dative Case as gover∣ned of the foregoing Verb, or the Accusative as governed of the fol∣lowing Infinitive Mood; as, Licitum est tibi ex hac juventute generum delige∣re. Cic. Domino non licet ire tuo. Ovid. Non licet hominem esse saepe ita ut vult. Ter. Neque servitio me exire licebat. Virg. See the Treatise of English Particles c. 34. r. 21. n. 1.

¶ Resolvi potest hic modus per quòd & ut, ad hunc modum: Quòd tu rediisti incolumis gaudeo. Ut tu fabulam agas volo.

† The Infinitive Mood with his Accusative Case before it may be expres∣sed by a Finite Mood with a Nominative Case before that, and quòd or ut with it, accordingly as the Construction re∣quires: as,

I bid that thou be gone. I pray that thou wouldst come. I intreated that he would stay. I desired that they would remember. I will cause that you be whip∣ped. He forced that we ran. You do cause that I am ex∣ceeding angry. They know that I am an honest man. I know that they are very knaves. They report that the Romans have got the upper hand. I know that my Son is in love.

When the Variation is to be made by quòd, and when by ut: See the

Treatise of English Par∣ticles c. 75 r 3, 4. 8.

¶ Verbum inter duos Nominativos diversorum numerorum positum cum alterutro convenire po¦test: ut, Ter. Ama tium irae amo••is re••integratio est. Ovid. Quid enim nisi vota supersu••t? ••d. Pecto∣ra percussit, pectus quoque robora fiunt. Virg—Ni∣hil hic nisi carmina desunt.

* When a Verb com∣eth between two Nomi∣native Cases of divers Numbers, the Verb may indifferently accord with either of them, so that they be both of one per∣son: as, Amantium irae, &c.

† There is a twofold order of words, the one Natural or Grammatical, the other Artificial or Oratorial.

Of the Natural order this may be an Exam∣ple; Nuptiae sunt res ho∣nesta.

Of the Artificial order this may be an Example; Honesta res nuptiae sunt.

† A Verb placed be∣tween two Nominative Cases set according to Natural Order most usu∣ally agrees with the For∣mer: as, Nuptiae sunt res honesta.

† But a Verb placed between two Nominative Cases set according to Artificial Order more usually agrees with the latter: as, Sanguis erant lachry nae.

† Yet somtimes when the words are set in the Natural Order, the Verb agrees with the latter: as, Pecunia, imperiique libido, sunt quasi materia omnium malorum. Sall.

† This I set down be∣cause I see it alledged as an instance of this Con∣struction: but to me, two Nominatives Singular seem equal to one Plural, and so the Verb may be said to agree even here with the former.

¶ Sometimes when the words are set in the Arti∣ficial Order, the Verb agrees with the former: as, Divitiae sunt lege na∣turae composita paupertas.

† If both the Nomina∣tive Cases be placed be∣fore

the Verb, then the Verb more usually agrees with the latter: as, A∣mantium irae amoris redin∣tegratio est. Pectus robora fiunt. Omnia pontus erat.

† Yet when they are so set, sometimes the Verb is made to agree with the former: as, Captivi praeda militum fuerunt. Ossa lapis fiunt. Gaudia principium nostri sunt Phoce doloris.

† If both the Nomina∣tive Cases be set after the Verb, then the Verb usual∣ly agrees with that which stands next it. Cic. in Pi∣son. Aude nunc O furia, de tuo dicere, cujus fuit initium ludi compitales.

* Those Examples, Quid enim, nisi vota super∣sunt? Quid nisi secretae laeserunt Phyllidia Sylvae? Nihil hic nisi carmina de∣sunt, &c. seem not to me to be proper exam∣ples to be alledged in this matter, though usu∣ally they be so. Because the Rule proceeds of one Verb between two No∣minative Cases; and in them there are belong∣ing to each Nominative Case his particular Verb, whereof one indeed by an Ellipsis is understood only, and the other ex∣pressed: as, Quid enim superest, nisi vota super∣sunt. Quid enim laesit Phyl∣lida, nisi secretae Sylvae lae∣serunt? Nihil hic deest, nisi carmina desunt. But he that will think other∣wise shall not have me to contend with him about it.

This kind of Constru∣ction is hardly imitable in English, in which in the Natural Order the Verb usually, if not al∣ways, agrees with the foregoing Nominative Case.

† But in the Order Artificial we may make some exemplification of it: as, The cause of woes are wars.

Blood were her tears.

The Souldiers booty are the Captives.

¶ Impersonalia praece∣dentem Nominativum non habent: ut, Taedet me vitae. Pertaesum est conju∣gii.

† That is, when Verbs are put impersonally, there is no Nominative Case expressed where∣with they agree. But yet there is one understood, which is not easic for eve∣ry one to conceive of: As, when it is said, Taedet me vitae. Pertaesum est con∣jugii. Yet this may be supplied thus: Vitae tae∣dium tae••et me. Taedium conjugii pertaesum est à me.

The not understand∣ing what Nominative Case to put to these Verbs, made them call them Impersonals: though there be no such Verbs as Impersonals, unless in the Infinitive Mood, where all are Impersonals. But this by the by.

† As to the translating of those Englishes for which the Verbs accoun∣ted such are the Latines, these Directions may be taken notice of.

† If the English of a Verb Impersonal have nothing but the ordinary sign of its Impersonality [it] or [there] before it, then no further care need be taken, but to translate according to rule that which follows it, and as it follows: as, It irks me of life, Taedet me vitae. There began to be no agreement, Coeperat non convenire. It behoves me to depart. It concerns me to speak. There can be no pleasant living there.

† If the English of a Verb Impersonal have a Casual word before it, it is to be considered, what Case the Latine Imperso∣nal governs after it, and into that Case is the Ca∣sual word that comes be∣fore it to be put: as, I must write, Me oportet scribere. Thou mayst read, Tibi licet legere. They ought to be thankful.

Travellers (they say) may lye by authority.

When Kings command, Subjects must obey.

Scholars ought to remem∣ber and requite their Tea∣chers.

But for the translating of Must or Ought, see the Treatise of English Parti∣cles, ch. 55. & 68.

¶ Nomen multitudinis singulare quandoque ver∣bo plurali jungitur; ut, Pars abiêre.

† A Noun of multi∣tude is such a word, as in the Singular Number sig∣nifies many things colle∣cted into one; as a heap, &c. Whence it is also called a Noun Collective.

To such Nouns, though of the Singular Number, Authors have sometimes joyned a Verb Plural; as, Pars abiêre.

† And sometimes a Verb Singular: as, Pars stupet. Virg.

† In the Singular Verb they had respect unto the word: in the Plural they had respect unto the things signified by that word.

† We may exemplifie that kind of Construction perhaps thus.

Part became birds, part were turned into beasts, part held the Boat when they were ducked into the water, part cut them into Cantels.

Abundance of men are destroyed with gluttony. A Power of Souldiers rushed into the Town. A multi∣tude of fishes are daily ta∣ken in that River.

The Parliament have taken it into consideration. The Council stay for the coming of the King. The people are mad when Taxes are laid.

Let all the Company of us go.

But in these it will not be good to dare in our use beyond the warranty of Example.

† A Partitive some∣times hath the Constru∣ction of a Collective, and being of the Singular Number hath a Verb Plu∣ral joyned to it: as, Uterque deluduntur dolis. Plaut. Aperite aliquis o∣stium. Ter In suas quis{que} aedes regressi. Ter.

Bring me some Beer, some body. They got every man upon his own horse. They were both sore scared at the sight.

Some body make me a fire here quickly. We suffer every one his misfortunes.

They died both on one and the same day.

Run some body and fetch the Nurse. Every man take your swords in your hands Both of them have the same thoughts of you.

THE SECOND CONCORD. Concordantia Substantivi & Verbi.

¶ Adjectivum cum Substantivo, Genere, Nu mero & Casu consentit: ut Juven. Rara avis in terris, nigroque simillima Cygno.

¶ Ad eundem modum Participia & Pronomina Substantivis adnectuntur: Ovid. Donec eris felix mul∣tos numerabis amicos. Nul∣lus ad amissas ibit amicus opes. Senec. Non hoc pri∣mùm pectora vulnus mea senserunt; graviora tuli.

* The Adjective, whe∣ther it be Noun, Pronoun, or Participle, agreeth with his Substantive in Case, Gender, and Number: as Amicus certus in re incerta cernitur, A sure friend is tryed in a doubtful mat∣ter. Homo armatus, A man armed. Ager colendus, A field to be tilled. Hic vir, This man. Meus herus est, It is my Master.

English Examples.

(I) Where the Adje∣ctive comes together with the Substantive set next after it:

A good man is a wise man; and an evil man is a foolish man.

A black Swan is a rare bird; and a white Crow is a strange sight.

The evil life of a good Preacher brings great dis∣grace to sound doctrine.

Evil words corrupt good manners: and evil man∣ners destroy great King∣doms.

Soft fire makes sweet malt: and sweet malt makes sweet Ale.

A tall man with a lo••g neck in a white doublet,

killed two Sparrows sitting on a high house with one stone.

The untimely death of a loving Husband is a bitter fountain of much grief to a kind Wife.

The eager contention of disagreeing Princes, is the sad destruction of flourish∣ing States.

My son loves thy daugh∣ter: and thy daughter is in love with my son.

Our Lad is gone to your house: and your house is quite gone to decay

Your Master is gone with his Wife to his garden; and our Children with their hands pluck up fine flowers.

She views her wrinkled face in a broken glass, and washeth her yellow teeth with red wine.

He holds three Eggs in one hand: and reads a long letter in a little space.

When Civil Wars cease, then expect happy times: and when happy times re∣turn, then expect Civil Wars.

(II.) Where the Adje∣ctive comes together with the Substantive set next before it.

A house full of gold coyn∣ed, would not make a miser rich.

A Temple adorned with Pictures innumerable, was to be seen on a hills top.

A tongue speaking things shameful, bringeth to the speaker things harmful.

Water flowing from a Fountain inclosed, ran in a chanel newly digged.

A wife bemoaning a hus∣band dead, sate besides children weeping.

A Traitor ready to shed blood Royal, deserves to be cut off by a death untimely.

A Conscience wounded is a burden insupportable.

Land fruitful and well tilled, brings a crop plenti∣ful in a year seasonable.

(III.) Where the Ad∣ject••ve is parted from his Substantive coming be∣fore it.

A Kingdom is happy when peace is preserved carefully, and justice ad∣ministred duly.

The man went away sor∣rowful,

when he saw that a woman lay weeping upon the ground.

Wisdom is accounted vain, where vice is found to be gainful.

The Shepherd is said to be diligent, when the flock is thriving.

Where the Teacher is skilful and painful, there the profiting of the Learner is hopeful.

(IV.) Where the Ad∣jective is parted from his Substantive coming after it.

Happy are the times, when truth and peace do flourish.

Glorious in all Ages will be a wife, righteous, and valiant King.

Hateful is the name, woful is the life, and fear∣ful is the death of a Trai∣tor.

Fair is thought the child by the fond mother.

Terrible, men say, will be the Sentence of the last Judgment.

Ʋnquenchable, it is be∣lieved, shall the fire of Hell be.

Great is the peace of an undefiled Conscience.

Mine is the comfort, thine will be the glory of deeds well done.

Adjectives of the Com∣parative Degree with their Substantives.

Yellow gold is more pre∣cious than white silver.

Despised vertue is more chuseable than honoured vice.

Cicero was eloquenter than Cato: but Cato was constanter than Cicero.

Of the two Kingdoms Spain is the larger, but France is the richer.

Ʋnjust Peace is better than a just War: and war abroad is more desirable than war at home.

A little with quietness is more wishable than a great deal with vexation.

The Sea is deeper than a Bucket, and Eternity is longer than Time.

Adjectives of the Su∣perlative Degree with their Substantives.

The shortest day hath the longest night.

The holiest life may ex∣pect the happiest death: and the best work hope for the biggest reward.

The learnedest Clerks are not always the wisest men: nor are the best Preachers evermore the holiest Christians.

Cicero was the most eloquent of Pleaders: but Caesar was the most pru∣dent of Commanders.

Solomon was the wisest of Kings; and Hercules was the strongest of men.

Socrates was accounted the wisest of Philosophers; and Alexander the most fortunate of Conquerors.

Aristides was the justest among the Grecians; and Crassus the richest among the Romans.

Examples where seve∣ral Substantives Singular with a Conjunction Co∣pulative expressed or un∣derstood coming be∣tween them have an Ad∣jective Plural: which kind of Construction is called Syllepsis.

¶ Copulatum per con∣junctionem Et, nec, ne∣que, & cum pro Et accep∣tum, est pluralis numeri: ac proinde Adjectivum exigit plurale. Quod qui∣dem Adjectivum cum di∣gniore Substantivo gene∣re quadrabit: ut, Ego & mater miseri perimus.

¶ Dignius autem est Masculinum quàm Foemi∣ninum aut Neutrum: & dignius Foemininum quàm Neutrum; ut, Rex & Regina beati. Chalybs & aurum sunt in fornace pro∣bati. Hinc per vim leges & plebiscita coactae.

* Many Substantives Singular with a Conjun∣ction Copulative coming between them, will have an Adjective Plural, which Adjective shal agree with the Substantive of the most worthy Gender: as, Rex & Regina beati, The King and the Queen are blessed.

* Where note, that the Masculine Gender is more worthy than the Femi∣nine, and the Feminine more worthy than the Neuter.

Your Father and Mother are dead.

Mars and Venus were taken naked by Vulcan in a net.

My Brother and Sister were brought alive and safe to shore.

The King and Queen are walked abroad arrayed in Royal Robes.

He hath made his wife and child miserable by his naughtiness.

Both my horse and mare are white.

There lay Antony and Cleopatra drunk. Pyramus and Thishe lie here buried in one Tomb.

† So it is when one Substantive is coupled to another by the Pre∣position with noting company or consociati∣on: ut, Ego cum matre sumus candidi.

He thrust the mother with the son into the prison to be killed with hunger.

The King with the Queen rode crowned through the City.

He found the man with the woman naked in bed.

He took the dam with her young alive in the nest.

There goes wife with husband cloathed in Scar∣let.

Venus and Mars ran away ashamed.

† Yet sometimes in this kind of Construction the Adjective, as well as the Verb, is of the Singu∣lar Number: Cic. i Catil. Occisus est cum liberis M. Fulvius consularis.

¶ At cum Substantiva res inanimatas significant, Adjectivum in Neutro genere usitatius ponitur: ut Sal. Ira & aegritudo permista sunt. Virga tua & baculus tuus ipsa me con∣solata sunt.

* But in things not apt to have life the Neu∣ter Gender is most wor∣thy.

Honor [decus] and glo∣ry [gloria] are placed be∣fore our eyes.

Nor Kingdom nor Crown are to be compared to a good Conscience.

Neither peace nor right [jus] are lovely in the eyes of evil men.

Both Law and Gospel

are contrary unto evil do∣ings.

Counsel and Reason are to be heard before we pro∣ceed to Action.

War and bloodshed [cae∣des] are hateful to good men.

* Yea in such Case, though the Substantives be of the Masculine or Feminine Gender, and none of them of the Neu∣ter, yet may the Adje∣ctive be put in the Neuter Gender: as Cic. 1. Off. Pulchritudinem, constan∣tiam, ordinem in consiliis factisque conservanda pu∣tat.

See Saturn. Mercur. major l. 5. c. 7.

Righteousness and peace have kissed each other.

Death and life are pla∣ced in the power of the Tongue.

Wind and Tide are con∣trary to our journey.

Bread and drink are more necessary unto life than gold or silver.

Wind and rain are hurt∣ful unto ripe fruits.

Fire and snow are con∣trary to each other.

† Yet this is not always observed in Authors: for Quintilian lib. 1. cap. 10. Grammatice quondam ac Musice junctae fuerunt.

No more than the for∣mer exception was by Lucan: who said, Hinc leges & plebiscita coactae. Which expression Mr. Farnaby calls Praeposterum Zeugma. So nor by Ci∣cero, when pro Planc. he said, Amor tuus & judi∣cium tuum de me, multum mihi dignitatis est allatu∣rus.

† But if one of the Substantives signifie a thing with life, and the other signifie a thing without life, the Adje∣ctive shall agree with the Substantive that signifies the thing with life.

Jane fac aeternos pacem pacisque ministros. Ovid.

Omnia tuta vides: clas∣sem sociosque receptos. Virg. 1. Aen.

Our Founder and foun∣dation are honourable in the sight of all wise men.

The Author and work were both condemned to the flames.

The Land and the Inha∣bitants are alike unmanu∣red, and barbarous, and inhospitable.

Both the Orator and his Oration were to be com∣mended.

Both the Hen and Egg were white.

The Sheep and sheepfold are both safe.

† And yet Statius Theb. 7. said, Jura fidem & su∣peros unâ calcata ruinâ.

† Sometimes in Latine he Adjective, that hath relation unto two Sub∣stantives, agrees with that Substantive both for Gen¦der, Number, and Case that stands next to it, whether before or after it. And this kind of con∣struction is called Zeug∣ma.

¶ Zeugma est unius Adjectivi viciniori res∣pondentis ad diversa sup∣posita reductio, ad unum quidem expressè, ad al¦terum verò per supple∣mentum.

† Sometimes the Ad¦jective agrees with that Substantive that stands next before it: as, Et genus & virtus, nisi cum re vilior alga est. Locus & tempus constitutum est. Ma∣ritus & uxor irata est.

† Sometimes with that that stands next after it: as, Caper tibi salvus & hoedi. I••atus est maritus & uxor.

† Sometimes that Ad∣jective, which should be placed between two Sub∣stantives (which are not coupled together by any Conjunction) in the Na∣tural Order, is in the Ar∣tificial Order set after them both, and made to agree with the latter of them, though it were, if set in the Natural Order, to agree with the former of them: as, Non omnis error stultitia dicenda est. Paupertas mihi onus visum est grave. Gens universa Veneti appellati.

† Sometimes in Latine the Adjective agrees not with the Substantive, that is expressed, but with some other that is under∣stood by it, or with it. And this kind of Con∣struction

is called by some Synthesis.

Synthesis est oratio, congrua sensu, non voce: ut, Gens armati.

The disagreement be∣twixt the Substantive and the Adjective is some∣times only in Gender; as, Anser foeta, i. e. avis. Ele∣phantus gravida, i. e. be∣stia. Centauro in magna, i. e. navi. Transtulit in Eunuchum suam, i. e. fabu∣lam. Illum senium [i. e. senem] dii perdant. Nuper honoratos summo mea vul∣nera [i. e. homines qui me vulnerant] Coelo videritis. Capita conjurationis truci∣dati, i. e. homines qui fue¦runt capita conjurationis. Duo millia eru••ibus affixi, i. e. homines ad duo millia sunt affixi.

† Sometimes the dis∣agreement betwixt the Substantive and the Ad∣jective is both in Gender and Number: as, Gens armati, i. e. homines. Pars mersi (i. e. nautae) tenuere ratem. Pars & certare parati, i. e homines. Hic manus ob patriam pugnan∣do vulnera passi, i. e. mili∣tes. Maxima pars vulne∣rati, i. e. homines.

† These and the like irregularities we cannot exemplifie in English, because our Adjectives vary neither in Gender, nor Termination. The only way that I appre∣hend of exemplifying, is to frame Latine Exam∣ples, and then to English them, and by the Eng∣lishes of the Substantive and Adjective, that are to disagree, to set in brackets [] the Latine words for them: as,

Part [pars] were ready [paratus] to yield, though part were still fighting stoutly.

More than forty names [nomen] were assembled [congregatus] unto that place.

† Though it matters not much if they be not imitated at all, their being set and taught in Gram∣mar being only that they may be known, not that they may be followed.

¶ Aliquando oratio supplet locum Substanti∣vi;

ut, Audito regem Do∣roberniam proficisci.

To rise betime in the morning is very wholsome: and to go to bed early is very profitable; as to sit up late at night is exceed∣ing wasteful.

To sleep too much is hurt∣ful to the brain: and to drink too oft is unhealthful for the body.

That he comes so often to my house is delightful to me: and that I walk so much abroad is healthful for me.

That I live so long is troublesom to them: and that you live so well is pleasant to me.

That good men serve God is hateful to evil men: and that evil men serve the Devil is troublesom to good men.

It is sweet to see a young man do as he should.

It is profitable to spare needless cost.

It is easie to find a fault in another mans life.

It is Christian to pardon a repenting offender.

To do well and be evil spoken of is Kinglike.

To be always beginning to live, is foolish.

To fear to touch the Lords Anointed is safe.

† Note, when a speech, clause, part of, or word in a speech, which is not a Noun or Pronoun, but some word used (〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as they speak) to signifie it self only, and not some other thing by it; or an Infinitive Mood of a Verb, or an Adverb, or the like, answers to the question who or what, made by an Adjective, and so stands in the stead of a Substantive to it, then the Adjective referring to it shall be the Neuter Gender; as,

Audito regem Dorober∣niam proficisci. Finire la∣borem incipias, parto quod avebas. Hor. Scire tuum nihil est. Pers. Et nostrum illud vivere triste Aspexi. Velle suum cuique est. Id. Saepe vale dicto. Ovid. Quando erit illud cras?

Take your last farewel of him.

You have a long come with you.

† And if two clauses, &c. be referred to in one Adjective, then that Ad∣jective shall be the Plural Number, as if they were two Nouns of the Neuter Gender, that were refer∣red unto: as,

To sleep much and drink often are hurtful to the body.

Building of houses, and marrying of children are wasteful to the Estate.

To rise betime and study hard, are conducible unto your profiting in learning.

To ly long before you rise, and to loiter much when you are up, are ill for you.

† Sometimes in Latine an Adjective is found in a sentence having no Sub∣stantive at all expressed for it, to agree withal, yet put in that Gender, that the Substantive is of, which it refers unto, being understood, though it be not expressed; as, Vesci ferinâ, i. e. carne. Laborare tertianâ, i. e. febre. Reus repetundarum, sc. pecuniarum Lavari calidâ, sc aquâ. Donari civicâ, sc. Coronâ. In Tus∣culano, sc. praedio. Tenere primas, sc. partes. Eâdem feceris, sc. operâ.

And so we speak some∣times in English.

You may do it all under one [sc. labour.] And then shall that wicked [sc man] be destroyed, 2 Thess 2. 8. The wise [sc. man] shall inherit glory, Prov. 3. 35. Rejoyce in the Lord, O ye righteous [i. e. men] Psal. 33. 1.

He went away the fourth of June.

I rose at four in the morning.

I will be here again by twelve at noon.

There were five against four.

The gray beat the black twelve score at least.

Let the dead bury their dead.

The wise and good are to be preferred before the rich and fair.

† Note, when Man in English, or Hom•• in La∣tine is the word referred to, then the Adject••ve is to be of the Masculine Gender: as, Fortes ere∣antur fortibus, & bont bo∣nis.

Doctus indocto quid praestat? quod caeco videns.

† But when Thing in English, or Negotium, O∣pus, Quid, or Quiddam, or some such like word in Latine is the word re∣ferred unto, then the Adjective is to be of the Neuter Gender: as, Triste Iupus stabilis, i. e. quid triste. Mors omnium extre∣mum est, i. e. res extrema. Est vindicta bonum vitâ jucundius ipsâ. Dulce satis hum••r. Varium & muta∣bile semper foemina.

So we say in English.

To hit the white, i. e. white thing.

Life is a good to be de∣sired.

Siu is an evil to be fea∣red.

† Sometimes in Latine an Adjective put substan∣tively becomes the Sub∣stantive to an Adjective; as, Amicus certus in re in∣certa cernitur. Fortunate senex. Virg. Crudelem me∣dicum intemperans aeger fecit. Tempus erat quo pri∣ma quies mortalibus aegris Incipit. Virg.

Fallax serenum. Quan∣tum est in rebus inane. Pers. Magnum per inane. Virg. Bonum vitâ jucun∣dius ipsâ. Juven.

So we say in English.

A deep hollow. My dear.

The least evil is not to be done for the obtaining of the greatest good.

† Sometimes in Latine the Substantive is of the Genitive Case, when the Adjective is of another Case. But that is either,

1. First, when the Ad∣jective is put substantive∣ly in the Neuter Gender, and then the Genitive case is the Genitive case of possession: as,

Paululum pecuniae. Hoc noctis. Id manticae. Quan∣tum nummorum, tantum fidei. Libyae extrema. Ne id quidem lepôris habue∣runt. Huic aliud mercedis erit. Hoc est signi. Non minus auxilii. Proponit mihi inania nobilitatis. Per diversa gentium terrarum∣que volitabat. Incerta belli, Telluris operta. Strata via∣rum.

So we say in English.

The white of hens dung.

The black of an eye, or bean.

The gray of the morning.

In the dead of the night.

The cool of the day.

2. Or Secondly, when the Adjective refers to another case of the same word which is expressed with it in the Genitive case, and to be supplied in the case of the Adje∣ctive: and then the Ge¦nitive is the case of Par∣tition: as,

Nigrae lanarum nullum colorem bibunt. Plin. i. e. è numero lanarum lanae nigrae nullum bibunt colo∣rem. Canum degeneres, [i. e. è numero canum canes de∣generes] caudam sub al∣vum retrahunt.

Of the hands the right is the stronger.

Of the fingers the mid∣dlemost is the longest.

Of wines the old is best.

Of friends the old are most to be esteemed of.

Of books new are most inquired after.

Of eggs the long bring cocks, the round hens.

Of Scholars the lear∣nedest are not always the wisest.

THE THIRD CONCORD. Concordantia Relativi & Antecedentis.

* When ye have a Re∣lative, ask the question who or what? and the word that answers to the question shall be the An∣tecedent to it.

The Antecedent most commonly is a word that goeth before the Rela∣tive, and is rehearsed again of the Relative.

The Antecedent is sometimes rehearsed a∣gain expresly with the Relative in the same clause that it is in: as,

Cùm viderem ex ea par∣te homines, cujus partis nos vel principes numer aba∣mur. Cic.

Diem scito esse nullum, quo die non dico pro reo. Cic.

Legem promulgaverat,

quâ lege regnum Jubae pub∣licaverat. Caes.

So in English.

I have a horse, which horse is twenty years old.

He bought a house, of which house his Grandfa∣ther had been the owner.

Thou hast a friend, to which friend thou mayst commit all thy secrets.

A certain bird was sit∣ting on a tree, which bird one felled thence with a stone.

I have a dog, than which Dog no Lion is more fierce.

† And when the Ante∣cedent is rehearsed toge¦ther with the Relative, it is of the same Case also, as well as of the same Gender, and Number, and Person that the Antece∣dent is of: as in the forenamed Examples.

But mostly the Ante∣cedent is not set toge∣ther in the same clause with the Relative, but in another clause before it distant from it: and then as it sometimes happens to be of the same Case with it, so many times it differs in case from it.

¶ Relativum cum An∣tecedente concordat ge∣nere, numero, & persona: ut, Vir bonus est quis? Qui consulta patrum, qui leges jur aque servat.

* The Relative agreeth with his Antecedent in Gender, Number, and Person: as, Vir sapit qui pauca loquitur, That man is wise that speaketh few things or words.

English Examples.

Thou hatest me without a cause, who am thy best friend in the world.

I love thee dearly, who yet art most unkind to me.

Despisest thou me, who am the Queen of Beauties?

He married his daugh∣ter, whom he had so dearly loved, to an unworthy per∣son.

They persecute us inno∣cent men, who have done good to them.

We Fathers love you children, who are obedient unto us.

Husbands love us wives, who are kind to them.

We men honour you wo∣men,

who adorn your selves with vertue and modesty.

I cannot but love that man dearly, who hath been kind to me in my adver∣sity.

I cannot but keep that Mare well, which hath saved me in time of dan∣ger.

I cannot but think that Kingdom happy, which is governed by a just and merciful King.

Happy are those Kings whom Subjects love, and enemies fear.

Miserable are these Countries, which War and Famine do vex and waste.

Glorious are those times in which Peace and Truth do flourish.

Synthesis.

† Yet in Latine Au∣thors some disagree∣ments are betwixt the Relative and his Antece∣dent.

(1) In Person: as, Quanquam quicum loquor? Cum uno fortissimo viro, qui posteaquam forum attigisti, nihil fecisti, &c. Cic. Fam. l. 15. Ep. 16.

But here the Relative Qui is referred for the person of it, unto Tu un∣derstood by a Synthesis, as if it had been said, Cum te uno fortissimo viro, qui.

(2) In Gender: as, Ʋbi illic scelus est, qui me perdidit? Ter. And. Here also the Relative qui re∣fers for Gender unto homo by a Synthesis under∣stood in Scelus, as if it had been said, Ʋbi ille scelestus homo est, qui—Qui habet salem, quod in te est. Ter. Eun. Where quod refers for Gender, not to salem the Masculine Gen∣der, but unto sal, or ra∣ther sale of the Neuter Gender signifying the same thing with sal of the Masculine.

Unless the clause habe∣re salem may be concei∣ved to be the Antecedent to quod; which perhaps is the more probable.

Festivum caput, qui omnia sibi posthabenda pu∣tavit esse prae meo commo∣do. Ter. Ad.

(3) In Number; as, Si tempus est ullum jure hominis necandi, quae multa

sunt (here quae refers to tempora understood) Cic. pro Mil. Quo uno vince∣bamur à victa Graecia, id creptum est illis. Cic. in Brut. Here also illis re∣fers unto Graecis under∣stood. Boeth. de Cons. l 2. Pros. 6. Quid v••rò, si corpus spectes, imb••cillius homine re••erire queas, quos saepe muscularum quoque vel mors••s, vel in secreta quaeque reptantium necat introitus? Here quos re∣fers to homines. Catul. Tum jam nulla viro juranti foemina credat, Nulla viri speret sermones esse fideles, Qui dum aliquid cupiens animus praegestit apisci, Nil metuunt jurare, nihil promittere parcunt. Here qui agrees with viri of the Plural Number un∣derstood.

¶ Nec unica vox so∣lùm, sed interdum etiam oratio ponitur pro Ante∣cedente.

* Sometimes the Rela∣tive hath for his Antece∣dent the whole reason, that goeth before him, and then he shall be put in the Neuter Gender and Singular Number: as, In tempore ad eam veni, quod omnium rerum est pri∣mum, I came to her in season, which is the chiefest thing of all.

English Examples.

Now adays one neighbor envyeth another, which is an ugly thing.

The two brothers love one another very dearly, which is very rare.

You love to lie long in bed in the morning, which is ill for your health.

I read much by candle∣light, which is hurtful to my eyes.

It is my care to keep a good conscience, and that is comfortable to me.

They pamper their bellies too much, and that wastes their estate.

I am commanded not to stir from hence, and that keeps me here still

I am busie in writing a book, and that keeps me from going abroad.

SYLLEPSIS.

¶ Copulatum per con∣junctionem Et, nec, neque,

& cum, pro & acceptum, est pluralis numeri: ac proinde relativum exigit plurale.

* Many Antecedents Singular having a Con∣junction Copulative be∣tween them, will have a Relative Plural.

† If the two or more Antecedents singular that come with a Conjunction Copulative betwixt them before the Relative, be both of the Neuter Gen∣der, then shall the Rela∣tive be of the Neuter Gender also, as well as of the Plural Number; as, Sceptrum & diadema quae tu mihi praedicas, ina∣nia sunt.

* Also if the Relative be referred to two clau∣ses or more, then shall the Relative be put in the Plural Number, and Neu∣ter Gender: as, Tu mul∣tum dormis & saepe petas, quae ambo sunt corpori ini∣mica, Thou sleepest much and drinkest often, both which things are naught for the body. Thou playest oft and studiest seldom, which both things are ill for the wit. He is long from home and idle at home, both which things are bad for the estate. We talk much and work little, both which things are un∣profitable to Husbandmen?

† But if there be any difference in the Gender of the Antecedents, then in things apt to have life the Relative shall agree with the Antecedent of the most worthy Gender: as, Rex & regina, quos tu immortales praedicas, mortales sunt.

Your brother and sister, whom some reported to be dead, are alive and in health.

Is his man and his maid come again, who were gone away?

The cock and hen, which you gave me, are stollen from me.

That Lord and Lady whom you so much honour, are much my friends.

Did you know that Tin∣ker and his Trull, which were hanged the other day for murder?

I have that horse and mare still, which my fa∣ther

left me when he died.

The man with the wo∣man, which you saw alive yesterday, are dead to day.

The boy with the girl, which had lost their father, have found him now

The wench with the fel∣low, that were run away, are come again.

The Cow with the Calf, which w••nt to the Fair, were sold for little when they came there.

But in things not apt to have life, the Neuter Gen∣der is most worthy: so that if either of the An∣tecedents be of the Neu∣ter Gender, the Relative shall be of the Neuter Gender: as, Imperium & dignitas quae petiisti.

That Civil War and homebred discord, which were so pleasing to evil men, now (thanks be to God) are at an end.

In one year he ruined a Kingdome and Country, which his Ancestors had many years preserved in a flourishing condition.

Have you brought the milk and cheese, which I bad you bring?

Shew me the ink and paper, which you bought you yesterday.

* Yea and in such case (that is, when the Ante∣cedents signifie things without life) though the Antecedents be all of the Masculine, or of the Fe∣minine Gender, and none of them of the Neuter, yet may the Relative be put in the Neuter Gen∣der: as, Cic. Quid est inconstantiâ, mobilitate, atque levitate, quae vitae nostrae mala solent inferre maxima, turpius? Virga tua & baculus tuus ipsa me consolata sunt.

Hence probably, Gel. l. 1. c. 14. Et memoratis multis magnisque rebus, quae bene ac benevole fecis∣set, because the Relative referred to things with∣out life spoken of before, or perhaps to the word res not as expressed be∣fore the Relative, but as understood with the Re∣lative.

When night and dark∣ness, which had hindred the fight, were ended.

He patiently endured

thirst, and rest, and absti∣nence, from meat [inedia] which were commanded him.

He despised the honour, and glory, and money, which were offered to him to temps him to revolt from the King.

† But it is not necessa∣ry that the Relative al∣ways must be of the Neu∣ter Gender, when the Substantives going before signifie things without life; for Cic. 2. Offic. 1. said, Aut haec ars est aut nulla omnino per quam eas assequamur. The Antece∣dents were oblectatio ani∣mi and ratio constantiae.

† If one of the Ante∣cedents signifie a thing with life, and the other a thing without life, the Relative shall rather a∣gree with that Substan∣tive that signifies the thing with life.

Have you found your horse and saddle, which you had lost?

I brought you both bird and egge, which I found in the nest.

I have seen both the work and workman, whom you so commend.

War will destroy that Kingdom and People which peace would have preser∣ved.

† Yet this is not ne∣cessary always: for Ovid. said, Closse virisque potens per quae nova bella gerun∣tur, i. e. per quas res.

† Yea, when things with life are considered, ut res possessa (saith Rhe∣nius) sometimes the Re∣lative shall be the Neuter Gender: as, Ter. Eun. 3. 2. 27. Atque haec qui misit non sibi soli postulat te vivere. The Substantives referred to in the Rela∣tive haec, are Eunuchus, and ancilla; unless it be said, that munera or dona is referred to therein.

¶ Relativum inter duo Antecedentia diversorum generum collocatum, nunc cum priore conve∣nit: ut, Val. Max. Sena∣tus assiduam stationem eo loci peragebat, qui hodie senaculum appellatur. Non procul ab eo flumine, quod Saliam vocant. Cic. Pro∣pius à terra Jovis stella

fertur, quae Phaeten di∣citur.

Ovid. Unus erat toto naturae vultus in orbe quem dixere Chaos. Caes. 1. B. G. Nacti portum, qui ap¦pellatur Nimphaeum. Plin. l. 18. Sidere illo, quod Ca niculam appellamus. Suet. in Aug. Locum quem Syra∣cusas vocabat. Liv. 6. l 8. Mac. Sacrificium fecit in co loco, quem Pyram appel∣lant.

¶ Nunc cum posterio∣re: ut, Homines tuentur illum globum, quae terra dicitur. Est locus in carcere quod Tullianum appellatur. In coitu lunae, quod inter∣lunium vocant. Hisque animus datus est ex illis sempiternis ignibus, quae sidera & stellas vocatis. Cic. Som Scip. Animal plenum corsilii, quem ho∣minem vocamus. Cic. Ad cum locum, quae Pharsalia appellatur. Caes. 3. bel. c. Tunc consilia conjuncta, quas urbes dicemus. Cic. pro Sextio.

* When a Relative co∣meth between two Sub∣stantives of divers Gen∣der it may indifferently accord with either of them; as, Avis quae passer appellatur. The bird which is called a Sparrow. Yea though the Substantives be of divers Numbers also: as, Estne ea Lutetia, quam nos Parisios dici∣mus? Is not that called Lutetia, that we call Pa∣ris? Or else, Estne ea Lu∣tetia, quos nos Parisios dicimus?

This Construction we cannot exemplifie in En∣glish, because our Rela∣tives do not vary their Genders and Terminati∣ons: yet I set these Ex∣amples for Translation, in which the Relative may be made as agreeing ei∣ther with the former, or latter Substantive.

That sometimes flourish∣ing Kingdom, which ye call England, hath of late been much spoiled by Civil Wars.

That reasonable creature, whom we call man, doth many an unreasonable thing.

The Battel was fought is that place which they call the Pharsalian fields.

He was born in the Town, which is called Sul∣mo.

Those Heavenly Fires, which men call Stars, do shine brightest, when the night is darkest.

¶ Aliquando Relati∣vum, (aliquando & nomen Adjectivum) respondet Primitivo quod in Posses∣sivo subintelligitur: ut, Ter. Omnes omnia bona dicere & landare fortunas meas, qui filium haberem, tali ingenio praeditum.

Ovid. Nostros vidisti flentis ocellos. Cic. 1. Cat. Nostrâ, qui remansissemus, caede contentum te esse di∣cebas. Ter. Id meâ mini∣me ref••rt, qui sum natu maximus. Cic. Vestrâ enim qui cum summâ elegantiâ & integritate vixistis, hoc maxime interest Cic. Tuum hominis simplicis pectus vi∣dimus.

English Examples.

Hear my voice, who cry to thee.

Mine is the better cause, who have not taken up con∣trary arms.

Nor dost thou read my words, who am removed far off.

It is no concernment of thine, who art the young∣est.

I love not to see t••y face, who hast slandered me behind my back.

Heavy will be thy dam∣nation, that pretendest god∣liness, and practisest wick∣edness.

I much commend his wit, who first invented clocks.

There is no trust to be given to his words that thinketh one thing, and speaketh another.

Grant our request, who flye to thee for succour.

Take pi••y on our condi∣tion, who suffer most base things.

I admire at your folly, who wash a Blackmore.

This is your great con∣cernment, who have lived with much handsomeness and uprightness.

No body regarded my word•• calling for help.

Every one lamented his death circumvented by trea∣cherous R••bels.

He washed our stripes

miserably torn with scour∣ges.

You are of the Sisyphian breed, as very a thief and cheat as he.

¶ Quoties nullus No∣minativus interseritur in∣ter Relativum & Verbum, Relativum erit Verbo No∣minativus: ut, Boet. Foe∣lix qui potuit boni fontem visere lucidum.

* When there cometh no Nominative Case be∣tween the Relative and the Verb, the Relative shall be the Nominative Case to the Verb: as, Miser est qui nummos ad∣miratur, Wretched is that person which is in love with money.

English Examples.

Wise is the child, which knoweth his own father.

Rich is the man, that is content with his Estate.

Not he who hath little, but be who coveteth more, is a poor man.

Will you contend with me, who have overthrown all that have opposed me?

He is to blame to de∣spise thee, who art a better man than himself.

Do no wrong to him, that offers none to thee.

It is a folly for them to flatter us, who know them to be Knaves.

They cannot but dearly love you, who are so kind to them.

We ought to be grateful to them, who are bountif•••• to us.

I found by them, who are intimate with him, what his design was.

It is not fit that I, who have forced him to labour, should be idle my self.

What young man is that, that looks on us so earnest∣ly?

Is the house built up again, that was lately bur∣ned down?

Is that Kingdom now destroyed, which a while ago was in so flourishing a condition?

Are the Souldiers gone away that quartered at your house?

Have you found your Mares, that were gone astray?

The Wars, that are n••t

just, should not be waged.

The Peace, that is just, ought not to be broken.

¶ At si Nominativus Relativo & Verbo inter¦ponatur, Relativum regi∣tur à Verbo, aut ab alia dictione quae cum Verbo in Oratione locatur.

(I.) A Verbo.

* But when there co∣meth a Nominative Case between the Relative and the Verb, the Relative shall be such Case as the Verb will have after him: as, Gratia ab officio, quod mora tardat, abest. Foelix quem faciunt aliena peri∣cula cautum, Happy is he, whom other mens harms do make to beware.

English Examples.

Do you dispraise him, whom all men do com∣mend?

You love that, which I do hate: and I hate that, which you do love.

It becomes us to raise up those, whom Fortune hath cast down.

I fear that I shall never be able to repay the courte∣sies, which you have shew∣ed me.

Old men remember all things, which they regard: and Young men long for those things, which they like.

Is he acquitted of the theft, of which he was ac∣cused?

He hath spent the mony, which he esteemed so little of.

Hath he cleared himself of the crime of covetousness, whereof many did accuse him?

It is fit, we amend those faults, whereof we have been admonished.

Have you received my Letters from the man, to whom I gave them?

The man told me it, whom you said it to.

I have payed the money to the man, to whom I owed it.

Take heed what you say, and whom you say it to.

I have one to commend me, and him one whom all do not please.

2. Aut ab alia dictione, quae cum Verbo in Ora∣tione locatur.

* Yet here is to be understood and noted, that the Relative is not always governed of the Verb, that he cometh [next] before, but some∣times of the Infinitive Mood [of another Verb], that cometh after the Verb: as, Quibus voluisti me gratias agere, egi, What persons thou wil∣ledst me to thank, I have thanked.

I have bidden those per∣sons to dinner, whom you bad me bid.

I have sent the Letter to him, whom you wished me to send it to.

He is acquitted of those crimes, which you affirmed him to be accused of.

It is no shame to teach that, which it is fit to learn,

Some spare times do fall out to be, which I do not suffer to be lost.

With expectation of the future, he loseth things pre∣sent, which he might enjoy.

† Sometimes of a Par∣ticiple: as, Quibus rebus adductus fecisti? With what things moved did'st thou it?

I cannot well discern with what things he being offended, should speak a∣gainst us.

These are the questions, whereto I am about to give answer.

There are found out crimes enough, whereof he is to be accused.

I had not heard of any thing, that had happened, with which he being af∣frighted, should run away.

* Sometimes of a Ge∣rund: as, Quem videndo obstupui. Quae nunc non est narrandi locus, Which things at this present is no time to tell.

There stood an ignorant fellow prating three hours together, with hearing of whom I was tired to the heart.

Eggs are put under hens to sit on, in putting under which eggs, it must be minded, that they be of an odd number.

I am now going to see my father and mother, of see∣ing whom I have a long time had a great desire.

We have need of many things, which we now have no opportunity to buy.

You have been taught your duty towards God and the King, of the forsaking which there can never be any just cause.

* Sometimes of a Pre∣position set before him: as, Lego Virgilium prae quo caeteri Poetae sordent. Quem in locum deducta res sit vides, Unto what state the matter is now brought thou seest.

He spake many things quaintly, amongst which this also.

Now I return to Ortho, from whom I had digressed somewhat too far.

That wound comes not to a scar, in which medica∣ments are tried.

He that is disinherited may say many things, for which he would not go to law.

Those matches which you unwisely rush into, are they joys or burdens?

They fit themselves for the Court, and for honours, in which those very things are to be feared, which are hoped for.

* Sometimes with the Substantive that it doth accord w••th, it is put in the Nominative Case by reason that the Verb that it comes before requires a Nominative Case with it: as, Senties qui vir siem, Thou shalt perceive what a Fellow I am. Albeit in this manner of speaking, qui is an Indefinite, and not a Relative.

Make tryal when you please, and you shall find what a Friend I am.

I cannot but wonder, when I see what madness there is in most men.

Do you not wonder what apparel this should be.

It will quickly be seen what Souldiers we are, when once we come into the field.

* Sometimes of a Noun Partitive or Distributive: as, Quorum optimum ego habeo. Quarum rerum u∣tram minus velim, non facile possum ex••stimate. Of the which two thing▪

whether I would with less will have, I cannot easily esteem

The woman fell into two dangers, whereof she had tryed neither.

Whether of these two Books had you rather read?

I will now let you see trees, of which many were set with mine own hand.

I saw a company of Bul∣locks in a valley, whereof one began to bellow aloud.

Man is by nature fur∣nished with two hands, whereof the right hand is the stronger.

Many Philosophers flou∣rished once in Greece, whereof Socrates was even by the Oracle judged the wisest.

The Macedonians that day had the better of the Persians, of whom many thousands were slain in the Battel.

¶ Sometimes it is put in the Genitive Case by reason of a Substantive coming next after him: as, Cujus numen adoro. Ego illum non novi cujus causâ hoc incipis, I knew him not for whose cause thou beginnest this matter.

Is this the Boy whose father and mother died of the plague?

He is truly happy, from whose safety no less j••y shall come almost unto all men, than to himself.

Blessed is the man, whose Conscience hath no sin to accuse him of.

That Conquerour, whose valour and wisdom all ad∣mired, dwelt in a Cottage.

Cicero was a great lo∣ver of Terence, whose words he willingly made use of.

* Sometimes is is other∣wise [i. e. in some other than the Genitive Case] governed of a Substan∣tive: as, Omnia tibi da∣buntur, quibus opus habes, All things shall be given thee, which thou hast need of.

He is not a man of that credit [ea fide] that you are of.

Were he a Boy of that wit, which he is said to be of, none could excel him.

Scholars many times

have many Books in their studies, whereof they have small use.

How many things are there in the world, whereof a wise man hath no need.

† Sometimes of an Ad∣jective: as, Cui similem non vidi. Quo dignum te judicavi.

What colour is that, whereunto white is con∣trary?

My friends, whom I have been kind unto, are become mine enemies.

You may expect thanks from the Husband men, to whom your work is useful and acceptable.

I never lived unquietly with any man, to whom my habitation was near.

It is not thank worthy to give a thing to a man, whom it is unprofitable unto.

You tell me of a man, whom there is nothing e∣qual, or second to.

You attribute that wit unto me, which I am not endued withal.

You put that honour upon me, which I am not worthy of.

¶ Sometimes of an Ad∣verb: as, Cui utrum ob∣viam procedam nondum statui, Whom whether I will go to meet with I have not yet determi∣ned.

I have seen a man be∣fore n••w, whom you do dance exceedingly like un∣to.

I seldom go to see men, whom I live much nearer to than you.

My Father, whom I ho∣ped to meet by the way, brought me home again with him.

* Sometimes it is put in the Ablative Case with this sign than, and is go∣verned of the Compara∣tive Degree coming after him: as, Ʋtere virtute quâ nihil est melius, Use vertue, than the which nothing is better.

He riseth betimes in the morning, than which no∣thing in the world is more wholesom.

You give your self to idle∣ness, than which nothing is worse.

This was the opinion of

Socrates, than whom in all Greece none was more wise.

I am much taken with Seneca's sayings, than whom none of the Philoso∣phers speaks more gravely.

You and your Father are persons, than whom I love and honour none more.

Beauty is a thing, than which nothing is more frail.

* Sometimes it is not governed at all, but is put in the Ablative Case ab∣solute: as, Quantus crat Julius Caesar, quo Impera∣tore Romani primùm Bri∣tanniam ingressi sunt? How worthy a man was Julius Caesar under whose conduct, the Romans first entred Britain?

How brave an Orator was Marcus Tullius, un∣der whose patronage the Innocent ever found safe∣ty?

I will commit my self unto God, who being my guide and guard, I sh••ll not fail.

It was good living in the days of Saturn, who being King, chastity had its abiding in the earth.

Sad was the end of Pompey the Great, who being dead, his body was cast upon the strand.

Great was the glory of the King that day, who coming into the army, the enemies fled out of the field.

How great is the power of mony we may see by this, that it failing, all things else go to decaey.

* Also when it signifi∣eth [i. e. referreth unto] an instrument wherewith a thing is to be done, it is put in the Ablative Case: as, Ferrum habuit, quo se occideret, He had a knife, wherwith he would have slain himself.

I took away from that madman the sword, with which he would have kil∣led me.

Had I a pen wherewith to write, I should quickly write out that Book.

I want a staff to beat that Dog withal [i. e. with which I may beat that Dog].

If I must buy victuals you must find me money to buy them with.

Who lent that Traiter an balter to hang himself withal?

If you will make me a pen I will get you a Pen∣knife to make it with, i e. with which to make it.

† Also when it refers to the Means whereby a thing is to done: as, Non mehercle habeo quo tibi irato satisfaciam. Sen.

He is full of care, that those things wherewith he is delighted, may hold out to the last.

Let us take some course, by which it may be deci∣ded, whether shall rule over whether.

He said he might be corrupted with riches, with which an army might be corrupted.

There is to be no obeying of a Father in that, by which it is brought to pass, that he shall not be a Fa∣ther.

† And also when it re∣fers to the Manner of the doing of a thing: as, Ne∣mo vivit eo more, quo cu∣pit vivere.

We marshalled our army that day after the same manner, that we had done the day before.

He is to be punished af∣ter that manner, that slaves were wont to be pu∣nished in our sorefathers days.

He looks upon his own end with that mind that a man who is secure, lo••ks upon the end of another man withal [i. e. with which].

The Sea hath cast up ••hose, whom it had swal∣lowed, with the same force that it had swallowed them up withal.

* Nouns Interrogatives and Indefinites follow the Rule of the Relative: as, Quis, uter, qualis, quantus, quotus, quisquis, quicunque, cujus, cujusmodi, cuimo ••i, cuicuimodi, utercunque, qualiscunque, quantuscun∣que, quotusquisque, &c. which evermore come before the Verb like as the Relative doth: as,

Hei mihi, qualis erat? Ta∣lis erat, qualem nunquam vidi.

Si quis me audit. Sen.

Quis sit divitiarum mo∣dus, quaeris? Sen.

Si carum tibi servum venderes, quaereres, quis emptor esset? Sen.

Quae tanta vos fert ira? Sen.

Si quaesierit aliquis, quae causa hominem adversus hominem in facinus coe∣git? Sen.

Quid faciam adopta∣tus? Sen.

Dic quid in domo tua peccaverim? Sen.

Quid est, quod aut ne∣gandum mihi, aut excusan∣dum sit? Sen.

Illic si quid commiscro, me nec meus recipiet pater. Sen.

Quod tantum malum humano generi vel sorte vel fato invectum? Sen.

Uter tandem nostrûm popularis est? Cic.

Ut neque dijudicari pos∣set, uter utri anteferendus videretur. Caes.

Ab utro insidiae factae sint, incertum est. Cic.

Hodie utro frui malis, optio sit tua. Cic.

Horun utro uti volu∣mus, altero carendum est. Cic.

Dicis utrum mavis, eli∣ge. Mart.

Si quis est talis, quales esse omnes oportebat. Cic.

Qualis oratoris putas esse scribere historiam? Cic.

Nihil interest ad beatè vivendum, quali utaris ci∣bo. Cic.

Annon intelligis quales viros mortuos summi scele∣ris arguas? Cic.

Te magnopere quaeso, ut qualem te jam antea populo Romano praebuisti, talem te nobis hoc tempore imper∣tias. Cic.

Omnino quale sit quaeri∣tur. Cic.

Qualia Ledaei fata La∣cones habent. Mart.

Quanti hominis in di∣cendo putas esse scribere historiam? Cic.

Quantâ innocentiâ de∣bent esse Imperatores? quantâ temperantiâ? Cic.

Qui adolescens admo∣dum

tantae opinionis in de∣clamando, quantae postea in disputando fuit. Sen.

Quantum, & cujusmo∣di, & quale sit quaeritur. Cic.

Quotus crit iste dena∣rius, qui non sit deferen∣dus? Cic. 5. Ver.

Ex illis occidere me vo∣let, quisquis frugatissimus fuerit. Sen. Quoquo con∣silio fecerit, fecit certe suo. Quoquo alio modo cecide∣rit, quaecunque sit fortuna. Durrer.

Quicunque is est, ei me profiteor inimicum. Cic.

Quemcunque casum for∣tuna dederit, & quaecunque fortuna erit oblata. Cic.

Quamcunque assequi po∣tuerit in dicendo mediocri∣tatem. Cic. de Orat.

Non omnia quaecunque loquimur, ad artem & ad praecepta esse revocanda. Cic.

Cujum pecus? an Meli∣boei? Virg.

Cujum puerum hîc appo∣suisti? Ter.

Suámne esse aiebat? Non. Cujam igitur? Fra∣tris filiam? Ter.

Quantum & cujusmodi, & omnino quale sit quaeti∣tur. Cic.

Si intererit, cujusmodi mors ejus fuerit, cujusmodi res mortem ejus sit conse∣cuta. Cic.

Ego veteri amico mu∣nusculum mittere volui, cujusmodi ipsius solent esse munera. Cic.

Consideres graviùs cui∣modi sint ea, quae reprehen∣disti. Gell.

Vereor enim cuicuimodi est, ne ità hunc videar ser∣vare, ut tibi omnino non pepercerim. Cic.

Demus huic aliquid aeris, cuicuimodi est. Gell.

Ubi enim melius uti pos∣sumus, hoc cuicuimodi est otio? Cic.

Utercunque vicerit, non crit mirum futurum Cic.

Totum hoc leve est, qua∣lecunque est. Cic.

Qualescunque summi ci∣vitatls viri sunt, talis est civitas. Cic.

Quantumcunque est, mi∣hi satis est. Sen.

Quicunque eramus, & quantulumcunque diceba∣mus. Cic.

Ut in quamlibet partem

quotoquoque loco libebit, possimus. Cic.

Quotocuique lorica est? quis equum habet? Curt. lib. 9.

* Not only the Rela∣tive, &c. when it is not the Nominative Case to the Verb, is set before the Verb, that governs it, but also the Substantive, that the Relative, &c. agrees with, if it be expressed: and that other word also that governs it, or its Substantive, (if it be not governed of the Verb) sometimes may, and som∣times must be construed before the Verb: as,

Quibus rebus adductus fecisti?

Quae nunc non est nar randi locus.

Quem in locum deducta res sit vides.

Lego Virgilium, prae quo caeteri Poetae sordent.

Senties qui vir siem.

Quarum verum utram minus velim, non facile possum existimare.

Cujus numen adoro.

Quorum optimum ego babeo.

Ego illum non vidi, cujus causâ hoc incipis.

Quem videndo obstupuit,

Cui similem non vidi.

Ab utro insidiae factae sint, incertum est.

Horum utro uti volumus, altero carendum est.

Qualis oratoris, & quanti hominis in dicendo put as esse scribere histori∣am?

Nihil interest ad beatè vivendum quali utaris cibo.

Annon intelligis quales viros mortuos summi scele∣ris arguas.

Qualia Ledaei fata La∣cones habent.

Quantâ innocentiâ de∣bent esse Imperatores?

Quoquo consilio fecerit, fecit certè suo.

Quamcunque assequi po∣tuerit in dicendo mediocri∣tatem. Cic.

Quemcunque casum for∣tuna dederit, & quaecunque fortuna erit oblata.

Cujum puerum hîc appo∣suisti?

Si intererit cujusmodi mors ejus fuerit, cujusmodi res mortem ejus sit conse∣cuta.

Ʋt in quamlibet partem quotoquoque libebit loco, possimus.

English Examples of these two last Rules.

If any body ask for me, say I am gone abroad.

Who can count the sands on the shore? or who can number the hairs of his head?

I never met with any man that could tell, what was the measure of the water in the Sea.

What so great boldness thrusts you on to this talka∣tiveness?

If any body admire what reason induced me to be∣lieve this, I my self shall wonder.

What said he in his anger?

Can you say what I did amiss all that time?

What is there in this World, that may be to be feared, or loved by a wise man?

If I lose or mar ought, my mother will chide me.

What so great good hath befallen to our kindred by your advancement?

Whether of us is the bet∣ter Scholar?

It is hard to say, which is to be preferred before which.

It cannot be told by whe∣ther the victory was got.

You may take your choice, whether of them you had rather use.

I know not whether of them I shall enjoy with more delight.

You may have whether you will.

It is a marvel if any man be such as all men should be.

I have bought you such a horse, as you desired.

What kind of Preacher must he be, that shall con∣vert all his hearers?

What kind of Artists work do you think it to be, to build a Castle in the Air?

It matters not to eternal life, what sort of garment you have on, when you are buried.

One would hardly think, what kind of book•• some men will read, and com∣mend.

Do not doubt, but that

I shall shew my self such in the herght of honour, as I have heretofore shewed my self in a low estate.

Few Countries breed dogs, such as England doth.

Such horses as we sell here, you will hardly buy elsewhere.

Of how great a man at fighting, do you think it to be the work, to conquer the World in three years?

Of how great wisdom ought Preachers to be men! of how great dili∣gence also! and of how great patience!

Though he be but a very Youth, yet he is one of as great ability in speaking, as his Father was in wri∣ting.

So much money as a man hath in his purse, so much credit shall he have in the World.

I have given my daugh∣ter to her portion, as much as I was well able to spare.

Know you what part of your Fathers estate will fall to your share?

You cannot tell, in what year of your life, you must die, much less on what day of the year.

Whosoever he be that shall honour God, him God will honour.

Which way soever he take to live, I am not much concerned in it.

Which way soever it hap∣pens, I shall be contented.

Whosoever he be that is an Enemy to vertue, I am no Friend to him.

What kindness soever you shew to my Brother, I shall take it as done to my self.

Not all things whatsoe∣ver wise men do, are wisely done.

Whatsoever we have we doow it all to the goodnes•• of God.

Whose Book is this? George's or Peter's.

Whose Horse have you brought here?

If this be not your Mare, whose then do you say that she is?

Inquire about the Corn, how much there is of it, and of what sort it is.

It is a matter what a kind of life yours is, and of what sort your death

shall be, and what kind of condition shall follow after your death.

I will send within this day or two some Apples, such as use to grow in our Orch••••d.

In commending you should consider well, what kind of things those be which you do commend.

Be he as he will, it may not be amiss to give some∣thing to him that is poor.

Such as it was, my Pa∣tron took my present kind∣ly.

Whethersoever die first, the survivor is to be his heir.

Whomsoever you shall send thither, he will lose his labour.

This work, whatever it be, is all easie enough to be done.

Of whatsoever sort you see the Governors of a State to be, of that sort will be the people.

How much soever it be that you give to an un∣thankful man, it is all lost.

How little soever you give to a thankful man, he will thank you for it.

Be the men who they will be, and how much or how little soever it be that they give you, you are be∣holden to them.

You have liberty to go into any Country whatsoe∣ever you list, and to dwell in whatsoever Kingdom you please.

Of all the Philosophers that ever were, what one had an infallible judge∣ment?

Of all men living what one know you, that is free from all faults?

In all the Army what one Souldier had a Hel∣met? What one a Gaunt∣let? or even a good Sword.

Examples of the latter Rule.

With what Arguments were you brought to believe so absurd an Opinion?

Which sayings of the An∣cients we have not time now to rehearse.

Which Writings of the Poets I have not leisure now to read.

Into what place of dan∣ger we now are brought, who sees not?

Into which estate of mi∣sery we foolishly fell by our own fault.

I love Beef, in compari∣son of which all other meats are worth little.

If I come to you to din∣ner, you shall see what a stomach I have to my meat.

Of the which two Books whether I have the more mind to read, I cannot easi∣ly say.

Whose pen have you got to write with?

Do you know whose book I am reading?

There are several Opini∣ons of Philosophers, whereof Epicurus held none of the best.

For whose cause do you undertake so great a jour∣ney?

If you knew for whose sake I take all this pains, you would not blame me so.

There preach'd a Mini∣ster at our Church to day, in hearing of whom I was amazed: the like to whom I have not heard.

Whether of the two knives you like best, take that.

It is considerable unto health, what kind of diet you keep.

How great labour of brain and body must a School-master endure to make good Scholars.

By what advice soever you do it, to be sure, you shall not do it by mine.

Whatsoever portion God gives us in this world, let us receive it with thank∣fulness.

Of our life, whatsoever sort it be of, we must render an account unto God.

Let us so live, that at what time soever, and i•• whatsoever place death shall seize upon us, it may find us prepared.

English Examples framed according to the Rules of the Syntaxis of Substantives and Adjectives.

Substantivorum Constructio.

¶ Quum duo Substan∣tiva diversae significatio∣nis sic concurrunt, ut po∣sterius à priore possideri quodammodo videatur, tum posterius in Genitivo ponitur: ut, Ju. Crescit amor nummi quantum ipsa pecunià crescit. Rex pater patriae. Arma Achillis. Cultor agri.

When two Substantives come together be∣tokening divers things, the latter shall be the Ge∣nitive Case: as, Facun∣dia Ciceronis, the elo∣quence of Cicero. Opus Virgilii, the work of Vir∣gil. Amator studiorum, a lover of studies. Dogma Platonis, the opinion of Plato.

† Note 1. When a Sub∣stantive is governed of a Substantive in the Geni∣tive Case, then generally the Particle [of] comes in the English between the Substantives.

Immoderate desire of wealth, is the destruction of many a man.

The fear of God is the beginning of wisdom: and a Crown of glory is the end of a religious life.

Hope of impunity is a cause of sin: and rewards of vertue are encourage∣ments unto well-doing.

The wrath of a King is as the roaring of a Lion: and the rebellion of Sub∣jects is as the sin of witch∣craft.

Peace of mind, and tranquillity of spirit, is in the heart of the righteous: but horrour of soul, and terrour of conscience is in the breast of the wicked.

Prayer is the key of the day, and the lock of the night: it opens the one, it shuts the other.

† Note 2. Sometimes the two Substantives have not [of] between

them, but the former hath [s] added to the end of it, which (if the word be not of the Plu∣ral Number) is a termi∣nation or sign of a Geni∣tive Case.

When the former of the two Substantives hath [s] added to it, then the latter is to be made into Latine first, and the for∣mer, which hath [s] ad∣ded to it, is to be of the Genitive Case: as,

The Kings heart is in the Lords hand, who guid eth it to his own glory, and the peoples good.

Gods commands are to be kept by men: and mans promises are to be perfor∣med to God.

A womans mind, like the wind and tide, is often changing: and seldom con∣tinues the same long.

Cato's wisdom is to be preferred before Caesar's power, and Pomponius's go dness before Pompey's greatness.

Diana's anger was A∣ctaeon's death: and He∣len's beauty was Troy's destruction.

Rome's greatness was the worlds burden, and its own ruine.

† Genitives Plural as well as Singular have sometimes [s] added to them: as,

Winters Thunder is old mens wonder.

It is Carters luck some∣times to overthrow, and Gamesters fortune some∣times to lose.

The Fisher-mens trading is better than the Butchers in time of Lent: but the Butchers better than the Fishers all the year be∣side.

† Sometimes instead of [s] added to one of the two Substantives that govern one another, the Particle [his or [her] is set between them; e∣specially after Proper names: as,

Charles Rushworth his Book, and Henry Hall his Inkhorn, and Edmund El∣lis his Pen, are all toge∣ther in my Study.

Martha Hubbard her Cow, and Anne Hacket her Ew, and Jane Mar∣shall her Lamb, feed-all

together in one Close.

† When this happens to be, there is nothing to be made in Latine for [his] or [her]; for if any thing be, it will be barba¦rous: but the former Substantive is to be of the Genitive Case: as,

Socrates his wisdom, and Ulysses his cunning, and Achilles his valour, are famous in Poets Works, and Historians Writings.

All Dido her intreating could not hinder Aeneas his going away.

† Sometimes to Sub∣stantives of the Genitive Case ending in [s] there is added [es], or the [s] in the end is doubled, and this mark ['] set over the two [s's], and then it is a sign that the fore∣going Substantive is the Genitive Case governed of one that follows it: as,

Moses's rod was turn'd into a Serpent.

Croesus's wealth was his overthrow.

† Sometimes the for∣mer of two Substantives hath no [es] or [s] add∣ed to it, and yet is the Genitive Case governed of the latter: as,

The Silver-Tankard is in the Hall-window, or on the Parlor-table.

When the Steed is stol'n shut the Stable-door.

† Sometimes in Latine one Substantive goveros two, or more Substan∣tives, in the Genitive Case: as, Jamne sentis bellua, quae sit hominum querela frontis tuae? Cic. Where querela governs both hominum and frontis. So, Quae naturae principia sint societatis humanae re∣petendum altiùs videtur. Cic. Inexplehilis honorum Marii fames. Flor. 3. 21. Quare L. Syllae &C. Cae∣saris pecuniarum translatio à justis dom 'nis ad alienos non debet liber alitas vide∣ri. Cic. 1. Off.

This is imitable in English: yet so that the governing Substantive do come betwixt the two governed Substantives, and that the former of them do end in [s]: as,

Christs redemption of the World cost him his blood.

Pauls preaching of the Gospel to the Gentiles was an offence to the Jew••.

† Sometimes two, three, or more Substan∣tives come together, which are all of the Ge∣nitive Case, but the last, which governs that next before him, and that him next before it, and so backward to the first: as,

Peters wifes mother was sick of a feaver.

My mans Uncles sons wife is a very pretty wo∣man.

My Masters brothers wifes fathers mans horses hairs colour was white.

¶ Proinde hic Geniti∣vus saepissimè in Adjecti∣vum possessivum mutatur: ut, Patris domus, paterna domus. Heri filius, herilis filius.

I am troubled with sto∣mach worms, i. e. worms of the stomach.

Write this in your Pa∣per book, i. e. book of paper.

Land Cattel are better than Sea fish, or Water fowl, i. e. Cattel of the Land, &c.

Will my father and your mother make a Wedding of it? i. e. the father of me, and the mother of you.

¶ Est etiam ubi in Da∣tivum vertitur: ut, Luc. de Cat. Urbi pater est, urbi∣que maritus. Herus tibi, mihi pater.

All acknowledge Cice∣ro to have been a Father to his Country.

In taking such care of me, you shew your self to be a brother indeed to me.

Now that your Sisters Husband is dead, you must be a Husband to her.

Exceptio.

¶ Excipiuntur quae in codem casu per apposi∣tionem connectuntur: ut, Ovid. Effodiuntur opes ir∣ritamenta malorum. Virg. Ignavum fucos pecus à praesepibus arcent.

But if they belong both to one thing, they shall be put both in one Case:

as, Pater meus vir amat me puerum, My Father being a man loveth me a child.

But now ye seek to kill me, a man that hath told you the truth.

Erasmus, a man of very exact judgment, so speaks.

He was glad of the yel∣low covering of a she▪wolf his Nurse.

Within saw he Envy Eating Vipers flesh, the food of her vices.

† This Construction may be called the Fourth Concord.

¶ Adjectivum in Neu∣tro genere absolutè, hoc est, absque Substantivo positum, aliquando Ge∣nitivum postulat: ut, Paululum pecuniae. Hoc noctis. Catul. Non vide∣mus id manticae, quod in tergo est. Juv. Quantum quisque suâ nummorum servat in arcâ, Tantum habet & fidei.

An Adjective in the Neuter Gender put alone without a Substantive, standeth for a Substan∣tive, and may have a Ge∣nitive Case after him, as if it were a Substantive: as, Multum lucri, Much gain. Quantum negotii? How much business? Id operis, That work.

Truly I have not much of money, yet somewhat of pleasure.

That little of quiet, which I here enjoy, do I value at a great rate.

There is not over much of ease in that kind of life, that Schoolmasters lead.

I never saw so much mo∣ney together in all my life before.

Do you think me to have so little wit, as to trust you with my money?

¶ Ponitur interdum Genitivus tantùm, nempe pr••ori Substantivo per Eclipsim subaudito; ut in hujusmodi locutionibus. Ter. Ubi ad Dianae vene∣ris, ito ad dextram. Ven∣tum erat ad Vestae: Utro∣bique subauditur Tem∣plum. Virg. Hectoris An∣dromache: subauditur u∣xor. Idem, Deiphobe Glau∣ci: subauditur filia. Ter. Hujus video Byrrhyiam: subaudi servum.

Where were you to hear a Sermon yesterday? At St. Peters.

Who preacheth this mor∣ning at St. Margarets? He that preached the other day at St. Maries.

Whose man are you? Brian Talbots.

Whose son is he? John Carters.

Here, take my book, and bring my wifes along with you.

This is my boys picture, and that is my girls.

Laus & Vituperium.

Laus & Vituperium rei variis modis effertur, at srequentiùs in Ablativo vel Genitivo; ut, Vir nullâ fide. Ovid. Ingenui vultûs puer, ingenuíque pudoris.

Words importing in∣dument of any quality or property, to the praise or dispraise of a thing, coming after a Noun Substantive, or a Verb Substantive, may be put in the Ablative, or in the Genitive: as, Puer bonâ indole; or Puer bonae in∣dolis, A child of a good towardness. Puer boni ingenii; or, Puer bono ingenio, A child of a good wit.

Ablative.

A man of the old Reli∣gion, faith, and fashion is the man that I like.

She is a woman of excel∣lent features, and of age fit for marriage.

He was one of a very crazy temper, and sickly constitution.

He is a boy of a good wit and great memory, and ready utterance.

I am not of so morose an humour, and currish dispo∣sition as you imagine.

He is one of a crack•• credit, and brok••n estate; of no truth, nor honesty in the world.

Genitive.

He was a man of small meat, and mostly very ordi∣nary.

You shall entertain a guest of no great stomach, but of a pleasant humour.

He is a man of a huge stature, and strong limbs.

She is a woman of a

lovely countenance, and of a good nature.

It is an herb of a sweet smell: and a thing of great value.

I am now of better health, and chearfuller look, than I was a while ago.

Opus & Usus.

Opus & Usus Ablati∣vum exigunt: ut, Cic. Authoritate tuâ nobis opus est. Gell. Pecuniam, quâ sibi nihil esset usus, ab iis, quibus eam sciret usui esse, non accepit.

Opus and Usus, when they be Latine for need, require an Ablative Case: as, Opus est mihi tuo judi∣cio, I have need of thy judgment. Viginti minis usus est filio, My son hath need of twenty pounds.

Neither have I need of a husband, nor you of a wife.

As the case stands with us, we have more need of peace, than of war.

He has need of such an Advocate, as you are, to p••e••d for him.

To secure our selves on land, we have need of ships at Sea

Keep the money I lent you still in your hand, for at present I have no use for it

In time of danger we have use for our strength and courage, skill and di∣ligence.

My fa••her desires you to lend him three hundred pounds: for he hath use for one hundred to day, and he will have need of two hundred more to morrow.

† Yet Opus is found construed sometimes with a Genitive Case: as in that of Cicero Fam 10. 8. Nobis & magni laboris & multae impensae opus fuit ut—And in that of Quintil. l. 12. c. 3. Si nôsse quid quisque senserit, volet, le••••io••is op•••• est. But this is rare!

Though of its being construed with both No∣minative and Accusative Cases in the sense of [needful] there are ma∣ny Examples. Hence our Grammar—

¶ Opus autem Adje∣ctivè pro necessarius quandoque poni videtur, variéque construitur: ut, Cic. Dux nobis, & author opus est. Dicis nummos mihi opus esse ad appara∣tum triumphi. Ter. Alia quae opus sunt para. Cic. Sulpitii operam intelligo ex tuis literis tibi multùm o∣pus non fuisse. To which add, Ter. Phor. 3. 3. Quan∣tum argenti opus est tibi? Plaut. Curc. 2. 2. Quin depromantur mihi quae opus sunt. Gell l. 17. c. 2. Ni∣hil sibi divitias opus esse rectè dici ait. Plaut. Mihi quidem minam argenti o∣pus est.

What hay will you need [or, be needful for you] against winter?

To him that asks of thee give such things as he hath need of.

If he say he hath no need of wealth, tell him that honesty however is needful for him.

If he have little need of my help, I have not much need of his skill.

Adjectivorum Constru∣ctio.

GENITIVUS.

¶ Adjectiva, quae desi∣derium, notitiam, memo∣riam, atque iis contraria significant, Genitivum ad∣sciscunt; ut, Plin. Est natura hominum novitatis avida. Virg. Mens futuri praescia. Idem. Memor esto brevis aevi. Ter. Imperi∣tos rerum, eductos liberè, in fraudem illicis. Silius, N••n sum animi dubius, sed devius aequi. Cic. Graeca∣rum literarum rudis.

Adjectives that signifie desire, knowledge, re∣membrance, ignorance, or forgetting, and such other like, require a Ge∣nitive Case: as, Cupidus auri, Covetous of money. Peritus belli, Expert of warfare. Ignarus omnium, Ignorant of all things. Fidens animi, Bold of heart. Dubius mentis, Doubtful of mind. Me∣mor praeteriti, Mindful of that is past Reus furti, Accused of theft.

He that is desirous of honour, should be mindful of vertue.

He that is greedy of much wealth, will be guil∣ty of great sin.

He that is conscious of evi committed by him, and foreknowing of punishment to be inflicted on him, should not be careless of his own safety, but studious of his preservation.

He that is unskilful of business, ignorant of Laws, doubtful of judgment, and not confident of spirit, will never make a good Ruler of a Common-wealth.

You are very liberal of your praise, but not at all prodigal of your gold.

No marvel if he be de∣vious of [i. e. a swarver from] Justice, that is igno∣rant of Religion.

Be mindful of God, and he will not be unmindful of thee.

It is a strange thing, that he that is covetous of what is anothers, should be la∣vish of his own.

He can never be happy of life, that is wavering of mind; nor he expert of letters, that is regardless of learning.

He must not go to Sea, that is fearful of a storm: nor he to War, that is care∣ful of his life.

A mind sensible of evil before it come, makes the life unquiet: and a mind not knowing of future hap, renders it secure.

A wise man foresighted of danger to come, taketh care for his safety in time.

† It is said, these Ge∣nitives are not governed of the Adjectives, but of causâ, gratiâ, ratione, or ergô understood: and it is true in some, if not in all: and is an imitation of Greek Construction. Hence 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in Thucyd. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in Aristot.

¶ Adjectiva Verbalia in ax etiam in Genitivum feruntur; ut, Audax in∣genii. Ovid. Tempus edax rerum. Sen. Virtus est vi∣tiorum fugax. Horar. Ʋti∣lium sagax Id Propositi tenax. Virg. Tam ficti pra∣vique tenax, quàm nuncia

veri. Plaut. Pecuniarum petax, &c.

He that is over tenacious of his own money, cannot hope, that others will be liberal to him.

Gluttony is consumptive [edax] of the estate, whereas temperance is pre∣servative [conservatrix] of it.

He that is audacious of nature, and fierce of mind, seldom judgeth wisely, or acteth prudently.

When God created man, he endued him with a mind capable of divine perfections.

The Land you live in is very fruitful [ferax] of corn, and wine, and oyl.

He that is pertinacious of opinion, had need be of right judgment.

¶ Nomina partitiva, aut partitivè posita, interro∣gativa quaedam, & cerra numeralia, Genitivo, à quo & genus mutuantur, gaudent; ut Cic. Quan∣quam te, Marce sili, annum jam audientem Cratippum, idque Athenis, abundare oportet praeceptis, institutis∣que philosophiae, propter summam doctoris authori∣tatem & urbis, quorum al∣ter te scientiâ augere po∣test, altera exemplis, &c. Ovid. Quisquis fuit ille deorum. Terent. An quis∣quam hominum est aequè miser, ut ego? Virgil. Di∣vûm promittere nemo Au∣deret. Tres fratrum. Qua∣tuor judicum. Sapientum octavus quis fuerit, nondum constat. Primus regum Ro∣manorum fuit Romulus.

Nouns partitives, and certain Interrogatives with certain Nouns of Number, require a Geni∣tive Case: as, Aliquis, u∣ter, neuter, nemo, nullus, solus, unus, medius, quis∣que, quisquis, quicunque, quidam, quis for aliquis, or quis an Interrogative: al∣so, Ʋnus, duo, tres, primus, secundus, tertius, &c. as Aliquis nostrûm, primus omnium.

Which of us thinkest thou is ignorant of thy folly?

Let it not seem a won∣der to any of you, that Old men love money.

Of my two brothers the one is dead, and the other like to die.

Of my two daughters chuse whether you have more mind to for your wife.

Of your two sons, though either would serve my daughter, yet will she ac¦cept of neither for her hus∣band.

Whosoever of the Philo∣sophers it was that said it, he was out in his opinion.

Yea, say I, what one [quotusquisque] of the Philosophers is in all things right in his opinion?

The wisest of them all is not much wiser than any of us.

Some of you said it, else I had not believed it.

Of those causes let us see of what force each [every one] may be

Of the Souldiers every one received from the Ca∣ptain ten Crowns.

The Master gave to eve∣ry one of his Scholars ten Apples.

Some of us are rich, and some of us are poor, as it pleases God.

Whosoever of us pleases God in this world, shall be happy in the world to come.

Of all men living there is none whom I love more than you.

None of your Sisters is a fit wife for my Brother.

He alone of all the Phi∣losophers was by the Oracle judged to be a wise man.

It was ill done of the fa∣ther to leave his son behind him in the middle of the Mountains.

Of all these things my father knew nothing at all.

Many of those pages were written with mine own hand.

He came to Rome at∣tended with but very few of his friends.

Of Wools the black will take no other hue.

Of Fleshes the white are the most tender, most sweet, and most wholesom.

One of my Sisters is deeply in love with your Brother.

Of the three Elephants two were old ones, the third younger.

Of the ten Virgins five were wise, and five were foolish.

Of the men slain that day in the Battel a thou∣sand

were Romans, the rest Barbarians.

I will visit you to mor∣row with three of my bre∣thren, and four of my ser∣vants attending on me.

Of the Judges six gave it for me, one against me.

You had better be the last of the Gentlemen, than the first of the Clowns.

Of the Sons of Adam Cain was the first, Abel the second, Seth the third.

¶ In alio tamen sensu Ablativum exigunt cum Praepositione: ut, Primus ab Hercule. Tertius ab Aen••••.

† ••••is Exceptive Rule concerns Ordinal Nume∣rals not taken Partitively, but only denoting order of succession, or place.

Enoch also the seventh from Adam, prophesied of these, Jude 14.

I am the third from John, and Thomas is the fourth from me.

¶ In alio verò sensu Dativum: ut, Virg. Nulli pietate secundus.

† The sense of this Exception seems to be, that Ordinal Numerals, and however this parti∣cular one [secundus], as it signifies inferior unto, or short of, is construed with a Dative Case.

I shall scorn to be second to you in any Christian vertue, or Scholar-like praise.

Your beauty is so far from being inferiour to all, that it is second to none.

¶ Usurpantur autem & cum his Praepositionibus E, de, ex, inter, ante; ut, Ovid. Est Deus è vobis alter. Id. Solus de superis. Virg. Primus inter omnes. Id. Primus ibi ante omnes magnâ comitante catervâ, Laocoon ardens summâ de∣currit ab arce.

Which of you convinceth me of sin?

That sowr Philosopher is one of the Stoicks.

Of the three things that was the second.

Of my two sons the el∣der is well, the younger sick.

In prosperity he seemed one of the fortunatest men,

in adversity one of the gal∣lantest men.

That proud Peacock that stalks so majestically now, but a while ago was one of the Commonalty.

Of those wise men the one was always laughing, and the other crying.

Of the other Bees the little one is the best.

It is not well that of Di∣vines you alone should be of this opinion.

You only have I known of all the families of the earth: therefore will I pu∣nish you for all your iniqui∣ties.

That is a good Boy in¦deed, that is first at School every morning before all his School fellows.

Among all the Greek Poets Homer is the chief; as Virgil is among the La∣tine: and among the La¦tine Orators Cicero is the prime, as Demosthenes is among the Greek.

¶ Interrogativum & ejus redditivum ejusdem casûs & temporis erunt: ut, Quarum rerum nulla est satietas? Divitiarum. Quid rerum nunc geritur in Anglia? Consulitur de religione.

When a question is as∣ked, the answer in Latine must be made by the same Case of a Noun, Pronoun, or Participle, and by the same Tense of a Verb that the question is asked by: as, Cujus est fundus? Vicini. Quid agi∣tur in ludo literario? Stu∣detur.

Who loves God most? He that serves him best.

Who subdued the great∣est part of the world in twelve years time? Ale∣xander, King of Mace∣dony.

Whose is this book? Wil∣liam Lowthers.

To whom are you to give that book? To my Master.

Whom do you love above all? God.

Whose workmanship are you? Gods.

With what a mind are you to serve God? With a pure one

In what doth true piety consist? In holiness and righteousness.

What things is there no

either pleasure or profit in? In iniquity and sin.

What do the blessed Saints in Heaven do? They admire and adere God, and live happy in the enjoyment of him.

What did Jesus Christ to redeem the World? He laid down his life for it, and suff••red the painful, shameful, and accursed death of the Cros••.

Have you learned the ho¦ly Bible all by heart yet? I have not yet learned it all, but yet I have got a good deal of it without book.

Which part of the Bible do you think most necessary for a Child to learn first? Christs Sermon upon the Mount.

What had you suffered, if Christ had not redeemed you? Had not Christ re∣deemed me, I had suffered eternal death.

What will you do for him, that has so loved you, as to lay down his life for you? I will love him with all my heart, and I will serve him with all my might, and I will honour him with all my estate.

† This Construction may be called the Fifth Concord.

¶ Fallit haec regula, quoties Interrogatio fit per Cujus ja, jum: ut, Cujum pecu••? Laniorum.

Except a question be asked by Cujus, ja, jum: as, Cuja est sententia? Ci∣ceronis.

Whose is that Sheep? Aegons.

Whose daughter did your brother marry? A Mer∣chants.

Whose opi••ion is most followed in the Schools? Aristotles.

Whose doctrine do you like best in the Church? Christs.

¶ Aut per dictionem variae Syntaxeo••: ut, Furtine accusas? an h••∣micidii? Utroque.

Or by a word that may govern divers Cases: as, Quanti emisti librum? Parvo.

What doth Cicero ac∣cuse. Verres of? Of many and grievous crimes.

What crime are you con∣demned

for? The same that you are.

Was he acquitted of fe¦lony? or manslaughter? Of neither.

What sold you your horse for? For five pound.

What did your hat stand you in? Small.

How much is vertue e∣steemed now adays? Very much.

¶ Fallit denique cum per possessiva meus, tuus, suus, &c. respondendum est: ut, Cujus est hic co∣dex? Meus.

Or except I must an∣swer [viz. to a question made by an Interrogative in the Genitive Case] by one of these Possessives Meus, tuus, suus, noster, v••ster: as, Cujus est domus? Non vestra, sed nostra.

Whose horse do you ride on? Mine own

Whose ground do these hu••bandmen plow up? Their own.

Whose man was that, that was here even now? Ours.

Whose Orchard fruit is best liked in the Town? ••••urs.

Whose money doth he so liberally give to the poor? His own.

Whose company dost thou love above any? Thine.

¶ Comparativa & Su∣perlativa accepta parti∣tivè Genitivum unde & genus sortiuntur exigunt.

Nouns of the Compa∣rative and the Superla∣tive Degree b••ing put partitively, that is to say, having after them this English of or among, re∣quire a Genitive Case: as, Aurium mollior est sini∣stra, Of the ears the left is the softer. Cicero Ora∣torum eloquentissimus, Ci∣cero the most eloquent of Orators.

The elder of the young men is like to come to a good estate: and the youn∣ger is like to prove a good Scholar.

The taller and thicker of the Oaks, as b••ing fitter for work, must be out down.

Kill the fatter of the Capons to supper, and let the other alone till he be fatter.

Of all the Philosophers

Plato is esteemed the most elegant: as of all Or••tors Cicero is judged the most eloquent.

He is the best of friends that flatters least in pro¦sperity, and comforts most in adversity.

Of smells the strongest is not always the wholesom∣est; of flowers the fairest is not always the sweetest: and of men the richest is not aways the happiest; nor of ••cholars are the most learned always the most wise.

† Note 1. The Geni∣tive Case after a Superla∣tive put Partitively, is supposed to be governed of è numero understood by an Ellipsis.

Note 2. The Superla∣tive doth not always a∣gree in Gender with the Genitive Case that he go∣verns: but often with the Substantive forego¦ing, whereof the speech is. Hence Cic. Indus, qui est omnium fluminum ma∣ximus. Plin Modus rerum omnium utilisstmus: and, Hor••eum frugum omnium mollissimum est.

¶ Comparativum au∣tem ad duo, Superlati∣vum ad plura refertur: ut, Manuum fortior est dextra. Digitorum medius est longissimus.

Of my fe••t the left is the weaker: and of my arms the right is the stronger. Of my eyes the right is the clearer: and of my cheeks the left is the fairer.

Of two goods the big∣ger is the better: and of two evils the lesser is the better.

Of Latine Orators Ci∣cero is the most eloquent: as of Greek Poets Homer is the most excellent.

Of the three most noble Gr••ces (which are Faith, Hope, and Charity) the greatest is Charity.

Of the Senses Seeing is the most useful and Touch∣ing the most necessary.

† Some will not allow this distinction, and bring examples to disprove it: Such as that of Plaut. Re∣gum rex regalior; and that of Plin. Adolescentiores apum ad opera exeunt. The point is disputable: but

I shall not dispute it, On∣ly I say, that in Plaut. Re∣gum may mean but two Kings; and in Plin Apum may mean two sorts of Bees, the elder, and the younger.

¶ Accipiuntur autem Partitivè cùm per E, Ex, aut Inter exponuntur: ut, Virgilius Poetarum do∣ctissimus: id est, ex Poe∣tis, vel inter Poetas.

—Being put Partitive∣ly, that is to say, having after them this English of, or among—

Of [or, among] praises that of vertue is the great∣est.

Of Scholars [or, among Scholars] the most humble, the most diligent, and the most quiet is the most com∣mendable.

Of [or, among] all books the Book of God is the best for a young man to read.

Of all University studies the study of Ethicks is the most excellent.

Among colours green is the most pleasing to a weak eye.

Rainy weather is, in my thoughts, the worst of all to travel in.

A good conscience is the most valuable possession of all others.

¶ Comparativa cùm exponuntur per quàm Ab∣lativum adsciscunt: ut, Horat. Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum, id est, quàm aurum, quàm virtutes.

Nouns of the Compa∣rative Degree having than after them do cause the word following to be the Ablative Case: as, Frigidior glacie, More cold than Ice.

Health is better than silver, and Grace more pre∣cious than gold.

Better is the rebuke of a friend, than the flattering of an enemy.

What is swee••er than ho∣ney? or what is stronger than a Lion? what whiter than snow? or what hot∣ter than fire?

† Note If quàm be made in Latine for than, then the Substantive fol∣lowing is to be of the same Case with the fore∣going: as, Vilius agren∣tum

est, quàm aurum: vi∣lius est aurum, quàm vir∣tutes.

¶ Adsciscunt & alte∣rum Ablativum qui men∣suram excessûs significat: ut, Cic. Quantò doctior es, tantò te geras submissiús.

Nouns of the Compa∣tative Degree having by after them, do cause the word following to be the Ablative Case: as, Do∣ctior multò, Better learn∣ed by a great deal. Uno pede altior, Higher by a foot.

You are t••ller than I by the head and shoulders.

I am older than you by seven years.

In your Poem one Verse is shorter than another by one syllable

My staff is an inch lon∣ger than yours.

Your Sister is two years younger than you.

I am much more quiet in mind than I was

Goodness is a great deal more d••sirable than great∣ness.

By how the more advan∣tag••ous your kindness is, by so much the more acceptable ought it to be unto us.

By how much the greater any pleasure is, by so much the more doth it discom∣pose the mind.

The higher you are in place, the holier be you in life.

The richer you are in goods, the more bountiful be you in gifts.

† Note. Adjectives of the Comparative Degree do not only govern an Ablative Case of the Thing exceeded, or of the Measure of the excess, but also of the Matter wherein the Exceeding is: as, Major aetate. Ma∣jor n••tu

Cicero was more excel∣lent for speaking than Caesar: and Caesar was more excellent than Cicero for fighting.

Ajax was stronger in body than Ulysses: but Ulysses was much wise in cou••sel than Ajax.

If you be nimbler than I in wit, I am steadier than you in judgment.

You are not so much bet∣ter than I at wrastling, as

I am better than you at running.

¶ Tanto, quanto, mul∣to, longè, aetate, natu, utrique gradui appo••u••∣tur: ut, Catul Tanto tu possimus omnium Poeta, Quanto tu optimus omni∣um patronus. Eras. No¦cturnae lucubrationes longe periculosissimae habentur. Longè caeteris peritio••es. sed non multo melior ta∣men. Juv. Omne animi vi∣tium tanto conspectius in se Crimen habet, quanto major qui peccat habetur. Major & maximus aetate. Major & maximus n••tu

'Twas the glory of King Edward the Sixth, that he was by so much holier than others, as he was higher than others.

You are learneder than I, by what you are older than I.

It is strange, that being much fatter than you, I should be much nimbler than you.

The reading of the Go∣spel is far a more profitable study, than of any other History.

It were a great shame for a Minister to be so much the worse doer of all, as he is the best speaker of all.

He that has got the grace of God in truth, may ac∣••oun•• himself by much the happiest man of all.

Solomon was far the wisest man of all, that li∣ved before him.

He is most honourable for age, that is eldest for birth.

DATIVUS.

¶ Adjectiva quibus commodum, incommo∣dum, similitudo, dissimi∣litudo, voluptas, submis∣sio, aut relatio ad aliquid significatur, in Dativum transeunt: ut, Virg. Sis bonus O felix{que} tuis. Mart. Turba gravis paci, placida∣que inimica quieti. Est fi••itimus oratori poeta. Ovid. Qui coloralbus erat, nunc est contrarius albo. Mart. Jucundus amicis. Omnibus supplex. Hor. Si facis ut patriae sit idoneus, utilis agro.

Adjectives that beto∣ken profit or disprofit, likeness or unlikeness, pleasure, submitting, or

belonging to any thing, require a Dative Case: as, Labor est utilis corpori, Labour is profitable to the body. Aequalis He∣ctori, Equal to Hector. I∣doneus bello, Fit for war. Jucundus omnibus, Plea∣sant to all persons. Pa∣renti supplex, Suppliant to his father. Mihi proprium, Proper to me.

A Heathen is good [bo∣nus] to his friend••, a Chri∣stian to his enemies.

That Land will be very profitable [foelix] to the owner of it, that is fat, and w••ll tilled.

I would say more, but that I fear I should be bur∣densome [gravis] to you.

It is grievous [gravis] to a modest person to a••k any great matter of one, whom he may think himself to have deserved well of.

An evil man is a friend to none, and an enemy [ini∣micus] to himself.

Vomitings are hurtful [inimicus] to the eyes and teeth.

Falshoods are many times like [finitimus] to truths.

The Scots are borderers [finitimus] on the Eng∣lish.

Cowardise is contrary [contrarius] unto coura∣giousness, and justice to injustice.

Your affection toward me is pleasant [jucundus] to me in troubles, and grateful in sorrow.

It becomes a Master to b•• courteous to his Scholar, and a Scholar to be suppli∣ant [supplex] to his Ma∣ster.

That new built house is meet [idoneus] for an Inn.

A weak Stripling is not fit [idoneus] for War.

It can never be profita∣ble [utilis] to any one to sin, because it is always filthy.

My meat is equal [aequa∣lis] to my hunger, and my drink to my thi••st.

Change is proper [pro∣prius] to chance, and va∣riety to fortune.

To be told of his faults in a friendly manner, is a thing very pleasant [gra∣tus] to a good man.

By the rule of Justice

punishment should be equal [par] to the fault.

It is very conducible un∣to health, that the meat be fit [aptus] for the stomach.

One good man loves to have another neighbouring to him.

When Hector died, he denounced death to be near [propinquus] to Achil∣les.

You have never a body nearer [propior] to you, than my self am.

Morning and evening are convenient [opportu¦nus] times for prayer.

Youth is an age most fit [opportunus] for honest labour, and profitable stu∣dies.

Some men are very un∣like [dispar] others in their judgment and beha¦viour.

He is an evil man that is profitable [commodus] to none but himself.

A good child will be gentle [commodus] to his School-fellows.

An unprofitable [inuti¦lis] member to the Com∣monwealth is fitter to be cut off, than continued.

I shall be very glad to have you come to my house to morrow, if it be not troublesome [incommo∣dus] to you.

He is unlike [dissimilis] to his father in every thing.

¶ Huc referuntur no∣mina ex con Praepositio∣ne composita: ut contu∣bernalis, commilito, con∣servus, cognatus, &c.

He reported he was Chamber-fellow [contu∣bernalis] to him in the time of his Consulship.

That man was Comrade [commilito] to my Grand∣father in the time of the ••panish War.

F••llow-servants [con∣servus] to the same Lord should be kind each to o∣ther.

I love you much because you are of kin [cognatus] to me: but more because you delight in that which is good.

He that is conscious [conscius] to himself to have done no evil in his life, cannot but have great comfort in his soul at his death.

Neither put another up∣on evil doing, nor if you can shun it, be privy [con∣scius] to anies evil deed

Be courteous [concin∣nus] to your friends, gentle to your enemies, and just to all.

The French are borde∣rers [confinis] upon both the Germans, the Spani∣ards, and the Italians.

The tops of the houses, and Steeples of the Chur∣ches are conspicuous [con∣spicuus] to the fight of any one a great way off.

Your house, I think, is contiguous [contiguus] to the Theatre.

A people that are flub∣born [contumax] to their King may justly fear the displeasure of their God.

When ever you go about any weighty matter, take a time that is convenient for it.

¶ Quaedam ex his, quae fimilitudinem significant etiam Genitivo gaudent: ut, Lucan. Quem metuis par hujus erat. Ter. Pa∣tres aequum esse censent, nos jam jam à pueris illico na∣sci senes, neque illarum af∣fines esse rerum, quas fe•••• adolescentia. Id. Domini similis es. Auson. Mens conscia recti. Virg. Prae∣terea regina tui fidissima dextrâ, Occidit ipsa suâ.

Hugo Grot••us was a man like [par] whom this last Age hath produced few

There is hardly any one so good, but one time or other his like [par] may be met withal.

It is a gallant thing when a young man that is well descended, is like [si∣milis] his Ancestors in vertue and honour.

If you would live a quiet life, be careful so to carry your self, that you neither be guilty [affinis] of any crime, nor of any suspicion.

It is fit that those that have spent many years in vertuous exercises, should be partakers [affinis] of these honours, which age bestoweth.

A wicked man is as much unlike [dissimilis] God, as he is like [similis] the Devil.

He can never be truly

valiant, who is conscious [conscius] of foul crimes committed by himself.

Thoroughout our whole life both God our Judge, and the Devil our Accuser, are privy [conscius] to our actions.

It was a great grief to that good Old man to bury a wife, that had been most faithful [fidus] to him all her days.

It is well, when the mind is simple, and hath no mixed thing in it, that is odd [dispar] and un∣like.

Vices are the contraries [contrarius] of vertues.

I do not love that any, who is but my equal [aequa∣lis] in age, should be above me in learning.

A searching out of the truth is proper [proprius] to man.

It is proper [proprius] to living Creatures to have a desire to something.

¶ Communis, alienus, immunis, variis casibus serviunt: ut, Cic. Com∣munis animantium omni∣um est conjunctionis appe∣titus procreandi causâ. Mors omnibus communis. Hoc mihi tecum commune est. Sall. Non aliena consilii. Sen. Alienus ambitioni. Cic. Non alienus à Scaevo∣lae studiis. Ovid. Vobis im∣munibus hujus Esse mali dabitur. Plin. Caprificus omnibus immunis est. Im∣munes ab illis malis sumus.

Communis.

Gen. It is common to all Republiques to defend their Liberties with their lives and fortunes.

Dat. Ʋniversal experi∣ence shews, that death is common to every age.

Ablat. Many times that which one Art professeth, is common with another Art.

Dat. & Ablat To move and breathe, to sleep and wake, to laugh and cry, to hunger and thi••st, to live and die, these things are common to rich with poor.

To mistake, to slip, to be deceived, is common to a wise man with other men.

Accus & Prep. No one person should usurp to him∣self that, which his neigh∣bours have common among them.

Alienus.

For a Gentleman to be drunk, is disagreeing with his dignity: and for a Clergie-man to be idle, is disagreeing with his duty.

For a Taylor, a Cobler, or a Weaver to turn Prea∣cher is not agreeing with his Profession.

For persons troubled with the Gout it is noisome to ride.

To write of Mathema∣ticks is not agreeable with the Art of Grammar.

I admired you should be∣lieve any thing had been done by me, which was un∣agreeable with our friend∣ship

With a man that is dis∣affected from me, my Let∣ters will do no good.

Not Kings should think it unbecoming their Maje∣sty to serve the Lord Christ.

Immunis.

Neither should servants think themselves free from labours, nor Scholars from studies.

He that is not exempt from instruction is not ex∣empt from correction.

Free from faults, free from punishments.

It is a great matter to be free from warfare: for he that is free from war, is free from fear.

Pious persons are free from those inward torments of mind, which wicked ones are tormented withal.

¶ Natus, commodus, incommodus, utilis, inu∣tilis, vehemens, aptus, etiam Accusativo cum Praepositione adjungun∣tur: ut, Cic. Natus al gloriam.

Man is born to labour, as the sparks flie upwards.

He is born to his own sorrow, that is born to the destruction of others.

If you intend to give a reproof to any one, it will be wisdom to take a time convenient for it.

A garment convenient to run in, may be inconve∣nient to ride in.

It is a sad thing for a man to live in this world, and be good for nothing.

I have bought wood hardly good for any thing, but Wheel-spokes.

Many things are through ignorance cast away, which yet are not unuseful for meat or medicine.

Not the meanest things that God made, are unpro∣fitable for the uses of men.

A dutiful son will never give his father very great [vehemens] cause to chide.

He that is sensible of his own failings, will not be vehement against others that fail.

He that brings up a child should before-hand consi∣der, what he will be most fit for afterwards.

It is convenient that he that is apt to learning, should be brought up a Scho∣lar: and that he that is unapt to it, should be put to a Mechanick Trade.

¶ Verbalia in bilis ac∣cepta passivè, ut & Parti∣cipia, seu potiùs Partici∣pialia in dus, Dativo ad∣jecto gaudent: ut, Mart. O mihi post nullos Juli me∣morande sodales. Stat.—nulli penetrabilis astro Lucus erat.

Likewise Nouns Adje∣ctives of the Passive sig∣nification in bilis, and Participials in dus: as, Flebilis [flendus] omni∣bus, To be lamented of all men. Formidabilis [formidandus] hosti, To be feared of his ene∣mies.

Love is a disease that is healable with no herbs.

Inward wounds made in the mind, are not curable by outward Salves applied to the body.

The Armor of Achilles was so strong, as to be pene∣trable with no weapon.

All will be to be feared by him, who will be to be feared by all.

God, as being a pure being, is to be worshipped by man with a pure mind.

An offended father is with all submissiveness to be intreated by an offend∣ing son.

ACCUSATIVUS.

¶ Magnitudinis men∣sura subjicitur Adjectivis in Accusativo: ut, Gno∣mon septem pedes longus, umbram non amplius qua∣tuor pedes longam reddit.

The measure of length, breadth, or thickness of any thing, is put after Adjectives in the Accu∣sative Case: as, Turris al∣••a centum pedes, A Tower an hundred foot high. A••bor lata tres digitos, A Tree three fingers broad. Liber crassus tres pollices, A Book three inches thick.

It is rare to see a Fir plank, that is twelve yards long, ten foot broad, and eight inches thick.

Those are stately Walks indeed, which are two hun¦dred and fifty paces long, and twelve apiece wide.

A Wall that is an hun∣dred foot high, and thirty foot thick, will defend a Town well.

† This Accusative is said to be governed of the Preposition ad.

¶ Interdum & in Ab∣lativo: ut, Columel. Fons latus pedibus tribus, altus triginta.

And sometimes in the Ablative Case: as, Liber crassus tribus pollicibus, A book three inches thick.

A River six foot deep i•• not easie to be passed by Foot-men, unless they swim.

It is hard to run a course eight furlongs long with full speed, and not slack ones pace before he come to the end of it.

I have seen many a thick Tree, yet never saw I yet one that was three ell•• thick.

He sits upon a four∣square stone that is twelve inches long, and twelve inches broach, and twelve inches thick.

† This Ablative is said to be governed of Ad.

¶ Interdum & in Ge∣nitivo: ut, Colum. In m••∣rem horti are as latas pe∣dum denûm, longas pedum quinqu agenûm facito.

The Court of the Kings house was two hundred foot wide, and three hundred foot long.

That must needs be a strong Ship, which is made of plank•• six and thirty in∣ches broad, and twelve inches thick.

He dwells in a f••••e

house, seated on an Hill an hundred yards high, with a Well in it, which is fifty fathom deep.

† This Genitive is said to be governed of longi∣tudine, latitudine, or pro∣funditate understood.

ABLATIVUS.

¶ Adjectiva, quae ad copiam egestatémve per∣tinent, interdum Ablati∣vo, interdum & Genitivo gaudent: ut, Plaut. Amor & melle, & felle est foe∣cundissimus. Horat. Dives agris, dives positis in foe∣nore nummis. Virg. At fessae multâ referunt se nocte minores, Crura thymo ple∣nae. Id. Quae regio in terris nostri non plena laboris? Id. Dives opum, dives pi∣ctai vestis & auri. Pers. O curvae in terras animae, & coelestium inanes! Ex∣pers fraudis. Gratiâ bea∣tus.

Adjectives signifying fulness, emptiness, plen∣ty, or wanting, require an Ablative Case, and sometimes a Genitive: as, Copiis abundans. Crura thymo plena. Vacuus irâ [irae, ab irâ] Nulla episto∣la inanis re aliquâ. Ditis∣simus agri. Stultorum ple∣na sunt omnia. Quis nisi mentis inops oblatum re∣spuat aurum? Integer vi∣tae, scelerisque purus Non eget Mauri jaculis nec ar∣cu Expers omnium corpus inane animae.

Ablative.

A City naked [nudus] of Garrison, is easily taken.

No Castle is impregna∣ble, whose gates a Mule loaden [onustus] with gold may enter.

When the belly is loaden [gravis] with meat, the brain doth not use to be quick of conceit.

Great care is to be ta∣ken, that no hurt be done to a woman big with child [gravidus].

It is good living in a Country fruitful [coerus] of corn, and necessary provisi∣ons for mans life.

It is no pleasant walking abroad, when the fields are destitute [viduus] of corn, the pastures of cattel, and the trees of leaves.

A Maid that is wanting [cassus] of Dowry, should not be despised, if she be endued with vertue.

In a plentiful [locu∣ples] year of corn provision should be laid up against a dear year.

Their bodies are seldom healthful, who have bel¦lies stronting out [disten∣tus] with meat.

Genitive.

I should always wish to be poor [pauper] of those goods, which make the ow∣ner of them unhappy.

He that can live of a little, will not be much needful [indigus] of the help of another.

It matters not much if a man be lacking [ege¦nus] of goods, so he be not lacking of grace.

A Soul that is pure [pu∣rus] from sin, is a Spouse meet for her Saviour.

He that is much given to [benignus] wine and sleep, shall hardly have much either of wealth or health.

France being a Country fruitful [fertilis] of men and corn, is the better able to raise and maintain an Army for the Wars.

Be not prodigal [prodi∣gus] either of thy money or blood: yet spend both free∣ly upon good occasion, for God and for thy Country.

He that lives at Court, and is wanting [inops] in friends, had need have his purse be full of money.

Happy is he that lives free [expers] from all fear: but happier he that lives free from all sin.

He that is liberal [l••r∣gus] of promising, should be just in performing.

Genitive & Ablative.

Gen. In times of war all places are full [ple∣nus] of fear; but the sa∣fest is a City full of warlike provisions.

Ablat. A good man will be full [plenus] of good works, and not full of good words only.

Gen. He that is rich [dives] only in goods, and not rich in grace too, i•• but a poor man for all his wealth.

Ablat. A man sometimes

is rich [dives] in land and cattel, and yet poor enough in money for all that.

Gen. Men, that are full [satur] of all good things, should not forget to bless God the giver of all good∣ness.

Accus. When the belly is full [satur] of drink, then the brain is empty of wit.

Gen. It is no poor Coun∣try that is full [soecun∣dus] of corn and cattel.

Accus. Where the fields are full [soecundus] of flowers, and the Orchards are full of fruits, there the Bee hives will be full of honey and wax.

Gen. It is but a little time, which a School-master hath that is void [vacuus] of labour.

Accus. They are decei∣ved, that think in this world to lead their lives void of [care].

Gen. He whose head is empty [inanis] of wit, and heart of courage, will ne∣ver make either good Scho∣lar, or good Souldier.

Accus. Who can delight ••o read a play that is void [inanis] both of ••rit and language.

Gen. He that is desti∣tute [orbus] of help of man, hath yet the help of God to betake himself to.

Accus. In a sad case is a mother bereft [orbus] of her children: but in a sadder are children bereft of their mother.

Gen. It can hardly be that he that lives a Coun∣try life, should be free [li∣ber] from labours, or he that lives a City life should be free from temptations.

Accus. Happy is he, who free [liber] from worldly care and fear enjoys in pri∣vate the society of God.

Gen. When the Land is full [refertus] of Robbers, and the Sea of Pirats, there is no safe living ei∣ther by Sea or Land.

Accus. When a Scholar writes a letter to his fa∣ther, he should see that it be full [refertus] of all civility and respect.

† Some of these have after them an Ablative and his Preposition: as, Ab omni perturbatione li∣ber.

Ci•••• A suspicione va∣cuus. Cic. Respublica nu∣da à Magistratibus. Cic. Inops ab amicis. Cic. Ʋs∣que eo orba fuit ab Opti∣matibus illa concio, ut—Cic. Purus ab humano cul∣tu locus. Liv.

¶ Nomina diversitatis Ablativum sibi cum Prae∣positione optant; ut, Virg. Alter ab illo. Aliud ab hoc. Diversus ab isto.

A man that is truly con∣verted, becomes another man [alter] from what he was before.

I am another man [al∣ter] from what I was the other day, had you seen me then.

This is quite another thing [alius] from what you said even now.

A good man will not speak a thing that is other from what he thinks.

Epicurus is wholly dif∣ferent [diversus] from A∣ristotle: the one placed happiness in pleasure, the other in vertue.

He had need be upon good ground, who propounds an opinion differing [di∣versus] from all that have been held before.

¶ Nonnunquam etiam Dativum; ut, Huic di∣versum.

Nothing in the world is so unlike [diversus] Ly∣sias, as Isocrates: the one uses few ornaments of speech, the other many.

This is as much differ∣ing [diversus] from that, as black is from white.

A good man is much different [diversus] from a bad man in his work now; and he shall be as much different from him in his reward hereafter: the one shall be saved, and the other damned.

¶ Adjectiva regunt Ab∣lativum significantem causam: ut, Pallidus irâ▪ Incurvus senectute. Livida armis brachia. Trepidus morte futurâ.

He that is hot with la∣bour, should take heed of drinking cold Beer, and of going into cold water.

Scholars are often wea∣ry with study: but seldom weary with play.

Have a care of a man that is red with anger, or pale with envy: the one will mischieve you sudden∣ly, the other secretly.

Live a good life: and you will be so far from be∣ing amated at, that you will be joyful for approach∣ing death.

It is good being on land, when the Sea is rough with storms.

He deserves to be bea∣ten, till he be black with blows, that, do you what you can, with fair words, will still be nasty with sloth.

He is to be pitied, not scoffed at, that is weak with age, and deformed with sickness, or lame with diseases.

Be not proud either of wealth or honour: for you know not how soon you may fall into poverty and dis∣grace.

¶ Forma vel Modus rei adjicitur nominibus in Ablativo: ut, Facies miris modis pallida. No∣mine Grammaticus, re bar∣harus. Cic. Sum tibi na∣turâ parens, praeceptor con∣siliis, Virg.—Trojanus ori∣gine Caesar. Spe dives, re¦pauper. Syrus natione.

Though you be comely with black eyes, and black hair, yet be not proud of your beauty: for nothing is more fading than that.

Many times he that is wise in words, is foolish in deeds.

A Christian for professi∣on, should not be a Heathen for conversation.

He that is a Gentleman by birth, should not be a Clown in behaviour.

To be cleanly in your ap∣parel, and neat in your trimming, will be no dis∣credit to you.

To whom you are a fa∣ther by nature, be a father to him also for advice.

If you be famous any way, have a care to be in∣famous no way: for more will attend to your dis∣grace, than to your honour.

Though he be a Scotch man for Country, and a French man for breeding, yet he is an English man for honesty.

Many times he that is

rich for goods, is poor for grace.

† These Ablatives of the Cause and Manner are said to be governed of some Preposition un∣derstood. For Ter. hath Laetus de amica; and Cic. Fessus de viâ.

¶ Dignus, indignus, praeditus, captus, conten∣tus, extorris auferendi casum adjectum volunt: ut, Terent. Dignus es odio. Qui filium haberem tali ingenio praeditum. Virgil. Atque oculis capti fodêre cubilia talpae. Id. Sorte tuâ contentus abi.

These Adjectives dig∣nus, indignus, praeditus, captus, contentus, with such others will have an Ablative Case: as, Dig∣nus honore. Captus oculis. Virtute praeditus. Paucis contentus. Profugus patriâ suâ Cinna confugit ad par∣tes. Flor. Hujus consilio fretus. Ter. Qui te indig∣num aedilitate judicave∣runt. Cic.

He that challenges the honour of his Ancestors, should so carry himself, as to be worthy the name of his Ancestors.

A good work is worthy of a good reward: and God will give to every one at the last day that re∣ward, whereof his work is worthy.

He is unworthy of a kindness to be done for him, who hath not been grateful for a kindness al∣ready done him.

A Gentleman should be careful to do nothing, that is unworthy of his name and dignity.

It is pity but he that is endued with vertue, should be graced with honour.

It is not fit that manen∣dued with a heavenly soul, should wholly implunge himself into earthly con∣cerns.

It is fit that he who is taken lame [captus] of his hands, so that he cannot work for himself, should be provided for by others.

He that cannot advise himself, is like one that is taken blind: and he that will not be advised by o∣thers, is like one that is taken deaf.

A child taken with the love of learning will do, or suffer any thing for the ob¦taining of it.

He is never happy, how much soever he hath, that i•• not content [contentus] with what he hath.

He that can be content with a little, will live happy, though he never p••ssess much.

To be content with ones own estate, is the greatest and most assured riches.

A wise man is always at home, even when ba∣nished [extorris] his own Country: because to him all the world is but one City, and every place in it his house.

It is no great matter to be banished an earthly Kingdom, so one be not ba∣nished the Kingdom of Heaven.

Sad are those times, which yet both have been, and may be again, when good men flying [profugus] their own Country, shall betake themselves for safe∣ty unto strangers.

One had better live ba∣nisht from his own Coun∣try, with a good conscience, than continue a Citizen in it, with an evil conscience.

He dies safe, that dies relying on the mercy of God, rather than trusting to his own merits.

One had need be well assured of his wisdom and integrity, on whose counsel and authority he relies in any matter of great mo∣ment.

† The Ablatives after these Adjectives are sup∣posed to be governed of a Preposition understood, because after some of them there is one ex∣pressed: as, Libenter à domino agresti ac furi so profugi. Cic. Exul atque extorris ab solo patrio. Liv.

¶ Horum nonnulla Ge∣nitivum interdum vendi∣cant: ut, Ovid. Militia est operis altera digna tui. Virg. Descendam magno∣rum haud quaquam ind••g∣nus avorum.

An honourable person should entertain no thoughts in his mind, bu•• such as are worthy of his honour.

That Prince is worthy of the succession of his Fa∣thers Kingdom, who is the Heir of his Fathers Vertue, as well as of his Crown.

He is unworthy of his Ancestors, who doth not propagate their Honour and Estate, as well as name and family, unto posterity.

He is unworthy of his place, who doth not as well discharge the duties, as enjoy the profits of it.

† They say this Con∣struction is Elliptical: the Genitive being govern∣ed, not of the Adjective expressed, but of a Sub∣stantive understood.

¶ Where note, that dignus, indignus, and con∣tentus, may instead of the Ablative Case have an In∣finitive Mood of a Verb: as, Dignus laudari, Wor∣thy to be praised. Con∣tentus in pace vivere, Con∣tent to live in peace.

He is worthy to be com∣mended, that doth things worthy of commendation.

He is worthy to be be∣lieved, that speaks true, when it might be for his advantage to lie.

He that loves, is worthy to be beloved.

He is unworthy to live, that by evil living disho∣nours that God that gave him life.

He is unworthy to re∣ceive new gifts, who hath not been thankful for the gifts he formerly recei∣ved.

He is unworthy to be be∣lieved, when he speaks true who, when he should have spoken truth, told a lye.

A good man is contented either to depart this world, or to stay in it, at the plea∣sure of God.

He that hath done things worthy of reproof and pu∣nishment, should he con∣tent to be reproved and pu∣nished.

Be content to do, and suffer the will of God, whatsoever he will have thee to do, and suffer.

† I might perhaps have enricht these Rules of Grammar with more Ex∣amples, and illustrated them with Critical An∣notations:

but I have forborn, partly because I would not overcharge this Work with extrane∣ous matter, and partly because it is not impossi∣ble but I may, though it be very improbable that I shall, live to do, what might be desired of that nature in a peculiar Work. Haec hactenus.

Now when the Teacher discerns his Scholar by this Practice to be any thing perfect at understand∣ing and finding out the Natural Order of words; and that he can make a piece of ordinary English into plain and true Latine in that way, then let him put him forward to make his Latine good, as well as true. Now that will be done by teaching him some competency of skill in these Five things, viz. (1) The Artificial Order of Words. (2) The Use of Phrases. (3) The Variation of Phrases. (4) The Elegancies of the Particles. (5) The Idioms of both the Languages English and Latine. Of all which I shall speak something in Order.

CHAP. V. Of the Artificial Order and Elegant placing of Words.

THE Artificial Ordering and Elegant placing of Words conduceth very much to the ma∣ting of Latine Good. To evince this, if there were need, it might suffice to say, that of the very same words, according to the different Placing of them, may be made Latine very Elegant, or very Unele∣gant. For instance, the words Rogo, ut venias ad

me, will be very Elegant, if placed thus, Rogo, ut ad me venias; or thus, Ad me, ut venias, rogo; or thus, Ut ad me venias, rogo; or thus, Ad me, rogo, ut ve∣nias. But very Unelegant, if placed thus: Rogo ut me venias ad; or Rogo ad me venias ut; or Rogo me venias ut ad; or Rogo me venias ad ut; or thus, Ut me venias, rogo ad; or Ut venias me rogo ad: or in∣deed almost, if not altogether, any other way. That the Learner therefore may have some skill in that Art, let the Teacher give him some Rules. And when he hath made his English into plain true La∣tine, according to the Natural Order, let him then according to his Rules, transpose and place it in the Artificial Order; and when he hath done, shew it to his Master: who is to shew him where he fails; and to amend what he mistakes in: and this done, let him again transcribe it into his fair Book, and then commit it to memory, as before.

For the Ease of the Teacher, and Use of the Lear∣ner, I shall here set down a Collection of Rules for Artificial Ordering and Elegant Placing of Words.

Rules of Placing Words.

And first of the Parts of a Compounded Word. The Parts of a Compounded Word may be Ele∣gantly divided by some other Word coming be∣twixt the Parts, as

• Rem verò publicam amisimus. Cic.
• De juris quoque Consultis Suet.
• Quod judicium cunque. Cic.
• Me certè in omnibus rerum satis nostraeque con∣junctioni amorique facturum—Cic.
• Priùs inquit quàm hoc circulo excedas. Val. Max.
• Coturnices antè veniunt quàm grues. Plin
• Cùm multis annis post peti••ssem, quàm Praetores fuissent. Cic.

Secondly of Words in a Sentence.

1. First, The Words that go together in the Natural Order, are parted asunder in the Order Ar∣tificial, and the Gov••rned come before those that govern; viz. the Oblique Cases in the beginning, the Verb in the end, and the Nominative Case in the middle betwixt both, as

Muni••issimam hostium civitatem Caesar occupavit.

Petulanti bonos linguâ consectari desine.

2. Secondly, The Substantive of the Genitive Case is elegantly set before the Substantive that go∣verns it, as

Immortatitatis amore flagravit. Cic.

Cum ipsius victoriae conditione jure omnes victi occi∣dissemus, clementiae tuae judicio conservati sumus Cic.

3. Thirdly, The Adjective is usually set before the Substantive, as

Ampla domus dedecori domino saepe fit. Cic.

Tenacissimi sumus eorum, quae rudibus annis per∣cepimus. Quintil.

Exceptions.

Yet several sorts of Adjectives are sometimes elegantly set after their Substantives.

(1.) Partitives; as omnis and nullus.

Virtutis law omnis in actione consistit. Cic.

Ut ad te ••cribendi meo arbitratu facultas nulla detur. Cic.

Majus mihi dare beneficium nullum potes. Cic.

So Nemo

At verò hujus gloriae, C. Caesar, quam es pa••lò antè adeptus, socium habes nominem. Cic.

(2.) Numerals, as

Dies c••rciter quindecim iter secerunt. Caes.

Ad hominum millia decem undique coegit. Caes.

Omnes omnium charitates patria una complexa est. Cic.

(3) Comparatives and Superlatives, especially in the end of a Sentence, where they many times stand very gracefully: as,

Nihil illo regno spoliatius, nihil rege egentius. Cic.

Imperatorem liberalissimum, atatem opportunissi∣mam, commendationem certè singularem habes. Cic.

(4.) Pronominals, as Ardeo cupiditate incredibili, ne{que} ut ego arbitro•• reprehendendâ, nomen ut nostrum scriptis illustretut & celebretur tuis. Cic.

Sunt ingeniis nostris semina innata virtutum. Cic.

(5.) Adjectives of two Syllables, if their Substan∣tives be of more Syllables; as,

Quis animo aequo videt eum, quem impurè ac fla∣gitiosè putet vivere? Cic.

Quae res habet inflationem magnam. Cic.

4. Fourthly, Betwixt the Adjective and the Sub∣stantive several things are elegantly inserted.

(1.) If the Substantive and Adjective be of the Genitive Case, then the former Substantive will come elegantly between them: as,

Quid credas aliud, quàm divinae partem mentis his inesse? Quint. de Apib.

Caesareae clementia Majestatls pacem & tranquilli∣tatem Provinciis dedit.

Philosophia omnium mater Artium—Cic.

(2.) If the Substantive and Adjective be not of the Genitive Case, then the Substantive of the Ge∣nitive Case will come elegantly betwixt them: as,

Haec est vera justitiae laus—

Ob inclytam viri religionem. Flor.

(3.) If the Substantive be governed of any Pre∣position, the Preposition will come elegantly be∣tween the Substantive and the Adjective: as,

Certâ de causâ nondum adducor ut faciam. Cic.

Hoc assequêre, ut quam in partem accipias minus laborem. Cic.

Quam ob rem venerim, dicam. Plaut.

(4.) If the Substantive be not governed of any Preposition, yet a Preposition with his Casual word may elegantly come between the Adjective and his Substantive: as,

Casta ad vi••••m matrona parendo imperat. Publ.

(5.) Between the Adjective and the Substantive, may elegantly be set not only Nouns, and Preposi∣tions alone, or with their Cases; but single words of any sort almost: as,

Pronoun. Quamcunque ei fidem dederis, praestabo. Cic.

Ego post supplicationes mihi decretas in Dalmatiam profectus sum. Cic. Subcisiva quaedam tempora in∣currunt, quae ego perire non patior. Cic.

Verb. Hoc affirmo, & hoc pace dicam tuâ. Cic.

Adverb. Maximam verò partem quasi suo jure for∣tuna sibi vendicat. Cic.

Neque ullo unquam aetas de tuis laudibus conti∣cesset. Cic.

Yea Clauses: as, Magnum profectō laborem Caesar assumpsit, quem fermè ab ipsis ad nos venisse Gadi∣bus aiunt, ut hostes suae quidem Majestati rebelles, no∣strk autem supra modum rebus infestos armis subige∣ret. Quam ob causam perpetuum illi amorem & gra∣tiaus debemus immortalem.

Note. If any thing come between the Substantive and the Adjective, then may either indifferently be set before other.

5. Fifthly, The Relative qui is elegantly set be∣fore the expressed Substantive, to which it refers, especially if any other words come between: as,

Quem cum isto sermonem habueris, procul stan•• accepi.

Propter eum, quem sibi ipse finxerat, principatum. Cic.

Note. If qui in one clause of a Sentence answer to hic, is, or idem in another clause; that clause in which qui is, will very elegantly come first.

Qu••m puerum vidisti formosum, hunc vide•• de∣formem in senectâ. Varro.

Qui semel verecundiae fines transi•••• it; eum bene & na••iter oportet esse impudentem. Cic.

Qui dolet rebus alicujus adversis, idem alicujus etiam secundis dolet. Cic.

6. S••xthly, A Pronoun Primitive comes elegant∣ly between a Pronoun Possessive, and the Substan∣tive that it agrees with: as,

Familiaritas mihi tua non injucunda ••st.

Tuo tibi judicio est utendum. Cic.

Gravi teste privatus sum amoris summi erga te mei. Cic.

7. Seventhly, The Pronoun ipse being to be set after any Pronoun Primitive in an Oblique Case, may elegantly come either before, or after it, in the Nominative Case: as,

Qui ipse sibi sapiens prodesse nequit, nequicquam sapit. Cic.

Odi sapientem qui sibi ipse sapiens non est. Cic.

Haec scripsi; non ut de me ipse dicerem, sed ut—Cic.

Non egeo medicinâ, me ipse consolor. Cic.

Tibi unum timendum sit, ne ipse tibi defuisse vi∣de••re. Cic.

Qui me violare volent, se ipsi judicabunt. Cic.

8 Eighthly, Prepositions mostly come before their Casual words: as,

Illa p••aesidia, quae pro templis omnibus cernitis. Cic.

Quâ in vitâ tantum abest ut voluptates sectentur,

etiam curas, sollicitudines, vigilias perferunt. Cic.

Ego ipsi, quòd de suâ sententia decesserit, poeni∣tendum puto. Cic.

Accepi à te literas, quibus videris vereri, ut epistolas illas acceperim. Cic.

Yet some Prepositions are not unelegantly set after their Case, not only in Poets, but in Orators; as,

Neminem posse dare alteri matrimonium, nisi quem penes sit patrimonium. Quintil.

Cordi mihi fuit, priusquam ad te irem, quaerere exploraréque, quonam modo veteres nostri particu∣lâ istâ, quâ de agitur, usi sunt. A Gell.

Quos adversum multi ex Bithyniâ volentes oc∣currêre falsum filium arguituri—Sal.

Quae si quis inter societas aut est, aut fuit, aut fu∣tura est, eorum est habendus ad summum naturae bonum optimus beatissimusque comitatus. Cic.

Consequeris tamen, ut eos ipsos, quos contra sta∣tuas aequos placatósque dimittas. Cic.

Perturbari animos necesse esse dicunt, sed adhi∣bent modum, quem ultra progredi non oporteat. Cic.

Quem locum Aegyptum versus finem imperii ha∣buere Carthaginienses. Sal.

Postulavit ut aliquem populus daret, quicum com∣municaret. Cic.

Qu. Suffidium, quocum mihi omnes necessitudines sunt, diligentius commendo. Cic.

Note. Cum is always set after me, te, se, nobis, and * 1.59 vobis; and tenus after his Casual word.

And between the Preposition and his Case may other words be elegantly set, especially the Genitive Case governed of that Substantive, which the Pre∣position comes before: as,

Per ego te Deos oro, ut ne illis animum inducas credere. Ter.

Ex animi sententiâ. Ter.

Pro rerum magnitudine. Cic.

9. Ninthly, Betwixt the Participle and that Per∣son of the Verb Sum, whereof the Preterperfect Tense of a Verb Passive or Deponent is made up; there may some word be elegantly placed: as,

Diu sum equidem reluctatus.

Decretum à Senatu est.

Hujus gloriae, quam es paulò antè adeptus, socium habes neminem. Cic.

10. Tenthly, The Vocative Case; the Verbs in∣quit and ait, and the Particles enim and autem, ha••e usually something placed in the beginning of a Sen∣tence before them: as,

Quanquam te Marce fili, annum jam audientem Cratippum, idque Athenis—Cic.

Ennio delector, ait,—Cic.

Quam inquit, vellem nescire literas. Suet. Ner. c. 10.

Nec enim is es quem forma ista declarat. Cic.

Inanimatum est enim omne, quod impulsu agitur externo. Cic.

Erat autem difficile rem tantam inchoatam relin∣quere. Cic.

In quo autem desiderare te significabis. Cic.

11. Eleventhly, Words of Near and of Contrary signification, are elegantly placed together in a Sentence: as,

Eveniunt digna dignis. Sal.

Doctus indocto quid praestat? quod caeco videns. Plaut.

Casta ad virum matrona parendo imperat. Publ.

12. Twelfthly, In a Contexture of things related each to other what is the more worthy, or before the other in nature, is elegantly placed formost in order: as,

Mors in claris viris & foeminis dux in coelum solet esse. Cic.

Dies, noctesque torqueor. Cic. Tu, si dies noctesque memineris. Cic. Fam. 11. 5.

13. Thirteenthly, In extenuating, the more weighty things ought to go before, in aggravating, to follow the less or lighter; as, Civem Romanum vincire, verberare, in crucem tollere.

Nulla crux ibi fuit, nulla nex, nulla verberatio, imo ne custodia quidem.

14. Fourteenthly, In the placing of words, avoid all such setting of them, as may beget Obscurity, Am∣biguity, or Ill sound.

(1.) Obscurity, as in that Sentence.

Fuit in hâc virtus ista quondam republicâ, for

Fuit ista quondam in hâc republicâ virtus. Cic.

(2.) Ambiguity; as in those Da temetum: which Ambiguity; as in those Date metum: which because they may be mistaken either for other; therefore it is better to say Temetum da; or Metum date. So rather say Atria summa, than Summa atria, because this last way the words may be mistaken for Summa tria, or Sumatria, an Isle. Rather say Scivine ego, than egone scivi: because this last may be mista∣ken for ego nescivi.

(3.) Ill sound either—

1. By the meeting together of many either Vo∣wels; as, Postea eò itum est, for which rather say eò pòst itum est: or harsh Consonants; as, Ingens strepi∣tus; for which rather say strepitus ingens. So, Si puer ingenio eo esset: for which rather say eo si puer esset ingenio, quo esse dicitur, &c.

2. By the coming together of many either Mono∣syllables; as, Collocutus sum cum illo; for which ra∣ther say Collocutus cum illo sum Or words of many syllables of like sound, as Harum scribendarum lite∣rarum

occasio haec est; for which rather say, Hurum scribendi literarum haec occasio est.

A prudent intermixture of words long and short, of like and of different sound, beginning and end∣ing interchangeably with Vowels and Consonants, is the one remedy of these faults.

The greatest care for the well running of words, is to be liad in the beginning and end, especially in the four or five last Syllables.

Those Sentences are thought to be closed sweetly, that end in words of like Syllables with these; vi∣deatur; cariorem; parabat; tuum: Coepisse; tri∣bueretur; miserim; conservâssem; or any Tense of Sum after a Participle of the Praeter Tense, or Fu∣ture in dus.

But in these things liberty is very great, all things being to be measured by the ear; in the judgment of which, if a Sentence sound well, it matters not much what Syllables it consists of.

Thirdly of Clauses in a Period.

As Words and Phrases in a simple Sentence, so the several Clauses of a compounded Sentence, may be placed with more or less Elegancy: touching which the only Rule is, That the more frequent the Trans∣position is, the more Elegant is the Sentence, so no disorder or obscurity follow thereon: as for Ex∣ample.

Nihil allatum est, ne rumoris quidem. Nihil, ne rumoris quidem allatum est.

Si à nobis deficis, molestè fero. Molestè fero, si à nobis deficis. Molestè, si à nobis deficis, fero.

Rogo, ut ad me venias.

Ʋt ad the venias, rogo. Ad me ut venias, rogo. Ad me, rogo, ut venias.

Gratum est mihi. quod ad me scribis. Quod ad me scribis, gratum mihi est. Mihi, quod ad me scribis, gratum est.

The main thing here to be avoided is the Hyper∣baton, or confused intermixture of Words, belong∣ing to one clause with the words that belong to another, which either alters the Sense, or renders the Sentence extremely difficult: as if one should say

Quem cum isto sermonem audivi, habuisti; for Quem cum isto habuisti sermonem, audivi.

Is amicior mihi vivit, atque nullus est; for Amicior mihi nullus vivit, atque i•• est; or Nullus mihi amicior, atque is est, vivit.

Sunt oculos clari, qui cernis sydera tanquam: for Cernis oculos, qui clari sunt tanquam sydera.

Penè macros arsit, dum turdos versat in igne; for Penè arsit, dum macros in igne turdos versat.

And these few Rules or Observations may suffice to be instilled into a Learner, till Time and Reading do perfect his Style. He that would see more Ob∣servations of this Nature, may consult Mr. Brinstie's Gram. School, ch. 11. Mr. Clark's Dux Grammaticus p. 267. and Formulae Oratoriae pag. 335. Edit. anno 1659. * 1.60 But especially Butchler's Elegancies; Fran∣ciscus Sylvius's Progymnasmata; and Comenius▪s Ars Ornatoria, sive Grammatica Elegans, especially ch. 4.

The perusal of which Books cannot but be hugely improving to any mgemous Learner, as contaning in them a world of the choicest and most elegant passages, that are to be sound in the best extant Authors, brought as instances of their Observations and Examples of their Rules. And thus much touching the Artificial Ordering and Elegant Placing of Words in Sentences.

CHAP. VI. Of the Ʋse of Phrases.

IF the Artifical Ordering of plain words conduce much to the making of the Learner's Latine good, much more will a handsome contexture of Elegant R••man Phrases, or Forms of speaking, used by the best and purest Writers of the Latine To••gue. Of those therefore the Learner is to be exhorted to get into his head what store his memory shall be able to bear; and to be taught how to use them in his own Compositions. For the first of these, the getting of his Memory well stored with Phrases, which is a work of some difficulty, requiring time, and diligence, and observation, the Teacher may be pleased to put his Learner upon some of these or the like practices: As first to have a fair Paper Book on purpose to write down Latine Phrases and Ele∣gant Forms of speaking in, as he shall occasionally meet with them in his Lessons; and to write them daily down therein; and give a weekly account of them without Book unto his Master Next to make an Abstract of all the Forms of speaking, and Phra∣ses contained in Godwins Latine Antiquities, and to

repeat them to the Master by heart three or four times over, in parts, by ten, or twenty, or a greater number in a morning, according as his capacity shall be; and then by double that number, and still in larger proportion till all be well imprinted into the memory Where that they may be the better re∣tained, let the Learner throughly read and digest that Book, till he be so well acquainted with the ground and rise of every Form or Phrase, that he can read••ly upon hearing the Phrase, give the true account of the rise and occasion thereof. After this to make an Abstract of all the Forms and Phrases contained in that excellent little Book c••lled Her∣mes Anglo Latinus where are so many excellent Forms and Phra••es as well nigh comprehend all the Regular Constructions of Grammar, yea and the Fi∣gurative ones too: and let them also in the same Method and manner be gotten by heart, and repeat∣ed. He may be much improved also in this way by what may be found of this nature in my own Treati∣ses of English Particles and Idioms. Lastly, the Tea∣cher may make an Abstract of some one Phrase-book of best note and account (such as Winchester•• Phra∣ses, Mr. Huises Phrases, or the like) taking only two or three of the best Phrases of every Head, and give his Scholar that to transcribe and get by heart. These Practices may be some present trouble to the doer: yet done for once, they are done for always; and the benefit is such as will vastly recompense the time and trouble. And because it is my design to save both the Teacher and Learner all the time and labour that I can, therefore having two such Abstracts out of Godwins A••tiquities, and Hermes Anglo Latinus as I spake of, lying by me many years ago made for my private use. I have thought good here to communicate them. The Teacher may, I

know, make much better of his own, especially be∣ing that I had not one of the Books by me, to com∣pare my old Collection withal: but in the mean time he may be pleased to make use of these, which I do the more earnestly recommend to use, in re∣gard the One, besides the many choice Phrases that it contains, gives a great insight into the Roman Cu∣stoms, especially if recourse be had occasionally unto the Author for the understanding of the Phrases, and so may prove a successful key for the opening of many difficulties in the best of Latine Authors, Cicero especially: The Other, besides the many Ele∣gant Idioms or Proprieties of English and Latine that it comprehends, gives a good i•• let into the know∣ledge of the Ornate Grammatical Construction, for the most, if not all, of whose Rules it furnishes the Reader with very proper and pertinent Examples.

A Collection of Phrases out of Dr. Godwins Roman Antiquities.

Lib. 1.

Sect. 1. Ch. 1.

To build a new Town. To set out where the Walls of a Town should be.

Chap. 2. We flie to thee as to our only refuge.

C. 10. To keep the Assises.

To appoint where Assises shall be kept.

C. 15. Huge Books.

C. 17. An unconstant, un∣setled mind.

Led horses, spare horses.

He is to be barred from giving his voice.

C. 18. From the beginning to the ending

C. 19 An ignoble Person; one of the Hinds.

To go into the Field; enter the Lists.

C. 20. To appoint where a Temple should be built. Lib. ••. Sect. 2.

Chap. 1. Ʋnfeig••edly; like a Roman; from the heart.

Free Denisons of Rome made such by cooptation.

To make free of Rome; of any City.

C. 2. Cursed to Hell.

Senators of Rome.

Senators of the Lower House; Members of the House of Commons.

C. 3. A Troop Horse; a Horse for the Service of the War.

Men of no account; infe∣rior, base persons.

C. 4. An upstart Citizen.

A Gentleman; a Knight of the first head.

C. 6. Free-born Citizens.

Free-made Citizens.

To make one free; to set

at liberty.

I have a mind to give him his steedom

He is a Free man

He is a Noble man

To pay ones debt.

To run into debt.

To sue for payment.

URbem novam con∣dere.

Urbem designare ara∣tro.

Moenia designare ara∣tro.

Ad te tanquam ad asy∣lum, aram confugimus.

Forum agere.

Forum indicere.

Libri Elephantini.

Ingenium volaticum, de∣sultotium.

Equi desultorii.

De ponte dejiciendus est.

A carceribus ad metam; ab ovo ad mala.

Inter cuneo•• residet.

In arenam descendere.

Effari Templa; sistere fana.

More Romano.

Civitate donati.

Civitate donare.

Diis inferis devoti.

Patres conscripti.

Senatores minorum gen∣tium.

Equus publicus, milita∣ris.

Ignota capita; sine no∣mine turba. Poet.

Novus & reptitius civis. Sal.

Novus homo.

Cives originarii; ingenui.

Liberti, libertini, Civita∣te donati.

Emanu aliquem emitte∣re;

ad pileum vocare; vindictâ liberare.

Hunc liberum esse volo.

Habet tria nomina.

Nomina liberare.

Nomina facere.

Nomina exigere.

LIB. II.

Sect. 1. Ch. 1.

A good cudgelling.

Gods of the greater Nati∣ons.

Gods of the lesser Nati∣ons.

Country Gods, Tutelar Gods

Indifferent, neuter, common Gods.

The Good Angel, the Evil Angel.

The Womens Guardian An∣gels.

It fell out ill.

No man without his mis∣fortune.

He makes much of himself, he pampers his kite, carcass.

A very pinch belly, a thief to his own belly, car∣cass

The Grace-cup.

In a little Cottage.

A man that hath no certain abiding place, setled dwelling.

A very Eat all, one that plays the glutton, greedy gut, leaves not so much as manners in the d••sh.

Sect. 2.

Ch. 2. It is seed time.

He makes a feast without wine.

Ch. 6. With good luck, luckily.

With ill luck.

To begin a thing.

A good sign, we shall speed well.

Protectors of the Commons.

C. 9. He gave over being Priest, left his Priest∣hood.

C. 10. The Battel was doubtful, fought with various success, now one side had the better, now the other.

By ones own strength.

Dainty cheer.

C. 11. He hath sent him a challenge—challenged him into the field.

A denunciation of war.

C. 12. It is undoubtedly true, true as Gospel.

An hard task.

C 13. One thief accuseth another, the pot calls the pan burnt-arse.

C. 14. A rude fellow, a lewd person, a very ras¦cal.

C. 15. A costly supper, a sumptuous feast, a feast for an Abbot, a com∣mencement-supper, an in∣stallation supper.

C 19. To enterprise a thing without due reverence, or preparation.

Must I be whipt for your faults?—suffer for your rogueries?

Mind what you are about.

To take a light taste of a thing.

He grows in grace.

To stay the sacrifice.

He cannot stay till grace be said.

The first offerings.

C. 20. Witnesses to a con∣tract.

To marry a wife.

The marriage-bed.

Where you are Lord I am Lady; where you are Jack, I am Gill

I have as good right in the estate as you.

I will have nothing to do—no dealing with you.

Caesar hath divorced Pom∣peia.

He hath cast off all good∣ness

C 21. It is past help,—cure, all••s in vain, to no pur∣pose, there is no hope we have done what we can, and can do no good.

You have your leave, you may be packing, be gone, have leave to depart.

To make a Funeral Ser¦mon,—Oration for one.

It is time now, now's the time.

An old carle, a down man, one that hath one foot already in the grave.

Sect. 3.

C. 1. The fourth day of April.

Holy-day cloaths.

C. 2. It is a secret, no body knows the reason of it.

C. 5. Worse scared than hurt, better than we looked for, not so ill as we feared all will be well, the old Father dances.

He has lost both his labour and cost.

C. 6. Having a mind to make bets,—to lay wa∣gers.

To fight at whorlebats.

C. 7. He was hummed ex∣traordinari••y▪ highly ap∣plauded for his verses,—sermon, cried up migh∣tily.

C. 9. To make a solemn vow unto God.

To make a vow to build a Church.

To bind ones self to make good his vow.

Lyable to make good his vow.

Bound to performance of his vow.

To have ones desire accom∣plished.

C. 10. Hirelings, persons hired to play prizes.

A flourish before the fight.

It is one thing to flourish, another to fight.

Weapons for show.

Weapons for fight.

To fight at sharps, with na∣ked weapons.

To piss backward, change ones purpose, go back with his word.

He is in a maze, driven to change his mind, put to a puzzle.

A conquest after a combat

He has won many a prize

Discharged from his pains.

He hath a mind to put a trick upon you.

To play at blindmans buf∣fet, to wink and strike.

He gives him a challenge,—dares him to fight.

C. 11. The end of a mans life.

A man fit for all parts,—good at any thing.

Recreatory diversions.

A lofty style.

C. 13 He hath b••oken the league of Hospitality

Size ace, a goose to a chic∣ken, a very unequal com∣parison.

A winning cast, a luckie cast

A losing cast, an ill chance, an unluckie throw.

I will win the horse or lose the saddle, win all or lose all.

To whip a top.

To play at even or odd.

To leave boys play, to be past a child.

Cross or pi••e.

C. 14. He did invite me very earnestly,—was very earnest with me to come.

Ʋnbidden guests.

He needed but small invi∣tation.

From the beginning to the ending

The fi••st dish at the Feast.

The last dish at the Feast.

The prime, chief dish.

A Light Supper.

A Dole in meat or money.

A well furnished Table,—great varieties, a plentiful Supper, great chear.

A thin Supper, slender Ta¦ble, small Chear, scanty Provisions.

Argumentum bacillinum.

Dii majorum Gentium, nobiles, consentes.

Dii minorum Gentium, Dii indigetes, Semidei.

Dii patrii, Dii tutelares.

Dii communes.

Bonus genius, Malus ge∣nius.

Junones.

Diis iratis factum Plaut. Poen.

Quisque suos patimur manes.

Genio indulget.

Genium defraudat.

Poculum charitatis, boni genii.

Parvo sub lare. Hor.

Homo incerti laris.

Lari sacrificat.

Credenda Ceres arvis, Ov.

Cereri sacrificat.

Bonis avibus, auspiciis, ave sinistrâ, cornice sinistrâ.

Malis avibus.

Auspicari rem:

Intonuit laevum.

Tribuni plebis.

Sacerdotio abibat.

Vario Marte pugnatum est.

Proprio Marte.

Saliares dapes.

Arietem emisit.

Clarigatio.

Sibyllae folium est.

Laboriosius est quàm Si∣byllae folia colligere.

Clodius accusat moechos.

Circulator Cybeleius.

Coena pontificia, aditia∣lis.

Accedere ad rem illotis manibus.

Accedere ad rem illotis pedibus.

Meum tergum stultitiae tuae subdes succeda∣neum?

Hoc age.

Libare.

Mactus est virtute.

Hostiare victimam, ma∣ctare, ferire hostiam.

Sacra haud immolata de∣vorat.

Prima libamina.

Signatores.

Ducere uxorem.

Genialis lectus.

Ubi tu Cajus, ibi ego Caja.

Conditione tuâ non utar, Res tuas tibi habeto, agito.

Caesar Pompeiae nuncium remisit.

Virtuti nuncium remi∣sit.

Conclamatum est,

Ilicet.

Defunctum pro rostris laudare.

Jam tempus est.

Silicernium.

Pridie nonas Aprilis.

Purpura Megalensis.

Est inter arcana Cereris.

Salva res est, saltat senex.

Operam & oleum perdi∣dit, opera & impen••a periit.

Sponsionibus concitatus.

B••llare cestu.

Fregit subsellia versu, o∣ratione, clamatum re∣ctè, bene, pulchrè, Grande sophos.

Vota nuncupare, facere,

Vovere templum.

Signare votum.

Voti reus.

Damnatus voti, voto.

Damnari voti, voto.

Auctorati.

Praeludium.

Aliud est ventilare, aliud pugnare.

Lusoria, exercitoria tela.

Decretoria arma.

Dimicare ad certum, ver∣sis armis pugnare.

Cedere, demigrare de gradu.

De mentis statu dejicitur, deturbatur.

Palma lemuiseata.

Plurimarum palmarum homo.

Rude donatus.

Tragulam in te injicere adornat. Plaut

And abata••um more pug∣nare.

Minimo provocat.

Virae humanae Catastro∣phe.

Omnium scenarum ho∣mo.

Diludia.

Sophocleus cothurnus.

T••sseram hospitii confre∣git.

〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉: Cous ad chium.

Jactus pronus, plenus se∣nio, Venus, Cous.

Jactus supinus, inanis, canis, canicula, chi∣us.

Aut ter sex, aut tres tes∣serae.

Buxum torquere flagello.

Ludere par impar.

Nuces relinquere.

Vel capita, vel navim.

Penulam mihi scidit.

Muscae, umbrae.

Illius ego vix tetigi pe∣nulam, tamen remansi••.

Ab ovo ad mala.

Prooemium Coenae.

Epilogus Coenae.

Caput Coenae, fundus & fundamentum Coenae ••ips.

Sportula.

Coena recta, dubia.

Coena ambulatoria.

LIB. III.

Sect. 1.

Chap. 1. At latter Lam∣mas, at Nevermass.

The fifth of January.

The fourth of January.

The thirteenth day of Ja∣nuary.

The twelfth day of Janua∣ry.

The first day of January.

The last day of December.

Fortunate days.

Ʋnfortunate days.

Holy days.

Working days.

Half Holy days.

A Law-day.

Whole Court or Leet days.

Half Court days.

Non Leet days.

A Common Barreter, wrangling fellow.

C. 2. An Old man.

Old men have a Writ of Ease given them, i. e. are exempted from gi∣ving their voices in the Assemblies.

By word of mouth.

I am for the old way, love no changing.

He had not seven voices for him.

He had not a man against him, every body stood for him.

A chief heir, heir to the main inheritance.

A Legatee, one that hath a legacy given him.

Confused notes, foul papers.

Books of Accompt.

Statute Books or Books of Record.

Letters of Protection.

Bills of Sale.

A letter, a Letter-carrier.

We opened, broke up the letter.

To turn Cat in the pan, say and unsay, make a re∣cantation.

He knew his own hand and seal.

To read over a Book.

To bring to an end.

To publish a Law to be made.

To move that a Law be made.

To record a Law.

To proclaim or publish a Law after it be made.

To cancel a Law.

The falling sickness.

C. 3. To forbid the proceed∣ings.

C. 4. Authors of best Ac∣count, Classical Authors.

Men of small means.

To sound the Alarm.

To sound the Retreat.

C. 6. To sue for an Office.

To enter into an Office.

To depart out of an Office.

To have as many voices as the Law d••th require.

To have the most voi••es, yet not so many as the Law requireth.

C. 7. He is ready, in a readiness.

A loose Woman, lewd S••rumpet.

To buckle, make ready for War.

Peace is to be preferred before War.

He is past a Stripling, grown up to years of dis∣cretion.

He is past a Child, grown to a mans estate.

A Suitor for an Office.

A young Student.

To change his apparel, put on mourning Weeds.

His Majesties principal Se∣cretary.

Childhood

An embroidered Gown.

C. 8. Near is my shirt, but nearer my skin.

He hath lost his money.

To arm himself.

To deflour a Virgin.

Lib. 3. Sect. 2.

Chap. 2 To discharge one of his Office.

To give place yield unto.

C. 3. Toe Decree of the Senate.

To propound a matter to the Senate.

I am fully perswaded of his opinion.

He was favourably heard in the Senate.

The Senate neglected, con∣demned him.

To strain, or seize on a mans goods.

C. 4. The Consul, Major Elect.

C. 5. The Authority of Ma∣gistrates to inquire into and reform manners.

To depose a Senator.

To pull one down a peg.

Five, ten, fifteen years space.

To purge, to muster an Ar∣my.

C. 6. To grant out a Writ or Action against a man.

To pass judgment on one.

To see and allow the deli∣very of the thing, or per∣son whereon judgment is passed.

To sell a mans life.

C. 7. Within an hundred miles.

C. 16. An Excommunicate person.

C. 22. To take Provinces by agreement.

To have the Provinces by lot.

Lib. 3. Sect. 3.

Chap. 2. Loss of life.

Disfranchisement.

To banish one out of the City.

To set a mans goods to sale that will not appear in Court.

C. 4. To prick, egge a man on.

C. 5. Little Ease.

C. 8. Saved from the Gal∣lows.

C. 9. To be condemned to the drawing of water.

I will send you to Bride∣wel, to the House of Correction.

To be condemned to the Mines.

A Rogue that is burnt in the hand, brow, shoulder.

Lib. 3. Sect. 4.

Chap. 1. To cite one into the Court.

C. 2. To judge in person.

To judge by proxie.

They are acquitted.

To be cast in ones Suit.

C. 4. Condemned unheard, without being heard speak for himself.

To work underhand, con∣spire against one.

To circumvent, deceive, cheat, oppress with false judgment procured by bribery or confederacy.

Citizens by birth.

Citizens by donation.

To render ones name to the Magistrate.

C. 5. To make a speech to the people.

To assemble the people to give their voices.

C. 9. To be in chief com∣mand, Commander in chief in the Army.

To be set to sale.

To buy of one that hath no power, no right, nothing to do to sell.

The sale of Caesar's goods.

Goods set at sale.

To put in bands to answer.

To shew he hath a mind to buy.

C. 12. A Pig with a pud∣ding in the belly.

C. 14. Let him be begged for a fool.

He is made sole heir.

An heir to some part of the wh••le.

To forge a crime.

To enter an action.

To chuse Judges by lot.

To play the false Proctor.

To desist in his accusation, let his suit fall.

A mortgaging of land to pay money.

To receive a mortgage, take land for security.

To pay, repay.

C. 19. To plead sickness for non-appearance.

C. 20. To put money to use.

To produce witnesses on both sides.

To put in sureties.

To pay his Fine.

To stand to the Verdict of the Court.

To make an end—, an a∣greement betwixt them∣selves.

To tax the costs and char∣ges of the suit.

A citation of one into the Court.

To accuse one of a crime.

To enter an action against one.

To demand bail, sureties for appearance.

To enter into Bond for ap∣pearance.

Sentence is put off till the third day.

To swear he doth not accuse falsly, or maliciously.

An execution to seize on ones goods.

He made his appearance in the Court.

We must have longer time to consider.

To sit upon Life and Death on a man.

C. 21. To argue the case pro and con, to fight hand to hand.

To offer to lay a wager with one.

To lay a wager with one.

To bind himself to pay what shall be adjudged.

To bind himself to stand to the judgment of the Court.

Ad Calendas Graecas.

Nonae Januariae, Januarii.

Pridie nonarum or non•••• Jan.

Idus Januarii.

Pridie Iduum, vel Id•••• Januarii.

Kalendae Januariae.

Pridie Calend. Jan.

Dies albi.

Dies atri, postriduani, Aegyptiaci, nefasti.

Dies Festi, feriati, feriae.

Dies profesti.

Dies intercisi.

Dies comitialis.

Dies Fasti

Dies ex parte Fasti.

Dies nefasti.

Homo comitialis.

Depontanus.

Sexagenarii de ponte dejiciendi.

Vivâ voce.

Antiquum volo.

Suffragiorum puncta non tulit septem.

Omne tulit punctum.

Haeres primae cerae, in pri∣mo gradu institutus, ex toto asse.

Haeres est in imâ cerâ, legatarius.

Adversaria.

Tabulae accepti & ex∣pensi.

Tabulae publicae.

Tabulae novae.

Tabulae auctionariae.

Tab••llae, Tabellarius.

Linum incidimus.

Stylum invertere.

Cognovit manum & sig∣num suum.

Evolvere librum.

Ad umbilicum ducere.

Promulgare legem.

Rogare legem.

Ferre legem.

Figere legem, tabulam.

Refigere legem.

Morbus comitialis.

Obnunciare, intercedere.

Classici scriptores.

Tenuis censûs homines, proletarii.

Classicu•• ••anere.

Receptu•• ••anere.

Ambire magistratum.

Inire magistratum.

Abire magistratu.

Conficere legitima suf∣fragia

Explere suffragia.

Altè praecinctus est.

Mulier togata.

Ad saga ire, ad certamen se accingere.

Cedant saga, arma togae.

Excessit ex ephebis.

Virilem togam sumpsit.

Candidatus.

Eloquentiae Candidatus.

Mutare vestem.

Candidatus Principis, Quaestor candidatus.

Ae••as praetexta.

Toga p••cta, palmata, tri∣umphalis.

Tunica pallio propior est.

Zonam perdidit.

Arma induere.

Zonam solvere.

Fasces abrogare.

Fasces submittere.

Senatûs consultum.

Referre ad Senatum.

In illius sententiam iturus sum, manibus pedibús∣que discessurus.

Senatus ei dabatur, ste••it in Senatu.

Jacuit in Senatu.

Caedere pignora.

Concidere pignora.

Capere pignora.

Auferre pignora.

Ad consulatum designa∣tus.

Virgula censoria.

Senatu movere.

Tribu movere.

Lustrum, duo, tria lu∣stra.

Condere lustrum.

Dare actionem.

Dicere jus.

Rem, hominem addi∣cere.

Addicere sanguinem all∣cujus.

Intra centesimum Lapi∣dem.

Homo sacer.

Comparare Provincias.

Sortiri Provincias.

Ultimum supplicium.

Capitis diminutio.

Alicui aqua & igni inter∣dicere, hominem pro∣scribere.

Bona alicujus proscri∣bere.

Stimulo fodere.

Mala mansio.

De Lapide empti, à furca redempti.

In Antliam damnari.

In pistrinum te dedam.

Damnari in metallum, in opus metalli.

Nebulo stigmaticus, lite∣ratus.

In jus vocare.

Judicare.

Judicicum dare.

Secundum eos lis datur:

Lite, causâ cadere.

Indictâ causâ damnatus.

Coire.

Circumvenire, circumscri∣bere.

Cives Nati.

Cives Adscripti, civita∣te donati.

Apud Praetorem profite∣ri, nomen profiteri.

Agere ad populum.

Agere cum populo.

Esse cum imperio.

Publico praeconi, hastae subjici.

A malo auctore emere.

Hasta Caesaris.

Bona suspensa.

Dejicere libellos.

Digitum tollere.

Porcellus Trojanus.

Ad agnatos & gentiles deducendus est.

Haeres in totum assem in∣stitutus est.

Haeres ex toto asse.

Calumniari.

Dicam scribere.

Dicam sortiri.

Praevaricari.

Tergiversari.

Manc patio fiduciaria.

Accipere fiduciam.

Pendo, rependo.

Morbum excusare.

Pecuniam occupare, foe∣nerari, foenori dare, collocare.

Litem contestari.

Satisdationes facere.

Judicatum solvere.

Rem ratam habere.

Lites redimere, pactio∣nem facere.

Litem aestimare. Arbitros inter civitates dat, qui litem aestiment, atque poenam constituant, Caes.

In jus vocatio.

Postulare aliquem de cri∣mine.

Alicui actionem, litem intendere, diem di∣cere.

Vadari reum.

Promittere vadimonium.

Lis, reus comperendina∣tur.

Calumniam jurare, deju∣rare, in litem jurare.

Edictum peremptorium.

Se stitit.

Amplius cognoscendum,

De Capite alicujus quae∣rere.

Manum manu conserere,

Sponsione provocare,

Contendere ex provoca∣tione.

Satisdare judicatum sol∣vi.

Satisdare rem ratam ha∣bere.

LIB. IV.

Chap. 1. To take a solemn Oath.

To serve under a Captain in War.

An old Souldier, that hath served out his time, and is discharged of his ser∣vice.

He hath served out his time in the Wars.

To sound a Call.

To joyn Battel.

To make a great shout.

To clash or rustle with their Armor.

To give a great shout in to∣ken the Souldiers should truss up their bag and baggage.

Readily.

To be in a readiness conti∣nually.

C. 2. A fresh-water Soul∣dier.

The initiation into any Art, Science, War.

An old beaten Souldier.

To leap, skip, run from one thing to another.

I will save one, keep as far out of danger as I can.

It is come to the last push.

C. 3. His great friend hath forsaken him.

To assail by covert ways.

To assault by open force.

C. 4. Thou hast underta∣ken a hard task.

To cast account with the pen.

C. 5. The cashiering of a Souldier.

The stopping of a Souldiers pay.

He hath lost his pay.

He deserves a good cudgel∣ling.

To be scou••ged with rods.

C. 6. T•• yield the victory, to give one the better of it.

Jurare Jovem lapidem, per Jovem lapidem.

Mereri sub duce.

Miles emeritus.

Stipendia confecit.

Classicum canere.

Conferre signa, collatis signis pugnare.

Barritum tollere.

Arma concutere.

Conclamare vasa.

Colligatis vasis, paratè, expedité.

In procinctu stare, vi∣vere.

Tyro.

Tyrocinium.

Veteranus.

Agere velitatim.

Ego ero post principia.

Ad Triarios ventum est.

Vallus vitem decepit.

Cuniculis oppugnare.

Machinis oppugnare.

Provinciam cepisti du∣ram.

Scribendo conficere ra∣tiones.

Ignominiosa dimissio.

Fraudatio stipendii.

Aere dirutus est.

Fustuarium meretur.

Virgis caedi.

Herbam dare.

A Collection of Phrases out of Hermes Anglo-Latinus.

I Will make thee do it, i. e. constrain.

Make [i. e. turn] this into Latine.

He made [i. e. feigned] as though he wept.

I will make them friends [i. e. reconcile.

I would be loth to make thee be beaten [i. e. give cause—

He makes a mouth [i. e. writhes.

I will make good [i. e. fill up or supply.

He made much of me.

What did you make of this years crop?

Make a Leg.

Make the B••d.

To make War.

Make haste.

To make a Verse.

To make Water.

He made a Law.

Make ready Supper.

Make a Fire.

You shall never make me believe this tale.

You make a fool of me.

He made him a King.

He makes a stir about no∣thing.

I will make an end.

He being weary lay down, he laid him down when he was weary.

He cracks of his exploits, wealth.

He saith nothing for fear, he is in such a fear that he is not able to say a word.

I bought it for neither more nor less, I paid just so much for it.

It is I, it was thou.

It is not thou canst scare me.

I am sound.

He is pale, palish, or some∣what pale.

What is he good for?

Who will go with me? I will.

My poor help.

A petty King.

A pedling Poet.

A little Fellow.

A poor gain.

Dear heart.

A small field.

Pretty well, somewhat bet∣ter.

Somewhat fearful.

A poor pittance.

A brick Wall.

A Summer Apple.

Houshold affairs.

En eye-witness.

In the top of the house.

In the bottom of Hell.

The furthest part of the world.

At the end of the Town.

About the lower end of the side.

At break of day.

The rest of the money.

In the midst of the City.

Born the fourth day of the Moon, in an unluckie hour.

I am here that did it.

This house of yours is like to fall.

This pride of hers will come down.

Your own Knavery will be∣wray you.

I saw him my self with my own eyes.

They their own selves did it with their own hand.

Thou thy own self.

Here is the man his own self.

He himself, or his own self.

I inquired of a friend of mine and he told me.

He hath not wherewithal to buy a halter to hang himself.

Astorm will sink a Ship.

The Ship sinketh.

Look hither.

He looks like a sloven.

It will break before it will bow.

What hast thou been doing?

I have been writing.

The money is in the coyning.

Speak out thy words.

I care not for thee.

I will tarry abroad out of doors.

He is followed by many, overtaken by few.

Winter was well nigh spent and the Spring drew on.

Thou art doing, but makest no riddance.

He cannot forbear doing mischief,—keep out of ill turns.

He is broken, bankrupt.

Good lu••k have the busi∣ness G••d speed it.

It waxeth night, ripe.

I am to go.

He is gone a hunting, to hunt.

Thou hast no cause to com∣plain,—of complai••ing.

Very desirous to go (of go¦ing) ba••k.

The greatest allurement to sin, is hope of sparing.

Take time to advise.

He rose very early to stu∣dy.

I have my Brother to in∣treat yet.

What dost thou appoint me to do?

I commend my Son to you to be taught.

I am come to intreat that I might

I desire thee to be (or that thou wouldst be) gone.

I know not what to do.

Send thy man before to in∣quire.

Art thou a fit man to teach me?

He gave me a Book to read, but not worth rea∣ding, not worthy to be read.

Here is a Pen-knife for you to make a pen withal.

He was not come back in the morning, but now he is come back.

Thou art come sooner than I looked.

I was gone abroad before thou wert up.

I am undone, if he be gone away.

I am run out of breath.

The Apple is ripe.

You are a fool to believe -,—for believing him.

You know what account I make of him.

About (ready) to fall.

He deserves to be praised.

He should have been puni¦shed.

The better Gamester at Dice, the worse man.

They differ but about one thing.

But for this one time.

There is not a day but he cometh to me.

You can relish nothing but roast-meat.

What else is it to dance, but to play the fool?

He doth nothing but play.

I sent no Letters but to you.

Nothing but what was well advised went from him.

I cannot but weep.

One by one.

From door to door.

Word for word.

Take heed thou dost it not.

See thou come back.

Thou mayst be gone.

He is above three miles off.

Why rise you not? Rise.

I am sore afraid.

Without pains.

I am obliged, engaged to thee.

You can do much with him.

At his Masters beck.

Till broad day-light.

For this cause.

Thou mayst be gone for all me.

Out of gun-shot.

It will not be for thy pro∣fit.

Considering his worth, he is not used with respect enough.

According to the sudden ac∣cident, as the case stood.

Not amiss.

He is on our side.

He is one of Plato's Sect.

He is the Kings Counsellor.

He was thy Footman.

Before and behind.

At supper time.

About ten talents.

Word for word.

At my house.

In his right mind.

It is to be found in Virgil.

In the days of yore, among our Ancestors.

In jest, sport.

For this present.

Every hour.

One with another.

What imployment is he fit for?

Here's a pen for thee to write with.

This is the man I told you of.

You should have told me this before.

Lay the burden upon me.

I will go presently to the man.

He goes to bed supperless, without his supper.

Shew thy self a man.

He will prove a Scholar.

He is held an excellent Di∣vine.

He is reported to be (hath the report of) a spend∣thrift.

I ha•• rather go on foot, than on horseback.

He is sick of a quartan (feaver).

To give him a Civick Crown.

To pour on cold water.

To hold the first parts, to be the chief

Which way? that way.

At my charge.

There is a thing that I would tell thee.

There are some, that say so.

There is a thing that trou¦bles me.

There is no room for me to sit.

You have cause to be glad.

We are most destrous of those things that are most hurtful to us.

I will not hinder you from studying.

Nothing hindred you from writing.

Businesses hindred me from writing back.

What trade art thou of?

Let your hook be always hanging.

They were two days journey off.

What's the matter?

You see what a kind of man he is.

If any matter of money re∣main.

I went not a wenching at that age, at those years.

A poor deal of wine.

At this time of the day.

What s••••kness is this?

So much money, so much credit.

This poor piece of a letter.

The way is much of the same length.

He hath just his Masters conditions.

He is not able to pay.

They carry things fit to put out the fire.

He endureth cold the best of any man living.

I am the nearest to you of any man.

Ask his advice about this.

I can eat Beef heartily.

I will take the same course that thou dost.

I imitate thee.

I envy thee.

No man understands me.

Cicero salutes you.

I shall beware of him that he hurt me not.

He is in a gross error.

You will be heartily glad.

What pranks would he play?

This is a secret to us, we are ignorant of it.

He came to the relief of the Townsmen.

It casts an ugly smell.

What hadst thou to supper?

They know not the way.

It smells of Saffron.

I am sorry for you.

I deny it.

The day will fail me.

You are sure to be punisht.

To die.

Hands off, forbear.

I wrastle with, out of trou∣bles.

I mind only this, this is all I mind.

To quicken his speed, flight.

He is seven years old.

It is for Subjects to obey.

It is for Kings to com∣mand.

It came into my mind, head.

He studies Physick.

There is room for you.

He minds Philosophy.

Be ruled by me.

What troubles you?

I yield to thee.

Come into the house.

I was by when he preach∣ed,—present at the Sermon.

I had a mind, desire.

I am not in fault,

He is convicted of theft.

To condemn to death.

He sued him in an Action of Trespass.

To accuse of Treason.

He is accused of Bribery.

He accuseth him of a crime.

He set fire on the house, the house on fire.

I bought this for you.

Set pen to paper.

He deceived, cousened me, put a trick upon me.

He committed this to my trust.

He forbad me his house,—discharged me of his house.

I'le have nothing to do with your friendship, en∣tertainment, &c.

I will take a course, pro∣vide for thee.

I promise thee this.

Answer me this.

He will not let me have my Book.

I will put thee by all thy shifts.

He gave me a box on the ear.

Forgive me this fault.

Will you command me any service?

I suppose they have no mo∣ney

I'le look to that.

Put him in mind of his duty.

We are warned of many things.

He kept these things from his father.

I intreat this of you.

They are asked their opi∣nion.

Let me prevail with you.

He has his gown on.

Skilful in Greek.

Well skilled in Martial Discipline.

He stript him of his goods, of all.

Let him loose, be made to go without his supper.

I have wip'd the old man of his money.

He is of, has a lowring look.

When he had spoken these words.

He is gone a hunting.

Your letting him do as he lists, makes him grow every day worse than other.

He is busie a writing.

Leave off, leave your pra∣ting.

I set it a sunning.

I am to write letters.

I must write out this Book.

In writing letters.

I have no leisure to write a letter.

I am not at leisure.

Thou mayst for all me.

Besides my purpose.

What will become of me?

To swear by Jove.

A child of that age.

Many things of like sort.

The last day of January.

The third day of January.

Hard by.

In safety.

In readiness.

By Sea and Land.

He is ••f no account with us

B•• of good courage.

A man of great age.

Lame of his feet.

Red haired.

On that condition.

For thy sake.

Of a good age

He i•• sick of a disease fea∣ver. went.

I sa••ute you, greet you well.

In confidence of your cour¦tesie.

He is not able to speak for g••ief.

Of the same mould, temper.

To be ang••y for nothing

She has ha•• a child by Pamphilns.

You shall not buy i•• but •• a dear rate.

Y••u ask too much for you wares.

You offer a penny for it.

To set at nought.

How dost thou prize this house?

Not under ten pounds.

It is not worth so much.

One eye witness is worth a thousand ear witnesses.

I care not a straw for thee

I take it in good part.

I weight it not thus much.

It weigheth three d••ams

Go not a nails breadth from the truth.

Two days journey off.

L••ss by the half.

A City unguarded.

To stand to the bargain.

T•• rely upon vertue.

Well born.

Come of a great house.

I am a Lou••h man, but my Ancestors were of York shire.

He went out at three a clock.

Within this two days we shall know.

In sl••ep time.

Y••u sl••ep till broad day.

Fo•• this three years full.

By night.

For a year, month.

For many years past.

A•• this time of the night.

Till late at night.

You sleep till fair day.

Eight days hence.

For the space of some years.

Day after day

Six years ago, since.

Since when, since then.

It is a twelve month since I saw him.

I being his Author, setter on.

In Ireland.

At Dublin, Carthage, Ve¦nice.

He came from about Rome, from the parts about Rome.

These things were done be∣fore or near Ilerda.

He departed from before Mutina.

I fit next Pompey.

I shall rise, be up, get out of bed sooner than I was wont.

Above half a mile.

What do you touching of us?

To gape after an inheri∣tance.

I had a desire, mind.

I know not which way to take.

I will give over my enter∣prise.

I forbear to speak of many things.

Born to glory.

He spake not a word of thee.

He came to that height of pride.

As far as it is possible to be done.

COgam te hoc fa∣cere.

Verte hoc Latiné.

Simulavit quasi fleret, -sc flere.

Redigam eos in gratiam.

Non lubens committe∣rem, ut vapules.

Os intorquet.

Supplebo.

Comiter me tractavit.

Quanti vendidisti istius anni proventum?

Flecte poplitem.

Sterne lectum.

Bellum gerere.

Festina, propera.

Carmen componere.

Urinam reddere.

Legem tulit.

Para, adorna coenam.

Exstrue ignem.

Nunquam mihi fidem fa∣cies hujus fabulae.

Ludis me, pro ludibrio habes.

Regem cum creavit.

Tumultuatur in re nihili.

Absolvam, finiam, finem faciam.

Ille defessus decubuit.

Crepat facinora, divi∣tias.

Tacet metu.

Nec pluris, nec minoris emi.

Ego sum, tu eras.

Non tu is ••s qui me ter∣rere po••••s,

Valeo.

Pallet, pallidior est.

Cui rei utilis est?

Quis mecum ibit? Ego ibo.

Opella mea.

Regulus.

Poetaster.

Homunculus.

Lucellum.

Corculum.

Agellus.

Meliusculé.

Timidiusculus, timidior, subtimidus.

Particula, portiuncula.

Murus coctilis.

Praecox pomum.

Res domesticae.

Oculatus testis.

In summis aedibus.

In imo Tartaro.

Ultima terra.

Ad extremum oppidum.

Quasi in extrema pagina.

Primâ luce.

Reliqua pecunia.

In urbe media.

Quartâ Lunâ natus.

Adsum qui feci.

Haec tua domus est rui∣tura.

Ejus superbia detume∣scet, se.

Tua ipsius nequitia te prodet.

Egomet ipse vidi meis ipsius oculis.

Illi ipsi fecerunt suâ ipso∣rum manu.

Tu ipse.

Adest ipse homo.

Ille ipse.

Sciscitabar à quodam fa∣miliari meo, qui nun∣ciavit mihi.

Non habet, quo restim emat ad suspendium.

Procella submerget na∣vim.

Navis subsidit.

Respice huc.

Videtur sordidus.

Priùs frangitur, quàm fle∣ctitur.

Quid fecisti?

Scripsi.

Argentum cuditur.

Eloquere verba.

Nihil moror te.

Morabor sub dio.

Multi sequuntur eum, pauci ass••quuntur.

Praecipitaverat hyems, & appetebat ver.

Moves, sed non promo∣ves.

A maleficio non tempe rabit.

Decoxit.

Vertat haec res bene.

Vesperascit, maturescit.

Sum abiturus.

Ivit venatum.

Nullam habes causam querendi.

Cupidissimus redeundi.

Maxima peccandi illece∣bra, spes est impunita∣tis.

Sume diem ad deliberan∣dum.

Surrexit admodum dilu∣culo ad studendum, studendi gratiâ.

Restat mihi frater adhuc exorandus.

Quid mihi praescribis fa∣ciendum?

Commendo tibi fillum docendum.

Veni ut rogarem, ut lice∣ret mihi.

Oro te, ut abeas:

Nescio quid faciam.

Praemitte famulum, qui quaerat.

Túne es idoneus, qui me doceas?

Dedit mihi librum le∣gendum (qu••m lege∣r••m) at indignum qui legatur.

Hem tibi sc••lpellum, quo penn••m ax••••nas.

Manè non redierat, sed nunc rediit.

Venisti celeriùs opinio∣ne.

Prodieram foras priùs, quàm tu surrexeras.

Si ille abiit, perii.

Cucurri usque dum fati∣scit spiritus

Pomum ma••••••••it

Stultus es, qu•• huic cre∣das.

Scis quanti eum faciam.

R••iturus.

L••••dandus est.

Plectendus esset.

Aleator quanto doctior, tanto nequior.

De u••â solùm re dissi∣dent.

Hâc can••ùm vice.

Nullus est dies quin (quo non) ad me ventitet.

Nihil tibi sapit praeter assa.

Quid aliud est saltare, nisi ineptire.

Nil nisi ludit.

Nullas dedi Literas prae∣terquam ad te.

Nil nisi consideratum prodibat ex ejus ore.

Non possum non flere, quin fleam.

Sigillatim.

Ostiatim.

Verbatim.

Cave feceris.

Fac redeas.

Licet abeas.

Amplius tria millia pas∣suum abest.

Quin surgis?

Admodum timeo.

Citra pulverem.

Sum in tuo aere.

Tu multum, plurimum potes apud eum.

Ad domini nutum.

Ad clarum diem.

Hâc de causâ.

Licet abeas per me.

Extra telum, teli jactum.

Non erit ex re tuâ, in rem tuam.

Pro ejus dignitate minus honorificè tractatur.

E••re natâ.

Non abs re.

A nobis stat.

Est à Platone.

Regi est à consiliis.

Erat tibi à pedibus.

A fronte & à tergo.

Super, inter coenam.

Ad decem talenta.

Ad verbum, verbum de verbo.

Apud me, domi meae.

Apud se, compos mentis.

Habetur apud Virgilium.

Apud majores.

Per jocum, Iudum.

In praesentia, in praesens, in praesenti.

In horas.

Inter se.

Quas ad res aptus est?

Hem tibi pennam quâ scribas.

Hic est de quo locutus sum tibi.

Debuisti praedicere.

Impone mihi hoc onus.

Illico adibo hominem.

It cubitum incoenatus.

Praesta te virum.

Evadet doctus.

Theologiae peritissimus habetur.

Audit Nepos.

Mallem ire pedes, quàm eques

Laborat quartanâ, sc, fe∣bre.

Donare civica, sc. coro∣nâ.

Frigidam suffundere, sc. aquam.

Primas tenere, sc. par∣tes.

Quâ? illâc, sc. viâ.

De meo, sc. aere, vel sum∣ptu.

Est quod tibi indicarem.

Sunt qui affirmant.

Est quod me malè habet.

Non est ubi sedeam.

Est quod gaudeas.

Quae maximè nobis no∣cent, ea maximè ap∣petimus.

Per me non stabit quo minùs studeas.

Nihil obstitit quo minùs scriberes.

Negotia me impedierunt quo minùs scriberem.

Quam artem factitas?

Semper tibi pendeat ha∣mus.

Aberant bidui, sc. viam.

Quid rei est?

Vides quid sit hominis.

Si quid nummorum erit reliquum.

Ego istuc aetatis non a∣mori operam dabam.

Minimum vini.

Hoc diei.

Quid hoc morbi est?

Quantum pecuniae, tan∣tum fidei.

Hoc literularum.

Tantundem viae est.

Domini est simillimus.

Non est solvendo, sub. ido∣neus.

Ea portant quae restin∣guendo igni forent, sc. idonea.

Est omnium qui vivunt, algoris patientissimus.

Tibi me propior nemo est.

Consule illum hoc.

Vescor bubulâ lubentissi∣mè, sc. carne.

Eodem tecum utar con∣silio.

Aemulor te. tibi.

Non intelligor ulli.

Salvebis à Cicerone.

Cavebo ab illo ne mihi noceat.

Errorem erravit spissum.

Solidum gaudebis gau∣dium.

Quos ludos luderet?

Hoc nos latet.

Oppidanis suppetias ve∣nit.

Tetrum odorem spirat.

Quid coenâsti?

Semitam non sapiunt.

Olet crocum.

Doleo tuam vicem.

Eo inficias.

Deficiet me dies.

Poena vos maner.

Mortem occumbere.

Abstine manum.

Eluctor difficultates.

Studeo hoc unum, in hoc unum.

Celerare fugam.

Est annorum septem.

Est Subditi pa∣rere. sc. offi∣cium.

Est Regis im∣perare. sc. offi∣cium.

Venit mihi in mentem.

Studet Medicinae.

Locus vacat tibi.

Vacat Philosophiae.

Ausculta mihi.

Quid tibi dolet?

Accedo tibi.

Succede aedibus.

Interfui concioni.

Incessit mihi cupiditas.

Vaco culpâ.

Tenetur furti.

Damnare capitis.

Egit injuriarum cum illo.

Laesae majestatis arcesse∣re, insimulare.

Postulatur de repetundis, sc. pecuniis.

Arguit eum crimine.

Arcessit eum crimine.

Injecit ignem aedibus.

Hoc mercatus sum tibi.

Inprime pennam chartae.

Imposuit mihi.

Credidit hoc meae fidei.

Interdixit, prohibuit mi∣hi domum.

Renuncio amicitiae, ho∣spitio, muneri, &c.

Prospiciam, consulam, ca∣vebo tibi.

Hoc tibi recipio.

Hoc mihi responde.

Prohibet mihi librum.

Praecludam tibi omnia subterfugia.

Impegit mihi colaphum.

Condona mihi hoc deli∣ctum.

Ecquid mihi imperabis?

Suspicor nihil argenti es∣se illis.

Hoc mihi curae erit.

Admone illum officii.

Multa admonemur.

Haec patrem celavit.

Te hoc obsecro.

Rogantur sententiam.

Sine te exorem.

Induitur togam.

Literas Graecas eruditus.

Edoctus belli artes.

Exuit cum bonis.

Multetur coena.

Emunxi argento senem.

Fronte est caperatâ.

His verbis dictis.

Abiit venatum.

Us{que} ad eò permittis eum quid vis pro libitu face∣re, ut quotidie fiat se∣ipso deterior.

Occupatus est scribendo.

Desiste garriendo.

Posui ad insolandum.

Scribendae sunt mihi li∣terae.

Exscribendus est mihi hic liber.

In scriben do literas.

In scriben dis literis.

Non est mihi otium scri∣ben dae epistolae.

Non est mihi otium scri∣ben di epistolam.

Non vacat mihi.

Licet tibi per me.

Alienum institutis meis.

Quid mihi, de me fiet?

Jovem jurare per.

Puer id aetatis ad.

Id genus multa secun∣dum.

Pridie calendas Februarii ante.

Tertio nonas Januarii ante.

In proximo. loco.

In tuto. loco.

In promptu.

Terrâ marique.

Nullo est numero apudnos.

Bono ••is animo.

Homo prov••ctâ aetate.

Claudus pedibus.

••ri••e ruber.

Eâ lege sub.

Tuâ ca••••â. pro.

Grand•• na••u

Laborat morbo, febri, penu••iâ.

Impertio••••e salute.

F••etus tuâ humanitate.

Prae moerore fari nequit.

De ••âdem fideliâ.

De ni••ilo irasci.

••••perit è Pamphilo.

Non parabis nisi immenso pret••o

••••ce••is nimio merces.

Licitaris denario.

Pro nihilo putare, ducere.

Quanti indicas has aedes?

Non minoris quàm de∣cem m••nis.

Non est tanti.

Pluris oculatus testis u∣nus, quàm mille auriti.

Non pili re facio.

Boni consulo.

Hujus non pendo.

Pendet tres drachmas.

Ne transversum unguem discedas à recto.

A best bidui iter.

Dimidio minor.

Urbs praesid••o nuda.

Stare pactis.

Virtute niti.

Honesto loco natus.

Genere clarissimo, splen∣dinâ familiâ ortus.

Sum Ludensis, at or••undus ex agro E••o••acensi.

Prodiit te••••â horâ.

Biduo, intra biduum scie∣mus.

Per quietem.

Stertis ad multum diem.

Per totum ••riennium.

De nocte

In annum, mensem.

Multis retro annis.

Hoc noctis.

Ad multam noctem.

Ad clarum diem dormis.

Ad octavum hine diem.

Aliquot per annos.

Diem ex die.

Ante sex annos, sex ab hinc annis.

Ex quo, ex illo.

Annus est ex quo cum vi∣di, quod cum non vidi.

Me authore.

In Hibernia.

Dublinii, Carthagine, Ve∣netiis.

Venit à Româ.

Haec ad Ilerdam gerun∣tur.

Discessit à Mutinâ.

Proximè Pompeium sedeo

Surgam maturiùs solito.

Amplius quingentis passi∣bus.

Quid tibi nos est tactio?

Inhiare haereditatem.

Incessit me cupido.

Nescio quam viam insi∣stam.

Desistam incoepto.

Pluribus supersedeo.

Natus gloriae, ad gloriam.

De te nihil meminit.

Eo insolentiae processit.

Quoad ejus fieri potest.

This for the first storing of the Learners Head and Memory with Phrases. Then for the second, the Teaching him how to use them. This is easily shewn him, by but composing three or four Englishes (Epistles or the like) of some pretty length, all, or most, of words capable of amplification by Peri∣phrases, and causing the Scholar first to translate them according to the Verbal, and then out of his memory, and by the help of his Phrase-Books, ac∣cording to the Periphrastical way of Translating. This may be an Example.

Loving Friend,

It is commonly reported, that you are sick. Tru∣ly I am very sorry for that. But I am much more sorry, that you got your sickness (for that they say too) by drinking too much. I earnestly desire you first to repent of your having been drunk, and then to seek to recover your health. And if it please God that you ever be well again, then have a care to live healthfully and soberly for time to come. This will be very pleasing to all your friends, and especially to

Your very Loving Friend, T. A.

Aegrotare te, Amice, vulgo dictum est. Eâ profectò re multùm doleo. Atqui hanc te (quod item ferùnt) aegritudinem largiùs bibendo contraxisse, id verò mihi multò magis dolet. Vehementer te oro, primùm ut ebrietatis te tuae poeniteat, deinde uti des operam, quo

convalescas. Quod si Deo erit visum, ut aliquando ê morbo revaleas, id tibi curae sit, cùm ut sanus, tum ut sobriùs deinceps vivas: Hoc tuis omnibus valde erit gratum, inprimis autem

Tui Studiosissimo, T. A.

Valetudine te iniquâ, Amice praecharissime, tentari, in ore omnium versatur. Ea sanè res gravissimo me dolore afficit. Quod autem minimum indulgendo po∣culis (nam id quoque omnium sermone percrebuit) istum in morbum incideris, longè graviori moerore animi afflictus sum. Majorem in modum à te peto, primum, ut poenitenti velis esse animo, quod immodicum ingurgi∣tando potum ebrietatem contraxeris, deinde ut amissae recuperandae sanitati operam sedulam naves. Si verò Divinâ inspirante gratiâ, futurum id unquam sit, ut pristinam ad valetudinem restituaris, toto tum pectore hanc incumbe in curam, ut & illaesam corporis sanita∣tem conserves; & ad normam sobrietatis te in posterum conformes. Hâc tu ratione es illud facturus, quod cùm universis amicis tuis erit gratissimum, tum multo gra∣tius

Tui Amantissimo, T. A.

By a few exercises, after this manner performed, the Scholar will quickly discern the Ʋse, as well as the Elegancy of Latine Phrases; and delight and la∣bour, that all his Latines may swell and shine with such like Enlargements and Adornments. For his Use to this purpose, amongst the many extant I re∣commend the little Phrase-Book put forth by Mr.

Farnaby; as also that larger by Mr. Huise; but especially that Book of Phrases compiled by Dr. Robinson going under the name of the Latine Phrases of Winchester School. And thus much of this matter.

CHAP. VII. Of Variation of Phrases.

TO enable the Scholar the better to make use of his Phrases, as also to enrich him with the greater store of them, Variation of the Phrases will be very conducing. Of this therefore let the Tea∣cher first give him some Rules, and then put him upon the practice.

For Rules, he may furnish him with them accor∣ding to his discretion out of his own Observation: Or if he think good, he may make use of this Colle∣ction.

Rules of Variation.

First, a Verb Active may be varied by a Verb Pas∣sive, by putting the Nominative Case of the Active Verb into the Ablative with a or ab; and the Accu∣sative into the Nominative, making the Verb agree with it in Number and Person: as,

Ego lego Virgilium. Virgilius legitur à me.

Sometimes the Nominative before the Verb Active, may be the Dative after the Passive: as,

• Non me ullus intelligit.
• Non intelligor ulli.
• Id vitium nullus not aver at.
• Id vitium nulli not atum er at.

But this is most used in Poets.

If rhe Verb Active govern a Dative Case of the

Person, then it will not be convenient to vary the Nominative Case before it by a Dative Case after the Verb Passive; because then there will be two Datives together: And therefore we vary not, Re∣feram tibi gratiam by Referetur mihi tibi gratia, but by Referetur tibi à me gratia.

The Dative Case after videor [I seem] is not va∣riable by an Ablative Case with a Preposition. Vide Voss. Lat. Gram. p. 51.

2. A Verb Passive may be varied by a Verb Active, by putting the Nominative Case into the Accusa∣tive, and the Dative or Ablative into the Nomina∣tive▪ and making the Verb agree with it in Number and Person: as,

• Viris bonis honesta petuntur.
• Viri boni honesta petunt.
• Ab hostibus constanter pug∣natur.
• Hostes constanter pugnant.
• Ille ab his laudatur.
• Hi illum laudant.
• Occurritur nobis à doctis.
• Docti nobis occurrunt.

3. The Ablative Case Absolute may be varied by putting the Ablative into the Nominative, and turn∣ing the Participle into a Verb with some of these Particles, dum, cum, quando, si, in such Mood as the Particle used therewith, requires: as,

Rege veniente hostes fugerunt.

Dum veniret Rex hostes fugerunt.

Imperante Augusto natus est Christus.

Cùm imperabat Augustus natus est Christus.

Superbo regnante in Italiam venit.

Quando Superbus regnabat in Italiam venit.

Note, if there be no Participle expressed toge∣ther with the Ablative Case Absolute, then the Par∣ticiple

ente or existente is understood, and the varia∣tion will be made by sum, fui, &c. as,

Me [existente] duce vinces.

Si ego dux fuero vinces.

Credo pudicitiam Saturno [ente] rege moratam in terris.

Credo pudicitiam Quando Saturnus rex erat moratam in terris.

4. The Nominative Case with his Verb and Parti∣ciple may be varied by turning the Nominative Case into the Ablative; and (the Participle being put away) the Verb into a Participle agreeing with it: as,

Postquam arbor dejicitur.

Arbore dejectâ.

5. An Adjective that hath re•• expressed with it, may be varied by putting away res, and putting the Adjective into the Neuter Gender: as,

Deus res omnes ex nihilo creavit.

Deus omnia ex nihilo creavit.

6. An Adjective of the Neuter Gender whose Sub∣stantive is res understood, may be varied by expres∣sing res, and putting the Adjective into the Gender agreeing with it: as,

Ʋnum quodque suo designare nomine.

Rem unam quamque suo designare nomine.

Id forsan difficile est.

Forsan res ea difficilis est.

7. The latter of two Substantives being a Genitive Case of Possession, may be varied by an Adjective Possessive agreeing in Case with the former Sub∣stantive; & vice versâ: as,

Domus patris, paterna domus.

Herilis fi••ius, fi••ius heri.

See Treat of Partic. Ch. of Rule 1. of Note 4.

8. An Adjective Absolute in the Neuter Gender with his Genitive Case, may be varied by putting the Substantive of the G••nitive Case into the Case of the Adjective; and the Adjective of the Neuter Gender into the Gender of the Substantive: as,

Hoc noctis; Hâc nocte

Per diversa terrarum distractus est.

Per terras diversas distractus est.

9. An Adjective with his Substantive wherewith he agrees in Case, may many times be elegantly va∣ried by putting the Adjective into the N••uter Gen∣der (if it already be not) and the Substantive into the Genitive Case: as,

Ne eum quidem leporem habuerunt. Cic.

Ne id quidem leporis habuerunt. Cic.

Mihi hoc negotium dedêre. Ter.

Mihi hoc negotii dedêre. Ter.

Quis hic h••mo? Quid hoc hominis? Ter.

Huic alia merces erit. Virg.

Huic aliud mercedis erit. Virg.

Per gentes terrásque diversas volitabant.

Per diversa gentium terra úmq, Flor.

10. The Accusative Case before the Infinitive Mood may be varied by turning the Accusative into the Nominative, and the Infinitive Mood into the Indi∣cative or Subju••ctive with quod or ut, accordingly as those Particles ••equire: as,

Te incolumem rediisse gaudeo.

Quod tu redieris incolumis gaudeo.

Te abire jubeo.

Ʋt tu abeas jubeo.

Note, The Infinitive Mood may not be resolved into another Mood with quod or ut indifferently: but sometimes by quod, sometimes by ut. Directi∣ons in this Case you have in the Treatise of English Particles, in the Chapter of the Particle That.

11. The Nominative Case with his Verb having quod or ut with it, may be varied by putting away quod and ut; and turning the Nominative Case into the Accusative, and the Verb into the Infinitive Mood: as,

Quod tu bene vales gaudeo.

Te bene valere gaudeo.

Ʋt tu fabulam agas volo.

Te agere fabulam volo.

12. The Verb habeo may be varied by the Verb sum, by putting that word into the Dative Case, wh••ch was the Nom native before habeo: and that into the Nominative, which after habeo was the Ac∣cusative: as,

Ego habeo domi patrem. Est mihi domi pater. Non habeo ego argentum. Non est mihi argentum.

13. The Genitive Case governed of a Noun Parti∣tive, may be varied by a Preposition, and such Case as he governs; & vice versâ: as,

Quorum alter te scientiâ augere potest. Cic.

Equibus alter te scientiâ augere potest. Cic.

Major juvenum; De juvenibus major. Hor.

Multae istarum arborum manu meâ satae sunt, Cic.

Ex arboribus istis multa manu meâ satae sunt, Cic.

14. The Genitive Case after the Superlative De∣gree may be varied by è, ex, with an Ablative; or inter with an Accusative Case: as,

• Virgilius doctissimus
  • ...Poëtarum.
  • ...ex Poëtis.
  • ...inter Poëtas.

15. The Infinitive Mood Active after a Verb of Motion, or denoting any Intention, may be varied se∣veral ways. For instance, Venio salutare matrem may be varied, (1) By the first Supine; as, Venio salutatum matrem. (2) By a Participle in rus; as, Venio salutaturus matrem. (3) Thirdly, by a Ge∣rund in di with ergô, gratiâ, causâ; as, Matrem sa∣lutandi causâ venio. (4) By a Gerund in dum with a Preposition; as, Venio ad salutandum matrem. (5) By a Gerundive with ergô, gratiâ, causâ; as, Matris salutandae gratiâ venio. (6) By a Gerundive with a Preposition; as, Ad matrem salutandam venio. (7) By a Subjunctive Mood with ut; as, Matrem ut sa∣lutem venio.

Note, Every one of these ways of varying may be varied by all, or the most of the other ways: as the first Supine by the Infinitive Mood; Participle in rus; Gerund, Gerundive; Verb. So the Parti∣ciple in rus may be varied by the Infinitive Mood; first Supine, Gerund, Gerundive, Verb. So the Gerund in dum by the Infinitive Mood; first Su∣pine; Participle in rus; Gerund in di with causâ, &c. Gerundive with Preposition; Verb with ut, So Gerundive by Infinitive Mood, &c. So Verb of Subjunctive Mood with ut, by Infinitive Mood, &c.

16. The Infinitive Mood Passive after an Adjective may be varied several ways; for instance, dignus est amari, may be varied, (1) By the latter Supine;

as, Dignus est amatu. (2) By a Verb of the Subjun∣ctive Mood with ut; as, Dignus est, ut ametur: or qui, as, dignus est qui ametur, quem ames. (3) By a Noun of a cognate original and signification; as, Dignus est amore.

Note, Every one of these ways of varying may be varied by the other. The Supine by the Infini∣tive Mood, the Subjunctive Mood with his Parti∣cles, and the Noun. The Subjunctive with his Par∣ticle by the Infinitive Mood and the Supine. And the Noun by the other ways of varying before men∣tioned.

Note also, That the using of the Infinitive Mood after the Adjective, is Poetical or Historical.

17. The Comparative Degree may be varied.

(1.) By his Positive with magis and quàm: as, Vilius argentum est auro.

Magis vile est argentum, quàm aurum.

(2.) By his Positive with Comparative Particles, tam-quàm, perinde-atque, and ac having a Negative Adverb non or haud before the former of them: as,

Virtus est auro preciosior.

Non tam pretiosum est aurum quàm atque ac virtus.

Haud perinde pretiosum est aurum quàm atque ac virtus.

Non aequè pretiosum est aurum quàm atque ac virtus.

18. The Superlative Degree may be varied,

(1.) By the Comparative Degree: as,

Elegantissimus omnium Philosophorum.

Philosophis omnibus elegantior.

Quàm Philosophi omnes elegantior.

(2.) By the Positive with Nemo tam, or ita, ut, or quisquam

(2.)By the Positive with Nihil tam, or ita, ut, or quicquam with non, or haud, perinde, or aequè ac, ut, atque: as,

Tam elegans, ut nemo Philosophorum.

Ita elegans, ut è Philosophis nemo.

Inter omnes Philosophos non est quisquam perinde ele∣gans ac; or haud quisquam aequè est elegans atque.

19. Single words may be varied several ways,

1. By their own several Cases, and that—

(1.) Without any variation of the whole sen∣tence according to several Grammar Rules in part already touched upon, and yet further observable by the heeding Reader.

• Est ubi in Dativum vertitur, &c.
• Opus autem adjectivè, &c.
• Communis, alienus, &c.
• Magnitudinis mensura, &c.
• Nomina diversitatis, &c.
• Infinitum quoque utrinque, &c.
• Vertitur hic Genitivus, &c.
• Aestimo vel Genitivum, &c.
• At misereor & miseresco, &c.
• Reminiscor, obliviscor, &c.
• Potior aut Genitivo, &c.
• Ex his quaedam efferuntur, &c.
• Verba comparandi, &c.
• Haec variam habent, &c.
• Dicimus, tempero, moderor tibi, &c.
• At ex his quaedam cum aliis ca∣sibus, &c.
• Laus & vituperium, &c.
• Quaedam ex his quae similitudi∣dinem, &c.
• Natus, commodus, &c.
• Adjectiva quae ad copiam, &c.
• Horum nonnulla, &c.
• Pauca ex his mutant, &c.
• Hunc Accusativum mutant, &c.
• Rogandi verba interdum, &c.
• Vestiendi verba interdum, &c.
• Valeo etiam interdum, &c.
• Ex quibus quaedam, &c.
• Vertitur hic Ablativus, &c.
• Verbis quibusdam additur, &c.
• Passivis additur Ablat. &c.
• Poeticè Infinitivus Modus, &c.
• Vertuntur Gerundis voces, &c.
• Quae signific. partem temp. &c.
• Dicimus etiam in paucis, &c.

(2.) With some light variation of the whole Sentence: as,

Sapientia rerum omnium praestantissima est.

Sapientiae praerebus omnibus summa est praestantia.

Sapientiae non omnes praeterea in universo res prae∣stant.

Sapientiam non omnes praeterea in universo res prae∣stant.

O sapientia! quaenam è rebus omnibus aequè ac tu praestans est?

Sapientiâ inter omnes uspiam in orbe toto res nihil est praestantius.

2. By their Synonymas: as,

Ensis, gladius. Amo, diligo. Saepe, frequenter.

3. By their Equipollents; nullus, non ullus.

Aliquis, non nemo, aliquando, nonnunquam, rarò, non saepe, doctus, non indoctus, bonus, minimè malus.

4. By their Periphrases: as,

Philosophus: Vir sapientiae studiosus.

Ovidius: Sulmonensis Vates.

Occidere; Vitâ privare.

Rhetorica; Ars ornatè dicendi.

5. By an Enallage.

(1.) Of a Noun.

1. For a Verb: as, Judicent alii; Aliorum esto judicium.

2. For a Parti∣ciple; as, Hoc te impellente fecit.

2. For a Parti∣ciple; as, Hoc tuo impulsu fecit.

3. For an Ad∣verb: as, Laetè istuc audio.

3. For an Ad∣verb: as, Laetus istuc audio.

(2.) Of a Verb for a Noun: as,

Scientia tua nihil est.

Scire tuum nihil est.

(3.) Of a Participle for a Verb: as,

Consuli opus est.

Consulto opus est.

(4.) Of an Infinitive Mood for the Indicative: as,

Ex illo fluebant res Danaûm.

Ex illo fluere res Danaûm.

(5.) Of a Present Tense for a Preterimperfect Tense: as,

Tu si hic esses aliter sentires.

Tu si hic sis aliter sentias.

(6.) Of the Plural Number for the Singular: as,

Ego popuso imposui.

Nos populo imposuimus.

(7.) Of the Second Person for the third with his Nominative Case: as,

Qui unum nôrit, omnes rôrit.

Ʋnum nôris, omnes nôris.

6. By Tropes of Rhetorick.

(1.) A Metonymie of the Efficient: as, Eos, Belli vis perculit.

(1.) A Metonymie of the Efficient: as, Eos, Martis vis perculit.

Or of the Subject: as, Sunt Itali testes.

Or of the Subject: as, Testis est Italia.

Or of the Adjunct: as, Cedat paci bellum.

Or of the Adjunct: as, Cedant arma togae.

(2.) An Irony of the contrary: as,

Vir male rem negligenter gessisti.

Bone vir curâsti probé.

(3.) A Metaphor: as,

Omnes excitantur ad studia gloriâ.

Omnes incenduntur ad studia gloriâ.

(4.) A Senedoche of the Member: as,

In magno peri∣culo eram, quod eadem urbe contineremur:

In magno peri∣culo eram, quod iisdem moenibus contineremur:

Or of the Whole: as, Imperium Ro∣manum ardet bello.

Or of the Whole: as, Orbis terrarum ardet bello.

Or of the Species: as, Interfector civium interficitur.

Or of the Species: as, Parricida civium interficitur.

Orator eloquentissimus; Alter Cicero.

Or of the Genus: as, Perdidimus Catilinam.

Or of the Genus: as, Perdidimus hominem.

Venientibus malis obstat Fortitudo.

Venientibus malis obstat Virtus.

20. Sentences may be also varied by several ways.

1: By turning the Affirmative Speech into a Ne∣gative, and contrariwise a Negative into an Affirma∣tive: as,

• Avaritia vitiorum omnium est teterrimum.
• Nullum est vitium tetrius quàm avaritia.
• Est vir prudentiâ singulari.
• Non vulgaris est viri prudentia.

• Non parva est peccandi illecebra impunitas.
• Impunitas peccandi maxima est illecebra.
• Nihil meum est, quod auferri potest.
• Meum id omne est, quod auferri non potest.

2. By turning the Assertive Speech into an Inter∣rogative, and contrariwise Interrogative into Asser∣tive: as,

• Avaritia vitium est foedissimum.
• Quod vitium foedius est avaritiâ?
• Nihil est absurdius, quàm, quo minus viae restat, eo plus viatici quaerere.
• Potest quicquam esse absurdius, quàm quo minus,—
• Acerba audire tolerabilius est, quàm videre?
• Annon est tolerabilius acerba audire, quàm videre.

• Annon sunt incerti bellorum omnium exitus?
• Omnium bellorum exitus incerti sunt.
• Id ne appellandum est onus, quod cum laetitiâ feras?
• Onus non est appellandum, quod cum laetitiâ feras.

3. By turning Assertive Speeches into Admirative, and contrariwise Admirative into Assertive Speech∣es: as,

• Omnia sunt misera in bellis civilibus.
• Quàm misera sunt omnia in bellis civilibus!

• Quàm timeo quorsum evades?
• Quorsum evadas magnopere timeo.

4. By turning Assertive Speeches into Exclama∣tions,

and contrariwise Exclamatory into Assertory Speeches: as,

• Homo est admirandâ scientiâ.
• O admirandam hominis scientiam!

• O fortunatos nimium agricolas, si—
• Fortunati nimium forent agricolae, si—

The better to enable him to make use of these Rules, and perform his Variation in Latine, it will be convenient to begin his Variation of Phrase in English, rendring one Engl••sh into another, of the same sense in other words. For instance.

In Affirmative Speeches. I affect thee very much. I love thee very much. Thou art very much beloved of me. I have a very great affe∣ction towards thee. I have a very great love for thee. My love to thee is very great. My affection towards thee is very great. My love is very much set on thee. Thou art very far in my favour. Oh how I love thee! What an affection have I for thee?

In Negative Speeches. It was not long of me that you were beaten. It came not through me that you were beaten. It was not through me that you were beaten. It was not because of me that you were beaten. It is not my fault that you were bea∣ten. It is no fault of mine that you were beaten. I am not to be blamed for your being beaten. I was not the cause of your beating. I was not the cause of your being beaten. I did not cause you to be beaten. I did not cause your beating Your beating was not caused by me. Your beat∣ing came not by the means of me. Your beating came not through my means. I occasioned not—, or I was no occa∣sion of your beating. Did I occasion your beating? Was I any cause of your being beaten?

In Interrogative Speeches. What a clock is it? How goes the clock? H••w goes the day? What time of the day is it? How spends the day? What h••ur of the day is it?

In Epiphonematical Speeches. Such truth is there in that old saying. Such truth there is in what was said of old. So much truth there is in that old saying. So true is that old saying. So true is that which was said of old. So truly was it said of old. So truly did they of old say. That truth there is in that old saying. With that truth was it said by them of old.

And once for all; if any desire any further in∣sight into this most profitable exercise, he may con∣sult Mr. Clark's Dux Oratorius, written chiefly on that Subject, wherein besides Rules of Variation, there are almost infinite of varied Examples: Eras∣mus Colloquies, p. 82. and Edit. Londini 1631. Buch∣ler's Elegancies. p. 111. Dr. Robinson's Phrases, in the end: and the most accomplished Comenius's Artis Oratoriae sive Grammaticae Elegantis, c. 5. which most choice piece I owe to the kindness of the worthy Mr. Henry Edmonson, then one of the Masters in the School of Tunbridge, and do recommend to the per∣usal of all young both Teachers and Learners. And thus much for Rules.

Now for Practice. The usual way, I presume, is to give the Learner sentences of several forms, and put him to the varying of them. I condemn it not; it hath its use, its profit. But the Practice, that I would recommend, should be upon his daily Les∣sons: the Master first, by a line drawn underneath, noting to him what words and phrases are capable

of such variation, as he hath Rules for, and then causing him to vary those words and phrases, ac∣cording to his Rules, still informing and helping him in what he fails through want of memory or understanding. After he is a little experienced, he is to be put to find out of himself what words or phrases in his Lesson, are variable, and accordingly to vary them. This exercise with a competent un∣derstanding, will in a short space produce a strange alteration to the better in all the Latines of the Scholar. This may be done on the Repetiton-day; but the oftner the better. Experto crede.

CHAP. XIII. Of the Elegancies of the Particles.

A Fresh variety of choice Phrases goes far in the Elegancy of a Latine Exercise: but no∣thing better sets it off, than the inter weavings of the Particles. These, like those gold and silver filings, wherewith Bassianus strew'd the Roman pavements make a Latine smooth and radiant: or, as those upper Constellations do the Firmament, they be∣spangle an Oration, rendring it illustrious and glo∣rious. One shall oft be ravished with admiration at the delicacy of a Ciceronian Period, and yet, when all comes to all, not be able to say, what more char∣med, and took his phansie, than the orient sparklings of some interwoven elegant Particles. This hath drawn so many Persons of excellent Learning not only to take especial notice, but writ particular Tracts of the Elegancies of these. Not to insist on what Robertus Stephanus hath done in his Thesau∣rus

Linguae Latinae: or Laurentius Valla in his Ele∣gancies: or Johannes Buchle••us in his Elegancies: or Jacobus Omphalius in his Elocutionis Imitatio & Apparatus: or Hadrianus Cardinalis in his de Modis Latinè loquendi: or Franciscus Sylvius in his Progym∣nasmata: or Edmundus Richerius in his Rhetorick: Godschalcus Stewichius; Horatius Turselinus; Ada∣mus Durrerus, and Philippus Pareus, have all written justs Tracts particularly of these. A competency therefore of knowledge of the Elegancies of the Particles, and of skill to use them elegantly, cannot but be yielded by reason; and by experience will be found to be hugely conducing to the rendring of the Learners Latine elegant. With this knowledge and skill I advise the Teacher by all ways and means upon all occasions to furnish his Scholar, what he may. And every Lecture, every Exercise will af∣ford him matter for Observation. But the ready way, I conceive, is to furnish him with, and at con∣venient times read to him some one or two Tracts of the Particles both of the English and Latine Tongue. For English though I may not commend, yet I may mention mine own Treatise on that Sub∣ject. And for Latine I recommend unto him Hora∣tius Turselinus; or rather, as being later and better, Philippus Pareus, de Particulis Latinae Orationis: which I wish were as common as it is good. And if the reading of these whole Authors, seem too laborious, and be like to take up too much time (though no time almost can be too much to be spent in so elegant a study) the Teacher may out of them, and his own Observation, make a short Col∣lection, and give to his Scholar for his Use. And till he shall have made a better of his own, he may use this following.

Some Particles are elegantly used for others, and

some are elegantly used with others. I shall speak first of those that are elegantly used for others. And of these some are elegant where other expressions are not elegant: and some are elegantly used for others, which also may in the same sense be used almost, if not all out, as elegantly as they. I begin with the former.

Of Particles elegantly used where other Expressions are not Elegant.

Rather say, ad verbum, than de verbo ad verbum: as, Tabellas Latinas ad verbum de Graecis expressas. Cic. 1. de Fin.

Rather repeat alius in divers Cases, than say, Ʋnus, uno, or aliqui uno, alii alio modo: as, Alius alio dicendi genere gaudet. Aliis alius vivendi mos est. So repeat aliud, or aliter, rather than say aliud, or aliter quàm; as, Aliud dicis, aliud cogitas. Aliter dicit, aliter facit.

Rather say alius ex alio, than unus post alium; as, Aliud ex alio me quotidie impedit. Cic.

Rather say quis quid, than quis aliquid: as, Si quis quid reddit, magna habenda est gratia. Ter. At verò gravitate membrorum, & cruciatu dolorum si quis quem levet, magnam ineat gratiam. Cic. de Fin. l. 9. So rather say quo quis, than quo aliquis: as, Quo enim quis versutior & callidior est, hoc invisior & suspectior detractâ opinione probitatis. Cic. So rather say cum quis, than cum aliquis: as, Cum quis invitus laborem suscipit, tum sentit graviorem. So immediately after nè, num, nisi, seu, sive, use quis, rather than aliquis: as, Nè quam patiar injuriam, opera mihi danda est. Num quas mihi affers literas? Nisi quae me fortè fu∣giunt. Cic. Nisi quid aliud vobis placet. Cic. Si ve∣rum est Fabium Labeonem, seu quem alium id tenuisse. Cic.

And lastly after sine rather use ullus, quispiam, or quisquam, than aliquis: as, Sine cuj••spiam operâ; sine cujusquam auxilio; sine ••lla pecu••••a

Rather say unus & alter than unus & duo: as, Ve∣nit unus & item alter. Ter. Quid est tantum in uno, aut altero die? Cic.

Rather say etiam num, or etiam nunc, than usque nunc: as, Quaeritur etiam num quis eum nuncium mise∣rit. Cic. Etiam nunc hic stas, Parmenio? Ter. So rather say etiam tum than usque tunc; as, Cum etiam tum in lecto Crassus esset. Cic.

Rather say hinc & illinc than hinc & inde: as, Hinc & illinc exhibent mihi negotium. Plaut.

Rather use in dies, or in horas after a Comparative degree, than magis, ac magis: as, Fit doctior in dies.

Rather say maximè omnium, than plus quàm om∣nes: as, Qui maximè omnium nobilium Graecis literis studuit. Cic. So rather say minimè omnium, than minus quàm omnes: as, Quod quidem tu minimè om∣nium ignoras. Cic.

Rather say minimum, than ut minimum, or ad mi∣nus: as, Ita fiunt omnes partes minimùm octoginta una. Cic.

Rather say non ita pridem, than non multo tempore antè: as, Nostrâ autem civitate non ita pridem domi∣natu regio liberatâ. Cic.

Rather say non idem tibi & mihi, than non idem tibi sicut mihi: as, Non eadem vobis, & il••i•• necessi∣tudo impendet. Sal.

To express a little time rather say parumper, or paulisper, than parum, or paulum: ••s, Dum exiero, parumper opperire hîc. Ter. Paulisper, dum se uxor, ut fit, comparat, moratus est. Cic.

Rather say per hos dies, than durantibus his die∣bus: as, Nulla abs te per hos dies epistola inanis aliquâ

re utili & suavi venerat. Cic Quam provinciam te∣nuistis à praedonibus liberam per hosce annos? Cic.

Rather say pridie quàm, than pridie quo: as, Pri∣die quàm excessit è vitâ. Cic. So use quàm, not quo, after postridie: as, Postridie intellexi, quàm à vobis discessi. Cic.

Rather say prae ut, than in comparatione: as, Pa∣rum etiam, prae ut futurum est, praedicas. Plaut.

Rather say pro virili parte, than quantum unus vir potest: as, Haec qui pro suâ virili parte defendunt.

After a Verb of doubting rather say quin, than quod non: as, Quod si acciderit, non dubitat, quin bre∣vi Troja sit peritura. Cic.

Rather say quoties, than quot vicibus: as, Quoties tibi extorta est sica ista de manibus?

Rather say ut quisque, than secundum quod quisque: as, Ʋt quisaue est vir optimus, it a difficillimè alios esse improbos suspicatur. Cic.

Rather say semel & iterum, than semel & bis: as, Ʋt re semel atque iterum praejudicatâ condemnatus in judicium venerit. Cic.

Rather say non temere est, than non sine quâ re est: as, Non temere est, quod tu tam times. Ter.

Rather use ultra, than ulterius: as, Si probabili∣ter dicentur, nè quid ultra requiratis. Cic.

Rather say paucis diebus post, or paucis post diebus, than post paucis diebus: as, Paucis post diebus quàm Lucâ discesserat. Cic.

Rather say uspiam, than in aliquo loco: as, Inde utrum consistere uspiam velit, an mare transire, nescit. Cic.

And thus much of Particles elegantly used where other Expressions are not elegant. I now proceed to the Second sort.

Of Particles elegantly used where others also may be used elegantly.

A is elegantly used for pro: as, Vide ne hoc totum, Scaevola, sit à me. Cic. Also for post: as, Quid antepones Veneri à jentaculo? Plaut. Also for con∣tra: as, A quo periculo defendite, Judices, civem Fon∣teium. Cic.

Ad is elegantly used for usque ad: as, Sophocles ad summam senectutem tragoedias fecit. Cic. Inermes ad satietatem trucidabitis. Liv. Quod iis ad denarium solveretur. Cic. Also for circiter and circa: as, Ho∣mines ad quindecim Curioni assenserunt. Cic. Ad quae tempora te expectem, facias me certiorem velim. Cic. Also for apud: as, Signa quae nobis curâsti, ea sunt ad Cajetam exposita. Cic. Also for ante: as, Clodius abjectâ togâ se ad generi pedes abjecit. Cic. Also for secundum: as, Ad arbitrium & nutum auditorum to∣tum se fingit & accommodat. Cic. Also for prae in Comparison: as, At nihil ad nostram hanc Ter. Also for post: as, Nescio quid in••ersit, utrum nunc v••••iam, an ad decem annos. Cic. Also for de: as, Posquam vos ad virtutem verba fecistis. Symmach.

Adeò is elegantly put for ità, tam, or tantùm: as, Adeóne hospes hujus urbis, adeò ignarus es, ut haec ne∣scias? Cic. So adeò non is elegantly used for tantum abest ut: as, Adeò ipse non violavit ut summam curam adhibuerit, ne quis captivo corpori illuderet. Curt.

Adhuc is elegantly used for praeterea: as, Nisi si quid adhuc fortè vultis. Cic.

Admodum is elegantly used for omnino: as, Curio literarum admodum nihil sciebat. Cic.

At is elegantly used for saltem: as, Si mihi repub∣licâ bonâ frui non licebit, at careho malâ. Cic.

Certè is elegantly used for saltem: as, H••mines

mortem optare incipiant, vel certò timere desinant. Cic.

Citiùs is elegantly used for priùs; as, Vox me ci∣tiùs defecerit, quàm nomina. Cic.

Cùm is elegantly used. for etsi; as, Cùm plus etiam contenderimus; quàm possumus; minus tamen facie∣mus, quàm debemus. Cic.

De is elegantly put for in or per before words of Time: as, In comitium de nocte venit. Cic. Also for super; as, Regulus de captivis commutandis Romam missus. Cic. Also for ob or propter; as, Flebat uter∣que non de suo supplicio: sed pater de filii morte, de patris filius. Cic. Also for quod attinet; as, De pace, sentio simulationem esse apertam. Cic Also for se∣cundum; as, De amicorum sententiâ Rossius Romam confugit. Cic. Also for pro; as, De imperio decer∣tare. Cic.

Deinceps is elegantly put for deinde; as, De justi∣tiâ dictum est; deinceps, ut erat propositum, de liber∣tate dicendum. Cic.

Eâ re is elegantly used for propterea; Is metuit, & eâ re fugit. Cic.

E•• is elegantly used for ad id, or usque ad id; as, Eò redactae res erant, ut nulla amplius spes esset. Cic. Also for ideò; as, Illic homo aurum me scit habere, eò me salutat blandiú••. Plaut.

Ergo is elegantly used for causâ; as, Si quid con∣tra alias leges ejus legis ergo factum sit. Cic.

Ex is elegantly used for secundùm; as, Ex praece∣ptis philosophiae vita acta. Cic. Ʋt spero, statues ex dignitate nostrâ. Cic. Also for post; as, Ex consulatu profectus est in Galliam. Cic.

Extrà is elegantly used for praeter; as, Extra du∣cem, paucosque praeterea. Cic.

Hoc with quo is elegantly used for tanto quanto; as, Hoc audio libentiùs, quo saepius. Cic. Quo difficilius, hoc praeclarius. Cic.

In is elegantly used for inter; as, Hic in magnis viris non est habendus. Cic.

Is with qui is elegantly used for talis qualis; as, Itaque ego is in illum sum, quem me esse vis. Cic.

Id quod is elegantly put for quae res; as, Secedant improbi, secernant se à bonis, unum in locum congregen∣tur, muro denique id quod saepe jam dixi, secernantur à bonis. Cic.

Ita is elegantly put for hac conditione; as, Nam hoc ipsum ita justum est si est voluntarium. Cic.

Iterum is elegantly put for secundo; as, Fabulae vix dignae quae iterum legantur. Cic. Iterum hoc tertio nominati. Cic.

Juxta is elegantly put for secundum; as, Juxta deos in tuâ manu est. Tacit.

Licet is elegantly put for etiamsi; as, Licet corpus abesset meum, dignitas jam in patriam redierat. Cic.

Longè is elegantly used for procul; as, Isti nuncii quàm longè sint, nescio. Cic. Also for valde; as, Longè mihi alia mens. Sal.

Minus is elegantly used for non; as, At non nun∣quam quae praedicta sunt, minus eveniunt. Cic.

Nae is elegantly used for verè; as, Nae illi vehemen∣ter errant. Cic.

Nec is elegantly used for non; as, Quo mortuo nec ita multo post, in Galliam proficiscitur. Cic. Nec enim illa prima vera est. Cic.

Nihil is elegantly used for non; as, Hoc tamen opus in apertum ut proferas, nihil postulo. Cic.

Nisi is elegantly used for veruntamen; as, De re nihil possum judicare, nisi illud mihi persuadeo. Cic.

Nullus is elegantly used for non; as, Memini ta∣metsi nullus moneas. Ter.

Nusquam is elegantly used for nullo in loco; as, Ego verò nusquam esse illos puto. Cic.

Ob is elegantly used for ante; as, Mihi ob oculos exilium versatur. Cic.

Omnino is elegantly used for tantummodo and pror∣sus; as, Quinque omnino fuerunt, qui illum absolve∣runt. Cic. Epulabar cum sodalibus omnino modicé. Cic.

Parum is elegantly used for non satis; as, Duas da∣bo, una si parum est. Plaut.

Per is elegantly used for ob; as, Neque sciebat, neque per aetatem etiam poterat. Ter.

Perinde is elegantly used for aequè or ita; as, Phi∣losophia non perinde ac de hominum est vitâ merita, laudatur. Cic. Quae perdifficilia sunt, perinde habenda sunt, ac si effici non possint. Cic.

Prae is elegantly used for ante; as, Stillantem prae se pugionem tulit. Cic. Also for ob or propter; as, So∣lem, p••ae sagittarum multitudine, non videbitis. Cic.

Praeter is elegantly used for extra; as, Amicum sibi ex Consularibus neminem esse video, praeter Lucullum. Cic. Also for supra; as, Attici in eo genere praeter caeteros excellunt. Cic.

Praeterquam is used for nisi; as, Nullum à vobis praemium postulo, praeterquam hujus diei memoriam sempiternam. Cic.

Pro is used for ante; as, Illa praesidia, quae pro templis omnibus cernitis. Cic. Also for in; as, Lau∣dati quoque pro concione omnes sunt. Liv. Also for vice or loco; as, Tibi Marcelli statua pro patibulo fuit. Cic. Also for secundum; as, Civitatibus pro numero militum pecuniae summas describere. Cic. Also for ob or propter; as, Pro hujus peccatis ego supplicium sufferam. Plaut.

Prope is used for juxta; as, Cùm plebs prope ripam Anienis consedisset. Cic.

Propter is used for prope; as, In pratulo propter Platonis statuam consedimus. Cic. Ipse cum liberis

& colonis propter Aquilam adsistit. Sal.

Qua repeated is elegantly used for tum tum; as, Topiarium laudavi, ita omnia convestivit hederâ, quà basim villae, quà intercolumnia ambusationis. Cic.

Quando is elegantly used for quoniam; as, Quam quando complexus es, & tenes. Cic. So quandoqui∣dem; as, Quandoquidem tu istos oratores tantopere laudas. Cic.

Quamvis is elegantly used for quantumvis; as, Quasi verò mihi difficile sit, quamvis multos nominatim proferre. Cic.

Quasi is elegantly used for tanquam; as, Sic eas exponam, quasi ageretur res, non quasi narretur Cic. Also for sicut, or non secus ac; as, Quasi tua res aut honos agatur, ità laboras. Cic. Also for fere; as, Quantulus vobis videtur? mihi quasi pedalis. Cic.

Qui is elegantly used for ut; as, Nec tam sum in∣solens, qui me Jovem esse dicam. Cic. Also for qua∣lis; as, Sed illum eum esse puto, qui esse debeat. Cic.

Quid is elegantly used for cur; as, Sed quid ego argumentor? quid plura disputo? Cic.

Quod is elegantly used for quantum; as, Ipse (quod commod tuo fiat) cum eo colloquere. Cic. Also for quantum ad id quod; as, Quod ad me scribis de Her∣mathena, mihi gratissimum est. Cic. Also for quia; as, Qui enim beatior Epicurus, quod in patriâ vive∣bat; quàm Metrodorus, quod Athenis? Cic.

Quo is elegantly used for quanto; as, Sed quo erant suaviores, eo majorem dolorem ille casus affere∣bat. Cic. Quo gratior tua liberalitas C. Caesar, nobis qui illa videmus, debet esse. Cic. Also for ut; as, Quo faciliùs probaret illa Romani esse hominis, id∣circo—Cic.

Quomodo is elegantly used for ut or sicut; as, Po∣stulatio brevis, & quomodo mihi persuadeo, aliquanto aequior. Cic.

Quocirca is elegantly used for quamobrem; as, Quocirca bene apud majores nostros Senatus decrevit. Cic.

Quippe is elegantly used for utpote; as, Sol De∣mocrito magnus videtur, quippe homini erudito. Cic. Convivia cum fratre non inibat, quippe qui ne in oppi∣dum nisi perraro veniret. Cic.

Secundum is elegantly used for pro; as, Secundum nos judicari volumus. Cic.

Si is elegantly used for an; as, Dicito, si pascuntur aves. Cic. Also for etiamsi; as, Et meherculè, si nihil diceret, tanto officio me moveret. Cic.

Sin is elegantly put for sed si; as, Si ita est, omnia faciliora: sin aliter, magnum negotium. Cic.

Sub is elegantly used for statim post: as, Sub eque∣stris finem certaminis, coorta est pugna peditum. Liv.

Super is elegantly used for de; as, Simulque cogi∣tes, quid nobis agendum sit super legatione. Cic.

Supra is elegantly used for ante; as, Illa, quam supra dixi. Cic.

Tantùm is elegantly used for solum; as, Nomen tantùm virtutis usurpas: quid ipsa valeat, ignoras. Cic. So tantummodo.

Tum is elegantly used for deinde; as, Tum retionés in eâ disputatione à te collectae vetabant me reipublicae penitus diffidere. Cic.

Ʋbi is elegantly used for in quo, &c. as, Ʋt is cuique locus, ubi ipse sit, miserrimus esse videatur. Cic. Also for postquam; as, Ʋbi semel quis pejeraverit, ei credi postea, non oportet. Cic.

Vel is elegantly used for saltem; as, Postremò, si nullo alio pacto vel foenore. Ter. Also for etiam; as, Per me vel stertas licet, non modo quiescas. Cic. Hoc in genere nervorum vel minimum, suavitatis autem vel plurimum. Cic.

Velut is used for exempli causâ: as, Bestiae, quae è terrâ gignuntur, velut Crocodili. Cic.

Ʋltra is elegantly used for praeterea: as, Si pro∣babiliter dicentur, ne quid ultra a requiratis. Cic.

Ʋnde is elegantly used for ex quo, &c. as, Equi∣dem vobis fontes unde hauriretis, atque itinera ipsa putavit esse demonstranda. Cic.

Ʋnus is elegantly put for solus: as, In tuis summis laudibus excipiunt unam iracundiam. Cic.

Ʋt is elegantly put for quomodo: as, Quid agit tua uxor? Ʋt valet? Plaut. So utcunque for quomo∣docunque. Also for sicut; as, Erat cùm literis Latinis tum Graecis, ut temporibus illis, eruditus. Cic. Also for utpote qui: as, Ille, ut fuit semper apertissimus, non purgavit, sed indicavit. Cic. Also for licet: as, Verùm, ut hoc non sit, tamen servet rempublicam. Cic. Also for postquam: as, Ʋt ab urbe discessi, nullum praetermisi diem, quin aliquid ad te literarum darem. Cic.

Ʋt ut is elegantly put for utcunque: as, Ʋt ut haec sunt, tamen hoc faciam. Ter.

And thus far of the Particles that are used ele∣gantly for others. I now proceed to those that remain.

Of Particles which are elegantly used toge∣ther with others.

Ab hath usque elegantly joyned to it: as, Sed ab ùsque Tmolo petivit Cic.

Absque hath te or eo esset elegantly joyned to it: as, Nam absque te esset, rectè ego mihi vidissem. Ter.

Ad hath summam elegantly joyned with it: as, Ad summam animo forti sitis. Cic.

Aequè hath ac, atque, &, and ut elegantly joyned

with it: as, Quis esset tantus fructus in prosperis re∣bus, nisi haberes, qui illis aequè ac tu ipse, gauderet? Cic. Sed me colit & observat, aequè atque illum ipsum patronum suum. Cic. Neque ipsam amicitiam tueri possumus, nisi aequè amicos & nos ipsos diligamus. Cic. Itaque libentissimè praedicabo Cn. Pompeium studio & authoritate, aequè ut unumquemque vestrum pro salute meâ laborâsse. Cic.

Alius and aliter have ac and atque elegantly after them: as, Irrepit in hominum mentes alia dicentis, ac significantis dissimulatio. Cic. Non alius essem atque nunc sum. Cic. Ne sim salvus si aliter scribo, ac sentio. Cic. Aliter, atque ostenderam, facio. Cic.

Contra hath ac, atque, and quàm elegantly joyned to it: as, Ʋt contra, ac dicat, accipi & sentiri velit. Cic. Contra atque apud nos fieri solet. Varro. Contra, quàm nos suprà scripsimus. Gell.

Eo hath elegantly quo, quod, and quia answering to it: as, Non eo dico, quo mihi veniat in dubium tua fides. Cic. Eoque tardius scripsi ad te, quod quotidie ••eipsum expectabam. Cic. Id autem eo facilius crede∣batur, quia simile vero videbatur. Cic.

Facilè is elegantly joyned with primus or princeps: as, Non solùm sui municipii, sed illius vicinitatis facilè primus. Cic. Eudemus, Platonis auditor, in Astro∣logia, judicio doctissimorum hominum, facilè princeps. Cic.

Jam hath elegantly joyned with it inde, à, and usque, ab: as, Jam inde à Consulatu meo. Cic. Jam inde ab Aristotele. Cic. Vetus opinio est jam usque ab Heroicis ducta temporibus. Cic.

Interea hath elegantly dum and quoad joyned with it: as, Interea dum haec, quae dispersa sunt, coguntur. Cic. Interea quoad fides esset data, Caesarem factu∣rum, quae polliceretur. Caes.

Is hath ut elegantly joyned with it: as, Nec

tamen is sum, ut mea me maximè delectent. Cic.

Id hath aetatis or temporis elegantly joyned with it: as, Duo filii id aetatis. Cic. Id aetatis jam sumus, ut omnia fortiter ferre debeamus. Cic. Maximè quod is locus ab omni turbâ id temporis vacuus esset. Cic. Venit enim ad me, & quidem id temporis, ut retinen∣dus esset. Cic.

Ita is elegantly joyned with non or nec: as, Si∣mulachra praeclara, sed non ita antiqua. Cic. Nec ità multum provectus, rejectus Austro sum in eum ipsum locum unde conscenderam. Cic.

Juxta hath ac si elegantly joyned with it: as, Tum reliquis officiis, juxta ac si meus frater esset, susten∣tavit. Cic.

Licet hath per with his Accusative Case elegantly joyned to it: as, Per me vel stertas licet, non modò quiescas. Cic. Sinatis hunc facere, dum per aetatem licet. Ter.

Longè is elegantly joyned with words of Diffe∣rence, Dissimilitude, or Excellence: as, Longè ali∣ter, atque à me dicta erant detulerunt. Cic. Quod est longè secus. Cic. Vir longè post homines natos impro∣bissimus. Cic. Paetus longè princeps municipii Lucen∣sis. Cic.

Magis hath quàm and si elegantly joyned with it: as, Jus bonumque apud eos non legibus magis, quàm na∣turâ valebat. Sal. Magis dicas, si scias, quod ego scio. Plaut. It is also elegantly joyned unto Substantives, as well as to uncompared Adjectives: as, Nisi fortè magis erit parricida, qui consularem patrem, quàm si quis humilem necaverit. Cic.

Maximè hath elegantly joyned with it quàm, vel, quàm qui, ut quisque: as, Dicere quàm maximè ad ve∣ritatem accommoda. Cic. Quae quidem vel maximè suspicionem movent. Cic. Tam sum amicus reipublicae, quàm qui maximè. Cic. Ʋt quisque maximè opis

indigeat, it a ei potissimùm opitulari. Cic.

Minùs hath si elegantly joyned with it: as, Si minùs necari, at custodiri oportebat. Cic.

Mox hath quàm elegantly joyned with it: as, Quàm mox navigo? Plaut. Expecto quàm mox Chae∣rea hâc ratione utatur. Cic.

Ne hath quidem and nunc elegantly going with it: as, Nunquam illum ne minimâ quidem re, offendi. Cic. Ne nunc senum convivio delector. Cic.

Nec and neque are elegantly joyned with dum: as, Cassius ineptas literas misit, nec dum Bibuli erant alla∣tae. Cic. Neque dum Roma es profectus. Cic.

Nemo is elegantly joyned with homo and quisquam: as, Neminem hominem pluris facio. Cic. Nemo quis∣quam illorum ad te venit. Ter.

Nihil hath ne quidem divided by another word elegantly after it: as, Ad eas ego literas nihil scripsi, ne gratulandi quidem causâ. Cic.

Nimio hath plus elegantly joyned to it: as, Sed quia nimio plus te diligo. Cic.

Nisi hath si, quis, and siquis elegantly joyned with it: as, Nisi si id est, quod suspicor, aliquid monstri alunt. Ter. Nisi quis Deus nos respexerit. Cic. Nisi verò si quis est, qui Catilinae similes cum Catilinâ sentire non putet. Cic.

Non hath elegantly joyned with it quin, quo, and modo non: as, Non quin rectum esset, sed quia multò re∣ctius fuit. Cic. Non quo eâ sit mihi quicquam carius, aut esse debeat. Cic. Tu id non modò non prohibebas, verùm etiam approbabas. Cic.

Nullus hath quin elegantly after it: as, Dies fere nullus est, quin domum meam ventitet. Cic.

Nunquam hath ullus and quin coming elegantly after it: as, Nunquam ex tuis ullae mihi literae redditae sunt. Nunquam unum intermittit diem quin semper veniat. Ter.

Par hath ac and atque elegantly joyned to it: as, Nec mihi par cum Lucio ratio est, ac tecum fuit. Cic. Si par in nobis hujus artis, atque in illo Pictore sci••nti•• fuisset. Cic.

Perinde hath elegantly after it ac, ut, acsi, quasi; as, Non perinde, ac est merita, laudatur. Cic. Perinde erit, ut acceperis. Cic. Perinde, ac si virtute vicissent. Cic. Perinde quasi certi quicquam sit in rebus humanis. Cic.

Prae hath ut, quòd, and quàm elegantly with it, when comparison is noted: as, Parùm etiam, prae ut futurum est, praedicas. Plaut. Omnes res relictas habeo, prae quod tu velis. Plaut. Prae quàm quod molestum est. Plaut.

Primùm hath cum, nunc, ut, simulac, and omnium elegantly joyned with it: as, Cùm primùm in eam insulam veni. Cic. Equidem qui nunc primùm huc vene••im, satiari non queo. Cic. Ʋt primùm potestas data est. Cic. Simulac primùm niti possunt. Cic. Primùm omnium non te fugit. Cic.

Pro hath elegantly joyned with it ut, eo ac, eo ut, eo quòd, eo quantum; as, Prout hominis facultates fe∣rebant. Cic. Spero deos, pro eo ac mereor, relaturos esse gratiam. Cic. Pro eo ut temporis difficultas, ara∣torumque penuria tulit. Cic. Vereor nè parùm tibi, pro eo quod à te habeo, reddiderim. Cic. Pro eo, quan∣tum in quibusque sit ponderis, aestimanda sunt. Cic.

Prope hath à elegantly joyned with it: as, Prope à meis aedibus sedebas. Cic. Also ut: as, Prope fuit, ut Dictator crearetur. Liv.

Quàm hath ut and quomodo elegantly after it: as, Haec sunt dicta subtiliù••, quàm ut quivis ea possit ag∣noscere. Cic. Multa praeclara in eo viro cognovi: sed nihil est admirabilius, quàm quomodo ille mortem Mar∣ci filii tulit. Cic. It is also set with great elegancy before a Superlative Degree: as, Sed peto à te, ut

quàm celerrimè mihi librarius mittatur. Cic. Expo∣sui quàm brevissimè potui, oracula. Cic.

Quisquam hath omnium and unus elegantly joyned with it: as, An hoc dubit avit quisquam omnium, quin is venalem in Siciliâ jurisdictionem habuerit? Cic. Ne quisquam unus malis artibus postea taem popularis esset. Liv.

Quo is elegantly joyned with minùs: as, Nihil im∣pedit, quo minùs id, quod maximè placeat, facère possi∣mus. Cic. Quo minùs familiaris sum, hoc sum ad inve∣stigandum curiosior. Cic. Also with non: as, Non quo de tuâ constantiâ dubitem, sed quia mos est ità ro∣gandi, rogo. Cic.

Quin is elegantly used after Negative Particles, Nemo, nullus, nihil, non: as, Nemo Lilybaei fuit, quin viderit; in Siciliâ, quin audierit. Cic. Dies sere nul∣lus est, quin hic Satyrus domum meam ventitet. Cic. Causae nihil dico, quin ita sit. Cic. Non quin dissen∣tiam sed quod—Cic.

Quisque is elegantly used after se, suus, qui; an Adjective Numeral; or a Superlative Degree: also betwixt two Superlatives: as, Se quisque diligit. Suae quemque fortunae maximè poeniteat. Cic. In quo quisque artificio excellit, is in suo genere Rose us dicitur. Cic. Quinto quoque anno Sicilia censetur Cic. Certè enim recentissima quaeque sunt correcta & emendata maximé, Cic. Optimum quodque rarissimum est. Cic.

Quotus hath quisque elegantly joyned to it: as, Quotus enim quisque Philosophorum invenitur, qui sit ita moratus? Cic.

Secus hath ac, atque, and quàm elegantly after it: as, Non secus acsi meus esset frater. Cic. Sed si ali∣quanto secus, atque in tradendâ arte dici solet. Cic. Mihi autem erit maximae curae, nequid fiat secus quàm volumus. Cic.

Sin hath minùs elegantly joyned to it: as, Si per∣ficiunt,

optimè: sin minùs, ad nostrum Jovem reverta∣mur. Cic.

Similiter hath ac, atque, and utsi elegantly after it: as, Similiter facis, ac si me roges, cur te duobus contuear oculis. Cic. Neque verò illum similiter, at∣que ipse eram, commotum esse vidi. Cic. Similiter facere eos, qui inter se contenderent, ut si nautae inter se certarent. Cic. The Adjective Similis hath the same Particles elegantly after it: as, Nec similem habeat vultum ac si ampullam perdidisset. Cic. 4. de Fin.

Simul hath elegantly after it ac, atque, and ut: as, Simul ac mihi collibitum est. Cic. Quod is simul at∣que sensit—Cic. Simul ut videro Curionem. Cic.

Suprà hath quàm and nihil elegantly joyned with it: as, Corpus patiens inediae suprà quàm cuique credi∣bile est. Sal. Ita accuratè ut nihil suprà. Cic.

Talis hath elegantly after it ac, or atque, ut, and qui: as, Honos talis paucis est datus, ac mihi Cic. Tali atque hic est infortunio. Ter. Vita quidem talis fuit ut nihil posset accedere. Cic. Talem igitur te esse oportet, qui primum te ab impiorum civium societate sejungas. Cic.

Tam hath elegantly after it quàm, ut, qui, and quàm, qui: as, Tam te diligit quàm si vixerit tecum. Cic. Non essem tam inurbanus, ut eo gravarer, quod vos cupere sentirem. Cic. Quis est tam Lynceus, qui in tantis tenebris nihil offendat? Cic. Tam levis, quàm qui levissimus. Cic. Tam mihi gratum id erit, quàm quod gratissimum. Cic.

Tantisper hath dum elegantly after it: as, Ego hic tantisper dum exit, te opperiar foris. Ter.

Tantum hath non elegantly after it: as, Tantum non statim à funere ad negotiorum consuetudinem redit. Sueton.

Tum hath demum and denique elegantly after it: as, Tum demum sciam rectè monuisse, si tu rectè caveris.

Plaut. Tum denique fore beatas respub. putavit, si aut docti, aut sapientes homines eas regere coepissent. Cic.

Ʋbi hath primùm elegantly joyned with it: as, Ʋbi primùm est licitum, illico properavi abire de foro: Plaut.

Vel hath maximè and optimè joyned elegantly to it: as, Hoc uno praestamus vel maximè feris—Cic. Cùm Sophocles vel optimè scripserit, tamen—Cic. 2. de Fin.

Vix hath dum elegantly joyned to it: as, Vix dum epistolam tuam legeram, cùm ad me Posthumius Curius venit. Cic. Also aut ne with it self repeated: as, Quae propter exiguitatem vix, aut ne vix quidem appareant. Cic. 4. de Fin.

Ʋltrà hath quàm elegantly joyned to it: as, Ex∣ordium, ultrà quàm satis est, producitur. Cic. Servum gravissimè de se opinantem, non ultrà quàm compedibus coercuit. Sueton.

Ʋsque hath à, a••, c, ex, ad, in elegantly joyned to it: as, Ʋsque à mari supero Romam proficisci. Cic. Siculo prospexit ab usque Pachyno. Virg. Ʋsque è Per∣siâ Durr. Qui ex ultimâ Syriâ navigarent. Cic. 7. Verr. Fugientes usque ad flumen persequuntur. Caes. 7. B. Gall. Legatum usque in Hispaniam misit. Cic pro Leg. Manil.

Ʋt hath statim elegantly coming with it: as, Phi∣lippus, ut heri me salutavit, statim Romam profectus est. Cic. So primùm and confestim.

And thus much of the Particles which are ele∣gantly used together with others.

Now, as these are not all the Particles, whereof there be Elegant uses; so neither are these all the Elegant uses, that are made of these Particles: there being, as, many more besides these, so, very much more observable (and nothing less elegant than what is here said) of these. All I intended herein,

was to give the Learner such a taste of these Delica∣cies, as might wher his Phansie to a mo••e eager de∣sire after a fuller knowledge of them. Notwith∣standing, even these few well digested, will have such influence upon all his Exercises, as that no one of them will be without some savoury relish of pure Roman Eloquence. Only I must caution the Teacher, that he patiently bear with, and gently correct his Scholars mistakes in these things; which, until he be well versed in them, he will, for want of judgment and experience, be apt to fall into▪ And this is all I shall say for the present of the Elegan∣cies of the Particles.

CHAP. IX. Of the Idioms of English and Latine.

EVery Language hath its Idiotis••s and Proprie∣ties, Phrases and Forms of speaking, peculiar to it self, which cannot be rendred word for word into any other Language but with much barbarity and baldness of expression. Thus however it is in English and Latine: insomuch that either way to be nimium fidus interpres, to stick too close to the Verbal Translation will betray a man into ridiculous absurdities. Therefore to take the Learner off again from his nice insisting on Verbal Translating, and remedy those inconveniencies that come by his sticking too close thereto, it will be necessary to ac∣quaint him with the Idiotisms of both the English and Latine, and shew him how to express himself in either Language according to the respective Pro∣prieties thereof.

The one Precept in order to this, is, To heed the Sense more than the Words, and to fit the expression thereunto: That being well rendred, whether into English or Latine, whose sense is clearly and fully expressed in the Language whereby it is rendred, though the words be more or fewer than were in that, whence the Translation was made. Observa∣tion indeed hath the main stroke in this business. Yet sundry Helps may be administred. And for the ease of the Master, and profit of the Scholar, I shall set down such as I either conceive, or have found beneficial in this case.

One may be for the Teacher to observe unto him all the elegant Idiotisms, that accidentally occur in his Lectures and Exercises; and cause him to set them down in a Book, and often to review them, and repeat them.

Another may be, to put him to learn such Latine Authors, as are so translated into English, as that the propriety of both Languages is heeded unto and observed by the Translator, allowing him the use of the Translation. Such are Tully's Offices tran∣slated by Mr. Brinslie, Terence's Comedies by Mr. Ber∣nard, Corderius's Colloquies by Mr. Hoole, &c. and Janua Linguarum by Mr. Robotham.

A third may be to give him a Catalogue of Eng∣lish Idiotisms barbarously translated, and together with them, by way of correction, the elegant tran∣slation of them; and labour to make him under∣stand the ridiculous barbarity of the one, and pro∣priety and elegancy of the other, after this manner.

Send me word Bar. Mitte mihi verbum.

Send me word Eleg. Fac me per literas certiorem.

I am short of money Bar. Brevis sum pecuniae.

I am short of money Eleg. Deficit me pecunia.

Of this nature Corderius composed a whole Book, styled, De corrupti sermonis emendatione. which may be usefully perused by any Learner, or young Tea∣cher of the Latine Tongue.

A fourth may be for the Teacher, first, to read over himself every English, that his Scholar is to make into Latine, and to observe what Idiotisms oc∣cur in that, and advertise the Learner of them, and shew him how to vary the English Phrase into such other expression, as is capable of an Elegant Verbal Translation.

But the fifth, (and that which I ever found most beneficial) is to give the Learner to Translate some Englishes composed all, or most of Idiomatical expressi∣ons, such as cannot, without most ridiculous barba∣rity, be translated word for word into Latine: and to shew him, and make him understand the ridicu∣lous barbarousness of his own verbal Translations, and to furnish him instead thereof with the proper and elegant expressions. When he hath gone over in translating any one such English, which would be of some pretty length, then cause him to be very exact in giving readily without book, phrase by phrase, the corrected Latine for the English, and the English for the Latine. Also make him con∣strue the Latine verbatim, so far as it may with good sense be done (it were not amiss to make him tran∣slate it word for word, as far as may be) for this will help him still more to the understanding of the English Phrase, and teach him how to resolve such English Phrases, into other words and expressions of like import, and much facilitate the whole work. After that, cause him to translate it over again, getting new Phrases for every expression; and if there be no new supply (which it is rare but there will be) let him vary what he hath, so as that it may

seem new. And let him do again all the same with this second Translation, which he did with the former. And last of all, cause him (looking upon and reading his English, unless, (which is better) he can say it without book) to give for every Eng∣lish expression both several Latine Translations. Then proceed to another; and still to another of the same nature, so long as there shall be need or reason.

This Exercise, as it is of all others the most diffi∣cult, so also the most profitable. It is not imagi∣nable what a strange alteration to the better it will in short time produce in all the Scholars perfor∣mances. And therefore I do most seriously above all others recommend it from my own experience unto the practice of others.

For the help of the Scholar in this work, there are of late sundry Books come forth, viz. Mr. Clarks Phraseologia Puerilis, Mr. Willis's Anglicisms Latini∣zed; and last of all, my own Idiomatologia Anglo-Latina, or English Latine Phraseologie, in which, if the Learner should be put to get every day one Head of Phrases so perfectly at least, as that look∣ing only on the English, he can give the Latine for it; and looking only on the Latine, can for it give the English, I say not how much his profiting would be in a short time, but leave it to tryal.

And for the ease of the Master, there are extant in Mr. Clarks Dux Grammaticus (pag. 246. &c.) se∣veral English Dialogues, of such composition as I spake, ready for Translation; which, by that time the Scholar hath well gone through with, according to the way that I speak of, he will (by Gods bles∣sing on his pains and industry) have attained such a dexterity in Translating, that he will now be fit to be put to any performance, where his Invention

shall be exercised henceforward for Matter, as his Memory all this while hath been for Words, being able to cloth his thoughts in proper Language, and so fit for the Higher School, where I shall leave him to the Masters skill and care.

But because that Book may not be to be had at every hand to be consulted with, therefore that the Reader may not go without an exemplification of the thing I pr••••ound; and withal, that I may con∣tribute still somewhat more toward the ease of the Teacher, and use of the Learner, I have here adde I some new Dialogues of mine own contriving for that purpose: The Translation whereof, if perfor∣med according to the Idiome of the Latine, will be no unelegant Composition (as the Latines of them lying by me, if occasion were, would shew, which I forbear to publish, because the design of these is only to be Englishes for others to translate into La∣tine:) But if the Idiome of the Latine be not ob∣served in the rendring, then the Translation will be bald and unelegant, and indeed not Latine, but a kind of barbarous and ridiculous Gibberish, like that which Petties and Puisnees are used to speak.

Certain Idiomatical Dialogues, contrived on purpose by the Translation of them to bring off Children from the baldness of a Verbal Translating.

DIALOGUE I.

Francis and John.

F.

WHat says the World of me?

J.

'Tis the common speech of the world, that you are too much given to the world.

F.

This is the fashion of the world, to say any thing of any man.

J.

I believe you cannot tell which way in the world to help it.

F.

Could I do it, it would be as acceptable to me as any thing in the world.

J.

It is to no end in the world to go about it.

F.

I had as lieve as any thing in the world, I could tell who were the Author of that slander. Let him go to the worlds end, I will resolve to follow him.

J.

Ah by no means in the world, you shall not do so: that would be a piece of the greatest folly in the world.

F.

I should be the maddest man in the world, if I should let such a one as him scape scot free.

J.

There is nothing in the world more foolish than an angry man, who minds nothing in the world, but how to revenge himself of those, that have done him wrong.

F.

It makes me so mad to have such a thing talk∣ed

of me, that I neither know whereabouts in the world I am, nor what in the world to do, nor which way in the world to turn me.

J.

It is one of the strangest things in the world, that you should be so angry for a thing of nothing.

F.

I had as good be out of the world, as live to be so slandered in it.

J.

You talk just for all the world, as if there were no where in the world any to be found, who were as ill talked of as you.

F.

Go any whither in the world, and all the world over, you will find none who deserves less than I do, to be so ill talked of.

J.

As the world rules, you shall find few, but suffer as ill as you do. And this is no new com∣plaint but now come up. In elder times Socra∣tes and a world more, who are many years since gone to the other world, who yet will be well spoken of to the worlds end, were in every whit as bad a case as you. And he were the maddest man in the world, that should think not to fare as others do.

F.

It is a world of wrongs that I have suffered in this respect: but there seems to be somewhat of reason in what you say; and therefore let the world go which way it will, I will resolve to take all well.

J.

'Tis Christian-like done of you: and when the world, and all things in the world shall come to nothing, then shall the benefit of this so great con∣tentedness of yours be in being.

DIALOGUE II.

Charles. Anthony.

C.

HOw do Horses sell here, Anthony?

A.

They are things that a while ago would have given money, but now a days they hardly give any thing.

C.

But Bullocks surely bear a price.

A.

Truly within this few years they would have given something, but now they too are much fallen of price: Horses will give more than they yet. You may buy a good pair of Bullocks for eight pound.

C.

And are Forms down of price too?

A.

How should they be otherwise, when Corn gives so little? I have a piece of Land to sell; I am confiden•• there is no better in all this Country, and that will give more, and yet I may go seek my Chap∣man.

C.

How do you value it? set a price on it: I'le be your Chapman, ••f we can agree of price.

A.

Take it for an hundred pound.

C.

You are over dear of it; it is not worth so much. Give me your hand, here's fifty for you.

A.

It is worth as much more, if a man might have to the worth o•• it.

C.

Chuse it, I will not give a penny more for it.

A.

And I will not take a penny less for it.

C.

Then I do not believe we shall agree.

A.

I cannot help that, unless I mean to undo my self, as God forbid I should. I stand not in so great need yet, I thank God. No doubt but within a while Land will rise of price again.

C.

Will you take my money before I go? I will pay you down ready money.

A.

I have told you my price. I cannot abate a penny of it. If you like it so, I will be my words-master.

C.

If that be your mind, I shall give over, and not give you one word more.

A.

As you have a mind. I have told you my mind.

C.

Then farewel, Anthony.

A.

Farewel to you, Charles.

DIALOGUE III.

Edward. Andrew.

E.

ANdrew, it gave me in my mind, there would be somewhat to do betwixt George and Thomas, before they had done and parted.

A.

What's the matter, Ned?

E.

It so fell out, that they fell out so, that it came at last to handy strokes.

A.

That's a bad matter; but who, I pray thee, got the better of it?

E.

Though Thomas were the better cuffer, and for a while had the better of it, yet at last they part∣ed even hands. For if Thomas gave George a dash on the teeth, and made him give back, George had a good heart, and well knowing what a stout man he had to do withal, behaved himself like a man, and would not give out, but gave him like for like.

A.

What was the matter, that they fell together by the ears?

E.

George making his boast, that he was descend∣ed from a Knight, gave out, that he was come of as good a house as Thomas was. Whereupon Thomas took George a box on the ear: and withal gave him warning to give over his comparing himself with

him, who was of noble blood; and said moreover he would give him as much more, if he took not heed.

A.

What answer did George give him to this?

E.

He only gave him a Challenge into the field, and then gave him never a word more.

A.

In my mind they are both to blame.

E.

And I am of your mind too: for they should not have given way to their anger, but have given satisfaction to one another, as reason was; in as much as Christ in the Laws that he hath given the Church, hath given us in charge not to do, but as we would be done unto: but they that wholly give themselves to pleasure, as most young men do, little mind the Laws of Christ, or give their minds to the keeping of them.

A.

I hope, they were made friends again.

E.

Yes, that they were, and they are now as great friends as ever.

A.

I pray you, who made them friends?

E.

One that is a very great friend to them both, as they give out, came upon them, as they were fighting, and parted the fray betwixt them, and prevailed so far with them, that he made them friends. And from henceforth I hope they will be always friends.

A.

In truth it was kindly done of him, and like a friend, to set them at one again.

E.

Indeed it was done of him like a Christian: and no doubt but in time he shall get that blessing, which Christ in his Gospel hath promised to give unto the Peace-makers for it.

A.

I give God thanks for it, that the matter end∣ed so: for I was a little fearful what the end of it would be.

DIALOGUE IV.

Matthew. Adrian.

M.

ADrian, how came that into Williams head to marry a Wife, that is so old, she is past child-bearing?

A.

In truth, Matthew, that cannot I tell now: but this I'le pass you my word for, that all i•• past and done between them, and that without many words passing on either side. And to say truth, so pretty a Woman she was, and so young to see to, that she might have passed for a child-bearing Wo∣man.

M.

I believe then, as matters pass, he hardly hath a Wife to his mind.

A.

There is no day almost passeth him, but he wishes him unmarried again a hundred times over. But now 'tis past cure, he is undone: and though in times past he did ever pass his time in pleasure, yet must he now pass the rest of his life in trouble.

M.

I am sorry the matter is brought to that pass. Though there were that said it would so come to pass, that he would repent him of his marrying, be∣fore three days were passed and come to an end.

A.

For the most part it so comes to pass, as in∣deed it needs must come to pass, when men that are scarce past children, rashly run on their own heads, and pass not for the advice of their friends, who far pass them in wisdom and experience, by which they might more happily bring their purposes to pass.

M.

I believe it is come to pass as some men wish∣ed, whom I think good to pass over without men∣tioning. For my self, I am past marrying, and so pass not for my self. Only I wish that some would take warning by others harms.

A.

Let us let these things pass, as things of no concernment unto us, and pass away the time in o∣ther talk.

M.

At present I am a little busie, so that I cannot tarry any longer with thee: to morrow, and you please, we will meet again, and talk our bellyfuls.

A.

Agreed. And in the mean time fare you well.

DIALOGUE V.

Mark and Paul.

M.

I Wonder, Paul, what should be the reason, that there was such a quarter kept at Geneva.

P.

Caesar hearing, that the Enemy had broke out from all quarters, though sooner than ordinary, drew his Souldiers out of their Winter quarters in∣to the field.

M.

There was some reason for it. But where did they quarter?

P.

About that time they had taken up their quarters about Marseil.

M.

What became of that stir?

P.

Caesar beating up their quarters all on a sud∣den, put them into such disorder, that they present∣ly forsook their Arms, and took their heels, and ran away. Nevertheless a quarter of the Enemies Army was slain.

M.

What became of the rest?

P.

Some escaped by flight: others were taken alive, and had quarter given them.

M.

He plaid his part finely. But I had heard, there was no quarter given.

P.

Nay, they that asked for quarter, had it: they only being killed that would not take quarter.

M.

'Twas Prince like done: for as the Poet long since said, It is the part of a Prince to spare them that submit, but to bring down those that stand it out.

DIALOGUE VI.

Richard and Peter.

R.

LEt us consider, Peter, how far it may be fit for us to make our selves to do in this affair.

P.

In truth I do not think it fit, that we our selves should be at the doing of it.

R.

What else then do you think fit to be done then?

P.

I think we must think of, and at a fit time send over thither a man fit for that imployment.

R.

Money is fit: and I desire by all means that what is fit should be done: but I cannot think of a man fit to send: and this business is not fit to be put to every one, but one that is fit for the turn, and will do no more but what is fit.

P.

You do as it is fit you should. But what think you of Giles, a man fit for any thing, and that can fit his speech to any turn; and who hath now got shooes so fit for his feet, that though a while ago he had a fit of the Gout, yet now it is compleatly fitted for going; may not he fit our turn?

R.

He will do well for a fit: but sometimes he falls into a fit of talking, and then talks more than is fit, and so marrs all.

P.

If his wit do but come and go by fits, it were more fit that lame Giles were let alone, and not sent at this fit.

R.

'Tis as I tell you.

DIALOGUE VII.

Thomas and George.

T

GEorge, have you heard the news of Robert?

G.

What? that he is over head and ears love?

T.

I mar'l who put it into his head to love that Wench. This mischief will fall on his pate, be he who he will be.

G.

I imagine he went to her of his own head.

T.

But do not he and Richard lay their heads to∣gether sometimes?

G.

You have hit the nail on the head.

T.

Some mischief or other will light on their heads. But this it is to give young men their heads, who do things of greatest concernment, they ca••e not how, and hand over head.

G.

But, if it should come into his Fathers head, who is one of the heads of the people, that he had any such mind, he would go near to break his head with his staff next time he met him, though he were sure to have a smart fine set on his own head for it afterwards.

T.

'Twere more fit he were bravely leading Soul∣diers in the head of an Army, than so basely lying in a Ladies lap.

G.

In truth it is just as you say. But thus you see, the world rules. Farewel.

DIALOGUE VIII.

Cornelius and Tiberius.

C.

LIst to, Tiberius, have you read the List of the Sword-players?

T.

Yes, Cornelius, I have read it all over.

C.

Hath Sisennius listed himself among them?

T

He was not in that List, that I saw.

C.

'Tis like he hath no list, either to enter the Lists with any man, or so much as to run from the Lists to the Goal.

T.

Why should a man undertake what he hath no list to? Let every man do as he lists.

C.

'Tis a fine thing indeed for a man to live as he lists: but that is not as every man lists.

T.

He may do what he lists, that lists to do but what he may.

DIALOGUE IX.

Giles and Humphry.

G.

HOw now, Humphry? what makes you so sad? is all well at home?

H.

I would it were. For to tell you truly we are in an ill taking for my Brother Harry.

G.

What's the matter?

H.

Woe is me! three days ago, without making any body acquainted with his purpose, he took Boat, and went over Sea; and what is become of him we cannot tell.

G.

How can you tell that he is gone over Sea?

H.

We were told it by one, whose word may be taken: and who came to us on purpose to tell us.

G.

Is your Father made acquainted with it yet?

H.

Yes, we told him of all.

G.

And what said he to it? how did he take it? did he not take on, when he was told it?

H.

We are somewhat afraid he should take some harm by it, if we should tell him: but he seemed to take it very patiently. He only said, Since folly hath taken so deep root in him, that he will neither take my counsel, nor take example by others to do well, but still takes bad courses, let him take his swing for me, and take his course.

G.

I was afraid he should have taken it mightily to heart: but it seems he never takes thought, what becomes of him.

H.

You are mightily mistaken, Giles; for though

he makes as though he did not grieve, yet it grieves him to the heart: and you may see it by his words, which, if you take them not in the wrong meaning, do plainly enough shew that he is ill vexed. Take my word for this, he is so troubled in mind, how closely soever he carry it, that he is quite taken off from business, and lets all be at sixes and sevens.

G.

What course do you think your Brother will take now?

H.

I suppose he will take his pleasure as long as his money lasts, which he took up at use before he went, and took away with him, when he went. Af∣ter, he must take his fortune.

G.

While he takes these so wrong courses, he hardly takes after his Father.

H.

No, no; he takes not at all after him. He took a wiser course.

G.

But hath he not been used to take pains? or is he unable to take any pains?

H.

He hath taken some pains in some kind of studies, which some people are mightily taken with. And he must shortly take his choice, whether he will take pains or starve. For he hath afore now spent more money, than he took with him now, in less than a years time.

G.

In my mind, it will be the best course he can take, to come back: and if he do, no doubt his Fa∣ther will be glad to see him, and within a while take to him again.

H.

God forbid else. Yet this I assure my self of, that when time serves he will take him aside, and take him up sharply for his going away.

G.

There is no doubt of this: and it will be but sit for him so to do.

H.

God send he but come well home; and for the rest I take no great care.

DIALOGUE X.

Orbilius and Davus.

O.

YOu, Boy, loose this arrant Knave's points, and down with his breeches. I'le pay him soundly, and I live. Why don't you stir? Give me a rod, some body, quickly. Go to, take him upon your back; up with him, I say, aloft.

D.

Sir, will you punish me before you have heard me speak for my self? Do me right, or be no Master.

O.

So I will: for I will serve you as you deserve.

D.

But that you may not abuse me, hear me I pray you first, what I have to say for my self.

O.

As if you could say any thing for your self, that were worth the hearing! a likely matter.

D.

Truly, Sir, you cannot tell, until you have heard.

O.

Say then quickly, what you have to say.

D.

This I say then, that you are too much in pas∣sion at present to do but right in punishing. For it cannot be, that he should observe a measure in pu∣nishing, that keeps anger while he punisheth. And therefore do as Plato did, who, as they report, said to his servant, that had done a fault, But that I am angry, I would beat thee: and let the punishing of me alone till another time. And do not go to beat me now in your anger; lest you anger it afterwards when it will be too late.

O.

How finely the Knave plays the Philosopher! Well, that you may not hereafter say, you had to do with an unreasonable beast, and not with a man of reason, I will let you alone for the present, and call you to an account hereafter, for what you have done amiss to day. Let him down.

D.

Thus far well, I have gained time; I may per∣haps too get my pardon at last. In the mean time I'le have a care to offend no more.

DIALOGUE.

Henry. Robert.

H.

WHat a world is this! What should a man say to it? when every body falls thus foul upon poor and most harm∣less innocents: 'tis all one, as the world rules, to be a knave and an honest man, now adays.

R.

Indeed for the most part they fare alike: or rather the better a man is, the worse is he dealt with∣all for the most part.

H.

What wonder? when men are so given to lying, and to follow wickedness, and give their mind•• to nothing, but to devise mis∣chief.

R.

Men take such bad courses, that one knows not whom to trust.

H.

Before I take this at their hands, and put up so gross

wrongs, I'le do any thing.

R.

You are as much to blame, in that you look to fare better. Ill will never spake well. Never take it to heart, man.

H.

Why what must I do then?

R.

I would have you to follow my counsel, please God and your own Consci∣ence, and do your duty in your place.

H.

If a man be taken tardy, and do amiss but once, he is sure to hear of it at every hand.

R.

Be ruled by me, and never take that to heart, that they set at their heels, and care not a pin for them all.

H.

'Tis not so easie a matter as you think, to take these things well, God give us patience, for we stand in great need there∣of.

R.

Indeed they had as

good take a mans purse by the high way side, as to rob him of his good name; and they might even as well hang him outright, as thus to use him.

H.

'Tis as dishonourable, for they must answer at Gods Judgment-seat for the one, as well as at earthly Bars for the other.

R.

'Tis no very strange thing, for thus have they done with the best men ever since the Apostles times.

H.

And for any thing I see, there is small hope of mends, men rather grow worse and worse.

R.

Be you content there∣fore, mind your calling, look to your book, study hard, and follow learning for all that men say or do of you.

H.

I see now he must rise betimes that pleaseth all. Farewel.

Henry. Robert.

H.

HEm, quid hic re∣rum status est! quid dicas? cùm nemo non tam indignè in pau∣perculos summéque in∣noxios homunculos im∣petum faciat; perinde est, ut nunc fit, utrum ncbulo sis, an vir bonus, hoc tempore.

R.

Reverà utrisque ea∣dem, magnam partem usu-veniunt: vel potiùs quantò sanctioribus quis moribus vixerit, tantò ferè modis indignioribus tractatur.

H.

Quid mirum? cùm ita sint plerique proclives ad mentiendum, & ad flagitium quodvis perpe∣trandum, nec ad aliud quicquam adjiciant ani∣mum, quàm ad malum moliendum.

R.

Ita pravis vivitur moribus, ut parum con∣stet cui quis fidē habeat.

H.

Potiùs quàm isthuc ab iis accipiam, at{que} im∣punè fieri mihi tam insig∣nitè injuriam patiar, om∣nia

agam [omnem move∣bo lapidem.]

R.

Simili ipse in culpâ versaris, meliore qui loco tuas fore res exspectes. Mala mens, mala lingua. Ne te propterea afflictes [animi angas.]

H.

Quid itaque mihi agendum est?

R.

Meo de consilio velim facias. Deo, ani∣mique tui conscientiae placeas, & quam es na∣ctus, hanc provinciam ornes.

H.

Si quis oscitans op∣primatur, unicâque vel vice titubaverit, non du∣bium est quin magno ei passim probro futurum sit.

R.

Ausculta mihi, nec sit ea tibi res solicitudini, quam illi súsque déque habent, quin eos omnes non tanti aestimes.

H.

Haud ita est facile, ac tibi videtur, aequo ista animo tolerare. Donet nobis Deus patientiam; nam illa multum nobis opus est.

R.

Unum sanè & idem

hoc est, regiâ eunti viâ marsupium auferre, at{que} bonam ejus existimatio∣nem laedere, quin aequè eum vel patibulo suspen∣dant, atque modis ita in∣dignis accipiant.

H.

Aequè inhonestum est, tā enim alterius red∣denda est ab iis ratio pro tribunali divino, quàm alterius in foro humano.

R.

Non magnopere mirandum est, hoc enim pacto cum virorum opti∣mis ab Apostolicis jam us{que} temporibus egerunt.

H.

Et quantum ego perspicio, quàm exigua illorum corrigendi spes est, potiùs indies in pejus proficiunt.

R.

Quin tu ergo acqui∣esce, res tuas sedulò age, summam in libros curam impende, animum ad rei literariae studium diligen∣ter adjunge, plurimúm{que} confer operae ad conse∣quendam eruditionem, ut ut de te populi sermo sit.

H.

Experior jam per∣quam esse difficile place∣re omnibus. Vale.

Henricus. Robertus.

H.

QUae hujus mundi conditio est! quid sentias? cum tantis illi passim injuriis affici∣antur pauperum qui ma∣ximè sunt innocui; có∣dem reoidit, quomodo nune est, frugine quis, an nequam homo sit, his temporibus.

R.

Similia sanè uter{que} eorum magnâ ex parte patiuntur; seu potiùs quo quis vir praestantior fue∣rit, hoc plurimùm dete∣riùs cum illo agitur.

H.

Quid hoc monstri est? cùm adeò strenua detur à plerisque opera mendaciis confingendis omnibús{que} vitae turpitudi∣nibus in se admittendis, ne{que} adjungatur ad aliud quicquam animus nisi ad perniciē comminiscendā.

R.

Sic flagitiosa à ple∣risque omnibus vita agi∣tur, ut incertum sit in quo fiducia reponatur.

H.

Priùs quàm aequo istuc animo feram, adeó∣que insigni me injuriâ af∣fici inultus perpetiar, ni∣hil

non experiar [coelo terram miscebo]

R.

Tam in vitio ipse es, quod melius actum iri tecum speras. Malevo∣li, maledici. Ea noli ••e re macerare [aegritudini de∣dere.]

H.

Quid me ergo fa∣cere oportet?

R.

Quod ego tibi de dero consilium, id exse∣quere, Divino numini mentí{que} tuae recti consciae obsecunda, tuúm{que} pro lo∣ci tui ratione officiū cole

H.

Si quis delictum in se admisisse offendatur, semél{que} unquam perpe∣ram egerit, non deerunt, qui id ei primâ quâque occasione exprobrent.

R.

Me audi, ne{que} ullâ sis de eo solicitudine quod hi pro nihilo du∣cunt, atque universos il∣los flocci facias.

H.

Majoris est res ne∣gotii quàm tu opinaris, aequi boní{que} haec consule∣re. Patientiâ donet nos Deus, hâc enim nos quàm maximè egemus.

R.

Una profectò res est

sive cui nummos regiam secus viam adimant, sive existimationi ejus infa∣miae maculam inurant, imò satius esset, ut è ve∣stigio eum suspendio strangulent, quàm tantâ contumeliâ excipiant.

H.

Perinde est inglori∣um; aequè enim respon¦dendum est illis de altero ad Dei tribunal, at{que} de al∣tero ad cancellos forēses.

R.

Minimè mirum est, nam ad hunc modum spectatissimos quos{que} vi¦ros jam inde ab ipsis Apostolis tractârunt.

H.

Quantum verò ego intelligere possum, fore ut in meliores evadant vix est sperandum, magis in deterius quotidie à plerisque degeneratur.

R.

Tu ita{que} contentus sorte tuâ abi, munus tuum dignè administra, strenuā in libris operam pone, in studia tua diligenter in∣cumbe, omnéque in do∣ctrinâ consequendâ tem∣pus tuum colloca, quic∣quid de te ab aliis dica∣tur, agatúrve.

H.

Nunc perspicio mul∣ti esse rem laboris nemi∣ni displicere.

Henricus. Robertus.

H.

O Qualis est haec rerum facies! quid cui possit in mentem venire? quando in paupe∣riorum quosque innocen∣tiores tam foede undi{que} à quibus{que} incurritur; tan∣tundē est, ut mores sunt, sive quis probus sive im∣probus fuerit, nunc dierū.

R.

Profectò pariter cum utroque maximam partem agitur; sive po∣tiùs quo quis homo me∣lior audit, eo plerunque pejora patitur.

H.

Haud mirabile est: quando tam sunt homines proni ad mendacia exco∣gitanda, & improbissima quae{que} facinora facienda, atque ad nihil applicant animum praeterquam ma∣chinandum aliis pestem.

R.

Adeò pravis pleri∣que utuntur consiliis ut nescias cui fidem ha∣beas.

H.

Citiùs quàm ego ist∣huc boni consulam, tan∣tám{que} factam mihi injuri∣am impunitam dimittam,

nihil intactum relinquam [Acheronta movebo.]

R.

Tua non minor cul∣pa est, cùm rect••ù•• i•••• ti∣bi consultum ••••s M••••e••o∣lorum nunquam non ma∣lus fermo. Haec te••es ne malè habeat [cave cordi tuo doleat.]

H.

Quid igitur debe∣bo ego facere?

R.

Meam velim aucto∣ritatem & consilium se∣quare. Deo propriaeque mentis conscientiae morē geras, ac tuum quo es loco munus sedulus praestes.

H.

Facinore si in ullo deprehendaris, at{que} om∣nino semel lapsus fueris, id tibi ab omnibus, prout res se tulerit, vitio ver∣tetur.

R.

Mihi obtempera, nolique ob illud tuum so∣licitare animum, quod isti sibi despicatui habent, sed illos cunctos nec pili pendas.

H.

Non adeò expedita res est at{que} tu existimas, haec humaniter ferre. Im∣pertiat nobis Deus pati∣entiam, etenim nos hujus vehementer indigemus.

R.

Reverà nihil interest

utrum aliquem regiam juxta viam pecuniis ex∣uant, an ignominiae sor∣dibus ejus famam detur∣pent, quinetiam eâdem operâ ei laqueo gulam frangant, quâ illum tam indignè tractant.

H.

Nihilo minus est in∣fame, nam tam debebunt Deo reddere rationem de altero, quàm de altero hominibus.

R.

Non est hoc adeò monstri simile, quando∣quidem ipsis jam inde usque ab Apostolis ita cum optimis quibusque viris agi solitum est.

H.

Atque ut mea per∣spicientia est, vix est ut speres futurum, ut un∣quam corrigantur, potiùs in pejus magis magisque prolabuntur.

R.

Aequi igitur boni{que} tu isthaec consule, tuum quod tibi datum est pensum confice, libris tuis ani∣mum intende, in studiis tuis omnes industriae tuae nervos contende, bonis{que} te totum literis dede, quocun{que} te homines lo∣co, numeróve habeant.

H.

Compertū habeo jam maximo esse illi opere annitēdū cui in animo est omne ut punctum ferat.

BEcause I mentioned above the Transla∣ting of the same Dialogue two or three times over, and am loth to prescribe any thing without an example, I have therefore thought good to add here the foregoing threefold Translation of the first of those of Mr. Clark my ever to be honoured Master's Dialogues, which I spake of before. I presume himself would he have done it, as he hath expressed his mind to the contrary, could have done it hugely better, not only as being infinitely more able at every thing than I am, but also as being better acquain∣ted with the meaning of his own words, than I can be. Yet what is done, such as it is, may serve for an Exemplisication of what is to do; and that's enough for my design at present. He that likes it not as it is, may be pleased to do it of himself to his own better liking. There are many lucky hits at Translating such kind of Lan∣guage as this, which a man cannot at all times hit of, and when he pleases.

FINIS.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Non utomnia dicerem, sectatus, quod infinitum e∣rat; sed ut maximè ne∣cessaria. Quintil. l. 1. c. 9.
• * 1.2

  Of the Da∣tive and Ab∣lative Plur. of the First Declension.
• * 1.3

  Of the Voca∣tive Case of the Second Declension.
• * 1.4

  Of the Ac∣cusat. Sing. of the Third Declens.
• * 1.5

  Of the Abl. Case Sing. of the Third De lension. Nouns end∣ing only in i in their Abl. Sing.
• * 1.6

  Yet Plaut. Epid. 1. 1. hath Theti in the Abl. Tum ille prognatus Theti, &c.
• * 1.7

  Nouns end∣ind both in e and i in their Ablat. Sing.
• * 1.8

  Of the Nom. and Accus. Plural of the Third De∣clension in the Mas and Fem. Genn∣der.
• * 1.9

  Voss. de A∣nal. l. c. 10. Danes. Schol. p. 55.
• * 1.10

  Of the Nom. and Accus. Plur. of the Third Decl. in the Neut. Gend.
• * 1.11

  Of the Gen. C••s•• Plur. of the third Declension.
• * 1.12

  Dos est mag∣na parenti∣um Virtus. Hor. l. 3 Od. 24.
• * 1.13

  Yet Justin, l. 1. from princeps formeth principium.
• * 1.14

  Pisces at∣tritu ven∣trium co∣eunt. Plin. l. 9. c. 20.
• * 1.15

  Faucium is read in Plin. l. 21. c. 21. crucium in Terrul. ••••••cum. is read in Plin. l. 15. c. 22.
• * 1.16

  And by A∣nalogie os, ••¦r••s, orium, if it were to be used.
• * 1.17

  Mr. Farna∣by saith pus, purunis
• * 1.18

  Epist. ad Tr••ll.
• * 1.19

  Of the Dat Case Plur. of the Third Declension.
• * 1.20

  Of the Gen. Case Sing. of the Fourth Declension.
• * 1.21

  Of the Dat. Case Sing of the Fourth Declension.
• * 1.22

  If vestitu be not there the Abl. Case, as some think
• * 1.23

  Of the Abl. Case Sing. of the Fourth Declension.
• * 1.24

  Of the Gen. Case Plur. of the Fourth Declension.
• * 1.25

  Of the Dat. Case Plur of the Fourth Declension.
• * 1.26

  Of the Gen. Case Sing. of the Fif••h Declension.
• * 1.27

  Of the Dat. Case Sing. of the Fifth Declension.
• * 1.28

  Celerissimus found in Manlius and Ennius is from celeris.
• * 1.29

  Vossius, saith Cato, used it: but that now it is almost grown obsc∣••ete.
• * 1.30

  Which yet I do not recom∣mend to be used. Ʋsed by Plaut. in Tri••. in imi∣tation of A∣ristophane••, saying 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.
• * 1.31

  Dextimus and Sinisti∣mus signifie no more, than Dexter and sinister. See Alvar.
• † 1.32

  Gell. l. 5. c. 14.
• * 1.33

  Extremis∣simus is used by Lipsius l. 2. de Cruce c. 12.
• † 1.34

  Minimissi∣mus by Jan. D••usa Plautin. Ex∣plic. l. 3. c. 23.
• * 1.35

  Aio.
• * 1.36

  Ausim.
• * 1.37

  Salve.
• * 1.38

  Ave.
• * 1.39

  Cedo.
• * 1.40

  Faxim.
• * 1.41

  Forem.
• * 1.42

  Quaeso.
• * 1.43

  Infit.
• * 1.44

  Inquam.
• * 1.45

  Vale.
• * 1.46

  Apage.
• * 1.47

  Ovat.
• * 1.48

  Explicit.
• * 1.49

  Scio.
• * 1.50

  Soleo.
• * 1.51

  Furo.
• * 1.52

  Daris.
• * 1.53

  Faris.
• * 1.54

  Odi.
• * 1.55

  Coepi.
• * 1.56

  Memini.
• * 1.57

  Novi.
• * 1.58

  ☜
• * 1.59

  Vid. Eng. Partic. c. 100. r. 7. n.
• * 1.60

  Horn de Ʋsu Autho∣ris, p. 89.